US20080261913A1 - Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of liver disorders - Google Patents

Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of liver disorders Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20080261913A1
US20080261913A1 US12/005,938 US593807A US2008261913A1 US 20080261913 A1 US20080261913 A1 US 20080261913A1 US 593807 A US593807 A US 593807A US 2008261913 A1 US2008261913 A1 US 2008261913A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
compound
alkyl
optionally substituted
aryl
amino
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US12/005,938
Inventor
Jean-Pierre Sommadossi
Gilles Gosselin
Claire Pierra
Christian Perigaud
Suzanne Peyrottes
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique CNRS
Universite Montpellier 2 Sciences et Techniques
Idenix Pharmaceuticals LLC
Original Assignee
Universite Montpellier 2 Sciences et Techniques
Idenix Pharmaceuticals LLC
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Universite Montpellier 2 Sciences et Techniques, Idenix Pharmaceuticals LLC filed Critical Universite Montpellier 2 Sciences et Techniques
Priority to US12/005,938 priority Critical patent/US20080261913A1/en
Assigned to CENTRE NATIONAL DE LA RECHERCHE SCIENTIFIQUE reassignment CENTRE NATIONAL DE LA RECHERCHE SCIENTIFIQUE ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: PEYROTTES, SUZANNE, GOSSELIN, GILLES
Assigned to L'UNIVERSITE MONTPELLIER II reassignment L'UNIVERSITE MONTPELLIER II ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: PERIGAUD, CHRISTIAN
Assigned to IDENIX PHARMACEUTICALS, INC. reassignment IDENIX PHARMACEUTICALS, INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: SOMMADOSSI, JEAN-PIERRE
Assigned to IDENIX PHARMACEUTICALS, INC. reassignment IDENIX PHARMACEUTICALS, INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: PIERRA, CLAIRE
Assigned to IDENIX PHARMACEUTICALS, INC. reassignment IDENIX PHARMACEUTICALS, INC. CORRECTIVE ASSIGNMENT TO CORRECT THE DOCKET NUMBER PREVIOUSLY RECORDED ON REEL 021170 FRAME 0381. ASSIGNOR(S) HEREBY CONFIRMS THE ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNOR'S INTEREST. Assignors: PIERRA, CLAIRE
Publication of US20080261913A1 publication Critical patent/US20080261913A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07HSUGARS; DERIVATIVES THEREOF; NUCLEOSIDES; NUCLEOTIDES; NUCLEIC ACIDS
    • C07H17/00Compounds containing heterocyclic radicals directly attached to hetero atoms of saccharide radicals
    • C07H17/02Heterocyclic radicals containing only nitrogen as ring hetero atoms
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07FACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F9/00Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic System
    • C07F9/02Phosphorus compounds
    • C07F9/06Phosphorus compounds without P—C bonds
    • C07F9/22Amides of acids of phosphorus
    • C07F9/24Esteramides
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/66Phosphorus compounds
    • A61K31/675Phosphorus compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. pyridoxal phosphate
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/70Carbohydrates; Sugars; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/7042Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings
    • A61K31/7052Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides
    • A61K31/7056Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides containing five-membered rings with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/70Carbohydrates; Sugars; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/7042Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings
    • A61K31/7052Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides
    • A61K31/706Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides containing six-membered rings with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/7064Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides containing six-membered rings with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom containing condensed or non-condensed pyrimidines
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/70Carbohydrates; Sugars; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/7042Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings
    • A61K31/7052Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides
    • A61K31/706Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides containing six-membered rings with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/7064Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides containing six-membered rings with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom containing condensed or non-condensed pyrimidines
    • A61K31/7068Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides containing six-membered rings with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom containing condensed or non-condensed pyrimidines having oxo groups directly attached to the pyrimidine ring, e.g. cytidine, cytidylic acid
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/70Carbohydrates; Sugars; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/7042Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings
    • A61K31/7052Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides
    • A61K31/706Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides containing six-membered rings with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/7064Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides containing six-membered rings with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom containing condensed or non-condensed pyrimidines
    • A61K31/7068Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides containing six-membered rings with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom containing condensed or non-condensed pyrimidines having oxo groups directly attached to the pyrimidine ring, e.g. cytidine, cytidylic acid
    • A61K31/7072Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides containing six-membered rings with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom containing condensed or non-condensed pyrimidines having oxo groups directly attached to the pyrimidine ring, e.g. cytidine, cytidylic acid having two oxo groups directly attached to the pyrimidine ring, e.g. uridine, uridylic acid, thymidine, zidovudine
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/70Carbohydrates; Sugars; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/7042Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings
    • A61K31/7052Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides
    • A61K31/706Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides containing six-membered rings with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/7064Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides containing six-membered rings with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom containing condensed or non-condensed pyrimidines
    • A61K31/7076Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides containing six-membered rings with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom containing condensed or non-condensed pyrimidines containing purines, e.g. adenosine, adenylic acid
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/70Carbohydrates; Sugars; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/7042Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings
    • A61K31/7052Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides
    • A61K31/706Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides containing six-membered rings with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/7064Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides containing six-membered rings with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom containing condensed or non-condensed pyrimidines
    • A61K31/7076Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides containing six-membered rings with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom containing condensed or non-condensed pyrimidines containing purines, e.g. adenosine, adenylic acid
    • A61K31/708Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides containing six-membered rings with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom containing condensed or non-condensed pyrimidines containing purines, e.g. adenosine, adenylic acid having oxo groups directly attached to the purine ring system, e.g. guanosine, guanylic acid
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/16Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for liver or gallbladder disorders, e.g. hepatoprotective agents, cholagogues, litholytics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P13/00Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
    • A61P13/12Drugs for disorders of the urinary system of the kidneys
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/08Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease
    • A61P19/10Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease for osteoporosis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/24Antidepressants
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02Ophthalmic agents
    • A61P27/06Antiglaucoma agents or miotics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/04Anorexiants; Antiobesity agents
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/06Antihyperlipidemics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/08Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
    • A61P3/10Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis for hyperglycaemia, e.g. antidiabetics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12Antivirals
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12Antivirals
    • A61P31/14Antivirals for RNA viruses
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12Antivirals
    • A61P31/20Antivirals for DNA viruses
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00Antineoplastic agents
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P5/00Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system
    • A61P5/14Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system of the thyroid hormones, e.g. T3, T4
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P5/00Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system
    • A61P5/48Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system of the pancreatic hormones
    • A61P5/50Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system of the pancreatic hormones for increasing or potentiating the activity of insulin
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/04Inotropic agents, i.e. stimulants of cardiac contraction; Drugs for heart failure
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/06Antiarrhythmics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/10Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07FACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F9/00Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic System
    • C07F9/02Phosphorus compounds
    • C07F9/547Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom
    • C07F9/6558Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom containing at least two different or differently substituted hetero rings neither condensed among themselves nor condensed with a common carbocyclic ring or ring system
    • C07F9/65586Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom containing at least two different or differently substituted hetero rings neither condensed among themselves nor condensed with a common carbocyclic ring or ring system at least one of the hetero rings does not contain nitrogen as ring hetero atom
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07FACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F9/00Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic System
    • C07F9/02Phosphorus compounds
    • C07F9/547Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom
    • C07F9/6561Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom containing systems of two or more relevant hetero rings condensed among themselves or condensed with a common carbocyclic ring or ring system, with or without other non-condensed hetero rings
    • C07F9/65616Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom containing systems of two or more relevant hetero rings condensed among themselves or condensed with a common carbocyclic ring or ring system, with or without other non-condensed hetero rings containing the ring system having three or more than three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members, e.g. purine or analogs
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07HSUGARS; DERIVATIVES THEREOF; NUCLEOSIDES; NUCLEOTIDES; NUCLEIC ACIDS
    • C07H19/00Compounds containing a hetero ring sharing one ring hetero atom with a saccharide radical; Nucleosides; Mononucleotides; Anhydro-derivatives thereof
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07HSUGARS; DERIVATIVES THEREOF; NUCLEOSIDES; NUCLEOTIDES; NUCLEIC ACIDS
    • C07H19/00Compounds containing a hetero ring sharing one ring hetero atom with a saccharide radical; Nucleosides; Mononucleotides; Anhydro-derivatives thereof
    • C07H19/02Compounds containing a hetero ring sharing one ring hetero atom with a saccharide radical; Nucleosides; Mononucleotides; Anhydro-derivatives thereof sharing nitrogen
    • C07H19/04Heterocyclic radicals containing only nitrogen atoms as ring hetero atom
    • C07H19/06Pyrimidine radicals

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to compounds, methods and pharmaceutical compositions, for use in treatment and prevention of disorders of the liver, including cancer.
  • Drug induced toxicities and pharmacological side effects are often associated with interactions by the drug or drug metabolite in tissues not associated with the pharmacological benefits of the drug therapy. In other cases, the desired pharmacological effect is poorly achieved either because of dose-limiting toxicities or inadequate drug levels in the target tissues.
  • High organ specificity can be achieved by a variety of mechanisms including local administration to the target organ and drug-protein conjugates. Local administration to the target organ is an invasive procedure. Drug-protein conjugates exhibit poor oral bioavailability, limitations in carrier manufacturing and drug loading, a potential for diminished liver uptake due to down regulation of the receptor in diseased tissue, and a high incidence of antibody induction.
  • a third approach entails use of prodrugs that are activated by enzymes highly enriched in the target organ.
  • Phosphoroamidate and phosphonoamidate compound forms of a variety of therapeutic agents are provided, as well as methods for their manufacture and use in the treatment of a variety of disorders including liver cancer, inflammation, fibrosis and metabolic disorders.
  • the compound is a S-pivaloyl-2-thioethyl phosphoroamidate, S-pivaloyl-2-thioethyl phosphonoamidate, S-hydroxypivaloyl-2-thioethyl phosphoroamidate or S-hydroxypivaloyl-2-thioethyl phosphonoamidate.
  • a “phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compound of a therapeutic agent” includes a therapeutic agent derivatized to include a phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate group.
  • the therapeutic agent is, for example, an anti-cancer agent that includes, or has been derivatized to include, a reactive group, such as a hydroxyl, for attachment of the phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate moiety.
  • Such therapeutic agents include, but are not limited to nucleosides and nucleoside analogs including acyclic nucleosides.
  • phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compounds of nucleotides and nucleotide analogs such as 2′-branched and 4′-branched nucleosides are provided.
  • Such compounds can be administered in an effective amount for the treatment of liver disorders, including cancer.
  • the parent drug is obtained from selective metabolism of the phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compound in the liver and thus the parent drug provided herein is capable of accumulating in the liver. Accordingly, provided are methods of directing phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compounds disclosed herein to the liver.
  • phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compounds of pharmaceutical agents for the treatment of a liver disorder can be made and used therapeutically as described herein.
  • a variety of phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compounds can be used in the treatment of liver disorders.
  • therapeutic agents for the treatment of liver cancer can be derivatized to form a phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compound as described herein, and used for the treatment of liver cancers.
  • Liver cancers that can be treated include benign tumors, malignant tumors, hemangioma, hepatic adenomas, focal nodular hyperplasia, hepatocellular carcinoma, fibrolamellar carcinoma, cholangiocarcinomas, bile duct cancers, and other primary and metastatic cancers of the liver.
  • Phosphoroamidate and phosphonoamidate compounds of a variety of therapeutic agents are provided.
  • the compounds can be formed using methods available in the art and those disclosed herein. Such compounds can be used in some embodiments to enhance delivery of the drug to the liver.
  • the compound comprises an S-acyl-2-thioethyl phosphoroamidate or an S-acyl-2-thioethyl phosphonoamidate derivative, e.g., a S-pivaloyl-2-thioethyl phosphoroamidate or a S-hydroxypivaloyl-2-thioethyl phosphonoamidate derivative.
  • the phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compounds, as well as salts thereof, and compositions comprising the compounds, provided herein are useful for treatment of disorders of the liver, including cancer.
  • the phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compounds, as well as salts thereof, and compositions comprising the compounds, provided herein are useful for treatment of metabolic diseases, such as diabetes, hyperlipidemia, atherosclerosis, and obesity.
  • the compounds, as well as salts thereof, and compositions comprising the compounds, provided herein are useful for treatment of liver fibrosis and inflammation.
  • the compound provided herein is a compound of Formula I:
  • Z is O or S
  • each W is independently O or S;
  • R y and R u each independently represent alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, amino, aminoalkyl, alkoxy, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl, all optionally substituted;
  • R a and R b are selected as follows:
  • R a and R b are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyarylalkyl, acyloxyalkyl, aminocarbonylalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, aryl, aryl alkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl or heterocyclyl, all optionally substituted; or
  • R a and R b together with the nitrogen atom on which they are substituted form a 3-7 membered heterocyclic or heteroaryl ring;
  • R 1 is a moiety derivable by removal of a hydrogen from a group, such as a hydroxy group, of a therapeutic agent such as an anti-cancer drug.
  • Z is O, S, NH or NR w , where R w is, e.g., alkyl, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, amino, aminoalkyl, alkoxy, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl, all optionally substituted;
  • each W is O, S, NH or NR w , where R w is, e.g., alkyl, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, amino, aminoalkyl, alkoxy, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl, all optionally substituted;
  • R y and R u each independently represent alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, amino, aminoalkyl, alkoxy, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl, all optionally substituted;
  • R a and R b are selected as follows:
  • R a and R b are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyarylalkyl, acyloxyalkyl, aminocarbonylalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, aryl, aryl alkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl or heterocyclyl, all optionally substituted; or
  • R a and R b together with the nitrogen atom on which they are substituted form a 3-7 membered heterocyclic or heteroaryl ring;
  • R 1 is a moiety derivable by removal of a hydrogen from a group, such as a hydroxy group, of a therapeutic agent such as an anti-cancer drug.
  • compounds of Formula I can be designed or prepared by reaction, e.g., at a hydroxy group of said drug, for example via condensation or dehydration.
  • exemplary substituents, such as R 1 groups are identified as a drug in a phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compound, e.g. in a formula
  • the compound comprises a derivative, e.g. a radical of the anti-cancer drug.
  • Those derivatives can for example be prepared by elimination of a hydrogen radical from a hydroxy group of the drug, for instance in a dehydration reaction.
  • R 1 is a nucleoside comprising a cyclic or acyclic sugar or an analog thereof.
  • R 1 is an anti-cancer drug selected from clarubicin, decitabine, daunorubicin, dihydro-5-azacytidine, doxorubicin, epirubicin, estramustin, etoposide, fludarabine, 7-hydroxychlorpromazin, neplanocin A, podophyllotoxin, tezacitabine, troxacitabine, vinblastin, vincristin, vindesin, etoposide, teniposide, NK-611, camptothecin, irinotecan, 9-aminocamptothecin, GG-211, topotecan, paclitaxel, Azatoxin, coformycin, pirarubicin, nelarabine and losoxantrone.
  • clarubicin clarubicin, decitabine, daunorubicin, dihydro-5-azacytidine
  • doxorubicin epirubicin
  • R 1 is an immunosuppressant, such as pentostatin, combretastatin A-4, mycophenolic acid or mitoxantrone.
  • R y is substituted alkyl, e.g. hydroxyalkyl or aminoalkyl; and R a and R b are independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, benzyl or substituted benzyl, for instance hydroxy- or amino-substituted alkyl or benzyl.
  • R y is —OR c , —C(R c ) 3 or —NHR c where each R c is independently alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl or substituted aryl, for instance hydroxy- or amino-substituted alkyl or aryl; and R a and R b are independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, benzyl or substituted benzyl, for instance hydroxy- or amino-substituted alkyl or benzyl.
  • R a and R b are independently benzyl or substituted alkyl.
  • R y is selected from the group consisting of alkyl and hydroxyalkyl. In certain embodiments, R y is —C(CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 OH.
  • the compounds provided herein are selected such that R 1 is not 3′-azido-2′,3′-dideoxythymidine.
  • the compound provided herein is a compound of Formula IIa or IIb:
  • R y is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, amino, aminoalkyl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl, all optionally substituted;
  • R a and R b are selected as follows:
  • R a and R b are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyarylalkyl, acyloxyalkyl, aminocarbonylalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, aryl, aryl alkyl cycloalkyl, heteroaryl or heterocyclyl, all optionally substituted; or
  • R 1 is a drug such as an anti-cancer drug.
  • R y is substituted alkyl, e.g. hydroxyalkyl or aminoalkyl; and R a and R b are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, benzyl or substituted benzyl, for instance hydroxy- or amino-substituted alkyl or benzyl.
  • R y is —OR c , —C(R c ) 3 or —NHR c where each R c is independently alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl or substituted aryl, for instance hydroxy- or amino-substituted alkyl or aryl; and R a and R b are independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, benzyl or substituted benzyl, for instance hydroxy- or amino-substituted alkyl or benzyl. In a further embodiment, R a and R b are each independently benzyl or substituted alkyl. In a further embodiment, R y is selected from the group consisting of alkyl and hydroxyalkyl. In certain embodiments, R y is —C(CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 OH.
  • provided herein are:
  • phosphoroamidate and phosphonoamidate formulas and compounds are provided, which optionally act as thyroid hormone receptor effectors:
  • each R if present, is independently alkyl, halogen or hydroxyl
  • X if present, is CH 2 , O or S;
  • R y is optionally substituted alkyl, wherein the substituted alkyl is optionally hydroxyalkyl or aminoalkyl, e.g., —C(CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 OH; and
  • R a and R b are independently hydrogen; unsubstituted alkyl; or alkyl substituted with aryl, amino, amido, hydroxyl, alkoxy, aminoalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each optionally substituted; wherein, in one embodiment, R a and R b are independently H or a benzyl that is optionally substituted, for example, with hydroxy or amino.
  • R a is hydrogen
  • R b is —CH 2 —C 6 H 5
  • R y is —C(CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 OH.
  • the thyroid hormone receptor effector compound provided herein has a formula selected from:
  • R x and R z are each independently hydrogen or alkyl
  • R w is alkyl
  • R y is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, amino, aminoalkyl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl, all optionally substituted;
  • R a and R b are selected as follows:
  • R a and R b are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyarylalkyl, acyloxyalkyl, aminocarbonylalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, aryl, aryl alkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl or heterocyclyl, all optionally substituted; or
  • R a and R b together with the nitrogen atom on which they are substituted form a 3-7 membered heterocyclic or heteroaryl ring.
  • the thyroid hormone receptor effector provided herein is selected from:
  • R a is hydrogen
  • R b is —CH 2 —C 6 H 5
  • R y is —C(CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 OH.
  • the compound or Formula selected from IIIa or b, IVa or b, Va or b, VIa or b, VIIa or b, VIII a or b is derived from a phosphonate compound useful for inhibiting gluconeogenesis, optionally by inhibiting the enzyme fructose 1,6-bisphosphatase (FBPase).
  • FBPase fructose 1,6-bisphosphatase
  • the compound or Formula selected from IXa or b, Xa or b, XIa or b, XIIa or b, XIIIa or b and XIVa or b is derived from a compound useful for inhibiting gluconeogenesis, optionally by inhibiting the enzyme fructose 1,6-bisphosphatase (FBPase).
  • FBPase fructose 1,6-bisphosphatase
  • the compound or Formula selected from IIIa or b, IVa or b, Va or b, VIa or b, VIIa or b, VIII a or b is a phosphonic acid-containing compound that binds to a thyroid receptor in the liver, and is optionally an agonist, antagonist, partial agonist or partial antagonist of T3. Inhibition of gluconeogenesis can result in blood glucose lowering in diabetic subjects. Such compounds can exhibit enhanced pharmacokinetics including oral bioavailability and liver drug levels.
  • a method of treatment of a subject in need thereof comprising administering to the subject a phosphoroamidate and phosphonoamidate compound or Formula selected from IIIa or b, IVa or b, Va or b, VIa or b, VIIa or b, VIII a or b, IXa or b, X a or b, XIa or b, XIIa or b, XIIIa or b and XIVa or b or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, enantiomer, ester or prodrug thereof, in an amount effective for one or more of the following:
  • thyroid disease thyroid cancer
  • depression glaucoma
  • cardiac arrhythmias heart failure
  • osteoporosis treating thyroid disease, thyroid cancer, depression, glaucoma, cardiac arrhythmias, heart failure, or osteoporosis
  • lipids e.g., cholesterol
  • glucose e.g., glucose
  • lipoproteins e.g., glucose
  • triglycerides e.g., glucose
  • T3-responsive genes e.g., T3-responsive genes
  • the compounds do not affect thyroid function, thyroid production of circulating iodinated thyronines such as T3 and T4, and/or the ratio of T3 to T4.
  • compositions comprising the compounds, e.g., in a dosage unit suitable for administration, e.g., oral administration.
  • FIG. 1 depicts depletion of B184 (NM108 hydroxySATE phosphoroamidate) after incubation with and without NADPH in monkey liver S9.
  • FIG. 2 depicts depletion of B102 (NM107 hydroxySATE phosphoroamidate) after incubation with and without NADPH in monkey liver S9.
  • liver disorders such as cancer
  • metabolic diseases such as diabetes, hyperlipidemia, atherosclerosis, and obesity.
  • dosage forms useful for such methods.
  • alkyl includes a saturated straight, branched, or cyclic, primary, secondary, or tertiary hydrocarbon of typically C 1 to C 10 , and specifically includes methyl, CF 3 , CCl 3 , CFCl 2 , CF 2 Cl, ethyl, CH 2 CF 3 , CF 2 CF 3 , propyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, secbutyl, t-butyl, pentyl, cyclopentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, isohexyl, cyclohexyl, cyclohexylmethyl, 3-methylpentyl, 2,2-dimethylbutyl, and 2,3-dimethylbutyl.
  • the term includes both substituted and unsubstituted alkyl groups, and particularly includes halogenated alkyl groups, and even more particularly fluorinated alkyl groups.
  • moieties with which the alkyl group can be substituted are selected from the group consisting of halogen (fluoro, chloro, bromo or iodo), hydroxyl, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, alkoxy, aryloxy, nitro, cyano, sulfonic acid, sulfate, phosphonic acid, phosphate, or phosphonate, either unprotected, or protected as necessary, as known to those skilled in the art, for example, as taught in Greene, et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991, hereby incorporated by reference.
  • lower alkyl includes a C to C 4 saturated straight, branched, or if appropriate, a cyclic (for example, cyclopropyl) alkyl group, including both substituted and unsubstituted moieties.
  • Alkylene includes divalent saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon groups particularly having up to about 11 carbon atoms and more particularly 1 to 6 carbon atoms which can be straight-chained or branched. This term is exemplified by groups such as methylene (—CH 2 —), ethylene (—CH 2 CH 2 —), the propylene isomers (e.g., —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 — and —CH(CH 3 )CH 2 —) and the like.
  • Alkenyl includes monovalent olefinically unsaturated hydrocarbon groups, in certain embodiment, having up to about 11 carbon atoms, from 2 to 8 carbon atoms, or from 2 to 6 carbon atoms, which can be straight-chained or branched and having at least 1 or from 1 to 2 sites of olefinic unsaturation.
  • alkenyl groups include ethenyl (—CH ⁇ CH 2 ), n-propenyl (—CH 2 CH ⁇ CH 2 ), isopropenyl (—C(CH 3 ) ⁇ CH 2 ), vinyl and substituted vinyl, and the like.
  • Alkenylene includes divalent olefinically unsaturated hydrocarbon groups, in certain embodiments, having up to about 11 carbon atoms or from 2 to 6 carbon atoms which can be straight-chained or branched and having at least 1 or from 1 to 2 sites of olefinic unsaturation. This term is exemplified by groups such as ethenylene (—CH ⁇ CH—), the propenylene isomers (e.g., —CH ⁇ CHCH 2 — and —C(CH 3 ) ⁇ CH— and —CH ⁇ C(CH 3 )—) and the like.
  • Alkynyl includes acetylenically unsaturated hydrocarbon groups, in certain embodiments, having up to about 11 carbon atoms or from 2 to 6 carbon atoms which can be straight-chained or branched and having at least 1 or from 1 to 2 sites of alkynyl unsaturation.
  • alkynyl groups include acetylenic, ethynyl (—C ⁇ CH), propargyl (—CH 2 C ⁇ CH), and the like.
  • aryl includes phenyl, biphenyl, or naphthyl, and preferably phenyl.
  • the term includes both substituted and unsubstituted moieties.
  • the aryl group can be substituted with any described moiety, including, but not limited to, one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of halogen (fluoro, chloro, bromo or iodo), alkyl, hydroxyl, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, alkoxy, aryloxy, nitro, cyano, sulfonic acid, sulfate, phosphonic acid, phosphate, or phosphonate, either unprotected, or protected as necessary, as known to those skilled in the art, for example, as taught in Greene, et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis , John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991.
  • Alkoxy includes the group —OR where R is alkyl. Particular alkoxy groups include, by way of example, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, tert-butoxy, sec-butoxy, n-pentoxy, n-hexoxy, 1,2-dimethylbutoxy, and the like.
  • Alkoxycarbonyl includes a radical —C(O)-alkoxy where alkoxy is as defined herein.
  • Amino includes the radical —NH 2 .
  • Carboxyl includes the radical —C(O)OH.
  • alkylamino or “arylamino” includes an amino group that has one or two alkyl or aryl substituents, respectively. Unless otherwise specifically stated in this application, when alkyl is a suitable moiety, lower alkyl is preferred. Similarly, when alkyl or lower alkyl is a suitable moiety, unsubstituted alkyl or lower alkyl is preferred.
  • Halogen or “halo” includes chloro, bromo, fluoro or iodo.
  • “Monoalkylamino” includes the group alkyl-NR′—, wherein R′ is selected from hydrogen and alkyl.
  • Thioalkoxy includes the group —SR where R is alkyl.
  • protected refers to a group that is added to an oxygen, nitrogen, or phosphorus atom to prevent its further reaction or for other purposes.
  • oxygen and nitrogen protecting groups are known to those skilled in the art of organic synthesis.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable salt” includes any salt of a compound provided herein which retains its biological properties and which is not toxic or otherwise undesirable for pharmaceutical use. Such salts may be derived from a variety of organic and inorganic counter-ions well known in the art. Such salts include: (1) acid addition salts formed with organic or inorganic acids such as hydrochloric, hydrobromic, sulfuric, nitric, phosphoric, sulfamic, acetic, trifluoroacetic, trichloroacetic, propionic, hexanoic, cyclopentylpropionic, glycolic, glutaric, pyruvic, lactic, malonic, succinic, sorbic, ascorbic, malic, maleic, fumaric, tartaric, citric, benzoic, 3-(4-hydroxybenzoyl)benzoic, picric, cinnamic, mandelic, phthalic, lauric, methanesulfonic, ethanesulfonic
  • Salts further include, by way of example only, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, tetraalkylammonium and the like, and when the compound contains a basic functionality, salts of non-toxic organic or inorganic acids, such as hydrohalides, e.g.
  • alkaryl or “alkylaryl” includes an aryl group with an alkyl substituent.
  • aralkyl or arylalkyl includes an alkyl group with an aryl substituent.
  • purine or “pyrimidine” base includes, but is not limited to, adenine, N 6 -alkylpurines, N 6 -acylpurines (wherein acyl is C(O)(alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or arylalkyl), N 6 -benzylpurine, N 6 -halopurine, N 6 -vinylpurine, N 6 -acetylenic purine, N 6 -acyl purine, N 6 -hydroxyalkyl purine, N 6 -alkylaminopurine, N 6 -thioalkyl purine, N 2 -alkylpurines, N 2 -alkyl-6-thiopurines, thymine, cytosine, 5-fluorocytosine, 5-methylcytosine, 6-azapyrimidine, including 6-azacytosine, 2- and/or 4-mercaptopyrmidine, uracil, 5-halouracil, including 5-fluorouracil, C
  • Purine bases include, but are not limited to, guanine, adenine, hypoxanthine, 7-deazaguanine, 7-deazaadenine, 2,6-diaminopurine, and 6-chloropurine. Functional oxygen and nitrogen groups on the base can be protected as necessary or desired.
  • Suitable protecting groups are well known to those skilled in the art, and include trimethylsilyl, dimethylhexylsilyl, t-butyldimethylsilyl, and t-butyldiphenylsilyl, trityl, alkyl groups, and acyl groups such as acetyl and propionyl, methanesulfonyl, and p-toluenesulfonyl.
  • acyl or “O-linked ester” includes a group of the formula C(O)R′, wherein R′ is an straight, branched, or cyclic alkyl (including lower alkyl), carboxylate reside of amino acid, aryl including phenyl, alkaryl, arylalkyl including benzyl, alkoxyalkyl including methoxymethyl, aryloxyalkyl such as phenoxymethyl; or substituted alkyl (including lower alkyl), aryl including phenyl optionally substituted with chloro, bromo, fluoro, iodo, C 1 to C 4 alkyl or C 1 to C 4 alkoxy, sulfonate esters such as alkyl or arylalkyl sulphonyl including methanesulfonyl, the mono, di or triphosphate ester, trityl or monomethoxy-trityl, substituted benzyl, alkaryl, arylalkyl
  • Aryl groups in the esters optimally comprise a phenyl group.
  • acyl groups include acetyl, trifluoroacetyl, methylacetyl, cyclpropylacetyl, propionyl, butyryl, hexanoyl, heptanoyl, octanoyl, neo-heptanoyl, phenylacetyl, 2-acetoxy-2-phenylacetyl, diphenylacetyl, ⁇ -methoxy- ⁇ -trifluoromethyl-phenylacetyl, bromoacetyl, 2-nitro-benzeneacetyl, 4-chloro-benzeneacetyl, 2-chloro-2,2-diphenylacetyl, 2-chloro-2-phenylacetyl, trimethylacetyl, chlorodifluoroacetyl, perfluoroacetyl, fluoroacetyl, bromodifluor
  • amino acid includes naturally occurring and synthetic ⁇ , ⁇ ⁇ or ⁇ amino acids, and includes but is not limited to, amino acids found in proteins, i.e. glycine, alanine, valine, leucine, isoleucine, methionine, phenylalanine, tryptophan, proline, serine, threonine, cysteine, tyrosine, asparagine, glutamine, aspartate, glutamate, lysine, arginine and histidine.
  • the amino acid is in the L-configuration.
  • the amino acid can be a derivative of alanyl, valinyl, leucinyl, isoleuccinyl, prolinyl, phenylalaninyl, tryptophanyl, methioninyl, glycinyl, serinyl, threoninyl, cysteinyl, tyrosinyl, asparaginyl, glutaminyl, aspartoyl, glutaroyl, lysinyl, argininyl, histidinyl, ⁇ -alanyl, ⁇ -valinyl, ⁇ -leucinyl, ⁇ -isoleuccinyl, ⁇ -prolinyl, ⁇ -phenylalaninyl, ⁇ -tryptophanyl, ⁇ -methioninyl, ⁇ -glycinyl, ⁇ -serinyl, ⁇ -threoninyl, ⁇ -cysteinyl
  • nucleoside composition that includes at least 85 or 90% by weight, preferably 95%, 98%, 99% or 100% by weight, of the designated enantiomer of that nucleoside.
  • the compounds are substantially free of enantiomers.
  • nucleoside composition that includes at least 85, 90%, 95%, 98%, 99% to 100% by weight, of the nucleoside, the remainder comprising other chemical species or enantiomers.
  • Solidvate includes a compound provided herein or a salt thereof, that further includes a stoichiometric or non-stoichiometric amount of solvent bound by non-covalent intermolecular forces. Where the solvent is water, the solvate is a hydrate.
  • the terms “subject” and “patient” are used interchangeably herein.
  • the terms “subject” and “subjects” refer to an animal, such as a mammal including a non-primate (e.g., a cow, pig, horse, cat, dog, rat, and mouse) and a primate (e.g., a monkey such as a cynomolgous monkey, a chimpanzee and a human), and for example, a human.
  • the subject is refractory or non-responsive to current treatments for cancer.
  • the subject is a farm animal (e.g., a horse, a cow, a pig, etc.) or a pet (e.g., a dog or a cat).
  • the subject is a human.
  • terapéutica agent refers to any agent(s) which can be used in the treatment or prevention of a disorder or one or more symptoms thereof.
  • therapeutic agent includes a compound provided herein.
  • a therapeutic agent is an agent which is known to be useful for, or has been or is currently being used for the treatment or prevention of a disorder or one or more symptoms thereof.
  • “Therapeutically effective amount” includes an amount of a compound or composition that, when administered to a subject for treating a disease, is sufficient to effect such treatment for the disease.
  • a “therapeutically effective amount” can vary depending on, inter alia, the compound, the disease and its severity, and the age, weight, etc., of the subject to be treated.
  • Treating” or “treatment” of any disease or disorder refers, in one embodiment, to ameliorating a disease or disorder that exists in a subject. In another embodiment, “treating” or “treatment” includes ameliorating at least one physical parameter, which may be indiscernible by the subject. In yet another embodiment, “treating” or “treatment” includes modulating the disease or disorder, either physically (e.g., stabilization of a discernible symptom) or physiologically (e.g., stabilization of a physical parameter) or both. In yet another embodiment, “treating” or “treatment” includes delaying the onset of the disease or disorder.
  • prophylactic agent and “prophylactic agents” as used refer to any agent(s) which can be used in the prevention of a disorder or one or more symptoms thereof.
  • the term “prophylactic agent” includes a compound provided herein.
  • the term “prophylactic agent” does not refer a compound provided herein.
  • a prophylactic agent is an agent which is known to be useful for, or has been or is currently being used to the prevent or impede the onset, development, progression and/or severity of a disorder.
  • prophylactically effective amount includes the amount of a therapy (e.g., prophylactic agent) which is sufficient to result in the prevention or reduction of the development, recurrence or onset of one or more symptoms associated with a disorder (, or to enhance or improve the prophylactic effect(s) of another therapy (e.g., another prophylactic agent).
  • a therapy e.g., prophylactic agent
  • another therapy e.g., another prophylactic agent
  • Phosphoroamidate and phosphonoamidate compounds of a variety of therapeutic agents can be formed using methods available in the art and those disclosed herein. Such compounds can be used in some embodiments to enhance delivery of the drug to the liver.
  • the compound is an S-acyl-2-thioethyl phosphoroamidate or an S-acyl-2-thioethyl phosphonoamidate derivative, e.g., a S-pivaloyl-2-thioethyl phosphoroamidate or a S-hydroxypivaloyl-2-thioethyl phosphonoamidate.
  • Therapeutic agents that can be derivatized to compound form include an anti-cancer agent that includes, or has been derivatized to include a reactive group for attachment of the phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate moiety, including but not limited to nucleosides and nucleoside analogues including acyclic nucleosides.
  • Phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compound forms of a variety of nucleosides can be formed from nucleosides disclosed herein and available in the art.
  • anti-cancer nucleosides can be derivatized to form a phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compound that can enhance delivery to the liver.
  • the phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compound provided herein is a compound of formula IIa or IIb:
  • R y is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, amino, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl, all optionally substituted;
  • R a and R b are selected as follows:
  • R a and R b are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyarylalkyl, acyloxyalkyl, aminocarbonylalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl or heterocyclyl, all optionally substituted; or
  • R 1 is a drug such as an anti-cancer drug.
  • the compound of formula IIa or IIb is selected with a proviso that when R y is tert-butyl or hydroxy-tert-butyl, then R 1 is not 3′-azido-2′,3′-dideoxythymidine.
  • R 1 , R a , R b and R y are optionally substituted with one or more substituents as defined herein, e.g., in the definitions.
  • the compounds are of Formula IIa or IIb, wherein R y is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, amino, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl;
  • R a and R b are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyarylalkyl, acyloxyalkyl, aminocarbonylalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl or heterocyclyl, all optionally substituted; and
  • R 1 is an anti-cancer drug.
  • R 1 or R 1 —CH 2 — is a nucleoside comprising a cyclic or acyclic sugar or analog thereof, including any nucleoside or analogue thereof described herein or known in the art.
  • R y is substituted alkyl, e.g. hydroxyalkyl or aminoalkyl; and R a and R b are independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, benzyl or substituted benzyl, for instance hydroxy- or amino-substituted alkyl or benzyl.
  • R y is —OR c , —C(R c ) 3 or —NHR c where each R c is independently alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl or substituted aryl, for instance hydroxy- or amino-substituted alkyl or aryl; and R a and R b are independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, benzyl or substituted benzyl, for instance hydroxy- or amino-substituted alkyl or benzyl. In a further embodiment, R a and R b are independently benzyl or substituted alkyl. In a further embodiment, R y is selected from the group consisting of alkyl and hydroxyalkyl.
  • R y is —C(CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 OH.
  • R 2 and R 3 are each hydrogen, R a is hydrogen, R b is —CH 2 —C 6 H 5 and R y is —C(CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 OH.
  • R y is alkyl or hydroxyalkyl. In one embodiment, R y is methyl, tert-butyl, hydroxy-tert-butyl or hydroxyethyl. In certain embodiments, R y is —C(CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 OH.
  • R a and R b are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyarylalkyl, acyloxyalkyl, aminocarbonylalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, aryl or arylalkyl, wherein the alkyl groups can be further substituted with one or more substitutents.
  • at least one of R a or R b is other than hydrogen.
  • R a and R b are each independently hydrogen, methyl or benzyl.
  • R y is —C(CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 OH and R a and R b are each independently hydrogen, methyl or benzyl. In certain embodiments, R y is —C(CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 OH and R a is hydrogen and R b is benzyl.
  • the compound provided herein is a compound of formula:
  • R 1 and R y are as defined in formula IIa or IIb.
  • R y is alkyl or hydroxyalkyl.
  • R y is methyl, tert-butyl, hydroxy-tert-butyl or hydroxyethyl.
  • R y is —C(CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 OH.
  • R y is substituted alkyl, e.g. hydroxyalkyl or aminoalkyl.
  • R y is —OR c , —C(R c ) 3 or —NHR c where each R c is independently alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl or substituted aryl, for instance hydroxy- or amino-substituted alkyl or aryl.
  • R y is selected from the group consisting of alkyl and hydroxyalkyl.
  • R y is —C(CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 OH.
  • the compound provided herein is a compound of formula:
  • R 1 is an anti-cancer drug, such as a nucleoside or nucleoside derivative
  • R a and R b are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyarylalkyl, acyloxyalkyl, aminocarbonylalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl or heterocyclyl, all optionally substituted; and
  • R a and R b is H and the other is alkyl optionally substituted with aryl, benzyl, or heteroaryl, each optionally substituted.
  • R a and R b are independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, benzyl or substituted benzyl, for instance hydroxy- or amino-substituted alkyl or benzyl.
  • R a and R b are independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, benzyl or substituted benzyl, for instance hydroxy- or amino-substituted alkyl or benzyl.
  • R a and R b are independently benzyl or substituted alkyl.
  • the compound provided herein is a compound of formula:
  • R 1 is a drug such as an anti-cancer drug.
  • anti-cancer drugs that can be derivatized as described herein, for example via a free hydroxyl group, or after adding a hydroxylated linker, are:
  • immunosupressant drugs that can be derivatized as described herein are:
  • R 1 is an anti-cancer drug such as aclarubicin, decitabine, daunorubicin, dihydro-5-azacytidine, doxorubicin, epirubicin, estramustin, etoposide, fludarabine, 7-hydroxychlorpromazin, neplanocin A, podophyllotoxin, tezacitabine, troxacitabine, vinblastin, vincristin, vindesin, etoposide, teniposide, NK-611, camptothecin, irinotecan, 9-aminocamptothecin, GG-211, topotecan, paclitaxel, azatoxin, coformycin, pirarubicin and losoxantrone.
  • the anti-cancer drug is camptothecin or azotoxin.
  • R 1 is a purine nucleoside analog (see, e.g., Robak et al., Curr. Med. Chem. 2006, 13, 3165-3189).
  • R 1 is, for example, a cytotoxic agent such as fludarabine (9- ⁇ -D-arabinofuranosyl-2-fluoradenine), cladribine (2-chloro-2′-deoxyadenosine, CldA), pentostatin (2′-deoxycoformycin, DCF), clofarabine (CAFdA), nelabarine, immucillin H (BCX-1777, forodesine) or 8-chloroadenosine (8-Cl-Ado).
  • fludarabine (9- ⁇ -D-arabinofuranosyl-2-fluoradenine
  • cladribine (2-chloro-2′-deoxyadenosine, CldA
  • pentostatin (2′-deoxycoformycin
  • DCF
  • the anti-cancer drug also can be (2′S)-2′-deoxy-2′-C-methylcytidine (SMDC), 1-(2-deoxy-2-methylene- ⁇ -D-erythro-pentofuranosyl)cytosine (DMDC), 1-(2-C-cyano-2-deoxy-1- ⁇ -D-arabino-pentofuranosyl)cytosine (CNDAC) or 1-(3-C-ethynyl- ⁇ -D-ribo-pentofuranosyl)cytosine (ECyd).
  • SMDC 2-deoxy-2′-C-methylcytidine
  • DMDC 1-(2-deoxy-2-methylene- ⁇ -D-erythro-pentofuranosyl)cytosine
  • CNDAC 1-(2-C-cyano-2-deoxy-1- ⁇ -D-arabino-pentofuranosyl)cytosine
  • ECyd 1-(3-C-ethynyl- ⁇ -D-ribo-pentofur
  • R 1 is an immunosuppressant, such as combretastatin A-4, mycophenolic acid, pentostatin or mitoxantrone.
  • the anti-cancer drug can be derivatized to include the phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate at, e.g., a free OH or free carboxy group.
  • R 1 is ( ⁇ )-2′-Deoxy-3′-oxacytidine (BCH-4556, Troxacitabine):
  • R 1 is tezacitabine (2′-fluoromethylene-2′-deoxycytidine).
  • R 1 is a 5′-aza-pyrimidine, such as 5′-aza-cytidine, 5′-azadeoxycytidine (decytabine), or trasrabine.
  • R 1 is a 2′-deoxy-2′-methylidenepyrimidine nucleoside compound, disclosed, e.g. in U.S. Pat. No. 5,401,726, such as 2′-deoxy-2′-methylidene-5-fluorocytidine, 2′-deoxy-2′-methylidene-5-chlorocytidine, 2′-deoxy-2′-methylidene-5-bromocytidine, 2′-deoxy-2′-methylidene-5-iodocytidine, 2′-deoxy-2′-methylidene-5-methylcytidine, 2′-deoxy-2′-methylidene-5-ethylcytidine, 2′-deoxy-2′-methylidene-5-ethylcytidine, 2′-deoxy-2′-methylidene-5-ethyluridine, 2′-deoxy-2′-methylidene-5-ethynyluridine or 2′-deoxy-2′-methyl
  • R 1 also can be a pyrido[2,3-D]pyrimidine or pyrimido[4,5-D]pyrimidine nucleoside as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,081,449, such as 4-amino-5-oxo-8-(4-C-hydroxymethyl- ⁇ -D-ribofuranosyl)pyrido-[2,3d]pyrimidine; 4-amino-5-oxo-8-(5(R)—C-methyl- ⁇ -D-ribofuranosyl)pyrido[2,3-d]pyrimidine; 4-amino-5-oxo-8-(5(R)—C-allyl- ⁇ -D-ribofuranosyl)pyrido[2,3-d]pyrimidine; 4-amino-5-oxo-8-(5(R,S)—C-ethynyl- ⁇ -D-ribofuranosyl)pyrido[2,3-d]pyrimidine; 4-Amino-5-
  • anti-cancer drugs include: dichloroacetal, Nexavar (sorafenib), cimetidine, adriamycin, Cytoxan (cyclophosphamide), methotrexate, vincristine, and 6-mercaptopurine.
  • the anti-cancer drug is selected from 2′,3-dideoxyinosine (ddl), or 2,3-didehydro-3-deoxythymidine (d4T). See, e.g., WO/2006/125166.
  • R 1 is an anti-inflammatory drug, such as a corticosteroid or a non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAID) that can be derivatized to include the phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate at, e.g., a free OH or free carboxy group.
  • NSAID non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs
  • corticosteroid drugs suitable for use herein are provided below:
  • NSAID drugs suitable for use herein are provided below:
  • compounds of Formula IIa are phosphonoamidates of an acyclic nucleoside phosphonate that have potential anti-cancer activity, such as (S)-9-[3-hydroxy-2-(phosphonomethoxy)-propyl]cytosine (HPMPC, cidofovir), (S)-9- ⁇ 3-hydroxy-2-(phosphonomethoxy)-propyl]adenine ((S)-HPMPA), phosphonomethoxyethylguanine (PMEG), phosphonomethoxyethyl-adenine (PMEA, adefovir), phosphonomethoxy-propyladenine (PMPA, tenofovir), acyclovir, ganciclovir or penciclovir.
  • HPMPC cidofovir
  • S 9- ⁇ 3-hydroxy-2-(phosphonomethoxy)-propyl]adenine
  • (S)-HPMPA) phosphonomethoxyethylguanine
  • phosphoroamidate and phosphonoamidate formulas and compounds are provided, which optionally act as thyroid hormone receptor effectors:
  • each R if present, is independently alkyl, halogen or hydroxyl
  • X if present, is CH 2 , O or S;
  • R y is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, amino, aminoalkyl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl, all optionally substituted;
  • R a and R b are selected as follows:
  • R a and R b are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyarylalkyl, acyloxyalkyl, aminocarbonylalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, aryl, aryl alkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl or heterocyclyl, all optionally substituted; or
  • R a and R b together with the nitrogen atom on which they are substituted form a 3-7 membered heterocyclic or heteroaryl ring.
  • the compound provided herein has formula selected from IIIa, IIIb, IVa, IVb, Va, Vb, VIa, VIb, VIIa, VIIb, VIIIa or VIIIb, wherein
  • each R if present, is independently alkyl, halogen or hydroxyl
  • X if present, is CH 2 , O or S;
  • R y is optionally substituted alkyl, wherein the substituted alkyl is optionally hydroxyalkyl or aminoalkyl, e.g., —C(CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 OH; and
  • R a and R b are independently hydrogen; unsubstituted alkyl; or alkyl substituted with aryl, amino, amido, hydroxyl, alkoxy, aminoalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each optionally substituted; wherein, in one embodiment, R a and R b are independently H or a benzyl that is optionally substituted, for example, with hydroxy or amino; and
  • the compound provided herein has a formula selected from:
  • R x and R z are each independently hydrogen or alkyl
  • R w is alkyl
  • X 1 is O or S
  • R y is optionally substituted alkyl, wherein the substituents when present are selected from hydroxy and amino;
  • R a and R b are each independently hydrogen or optionally substituted alkyl; where the substituents when present are selected from one or more, in one embodiment, one, two or three groups selected from aryl, amino, amido, hydroxyl, alkoxy, aryl and heteroaryl, each optionally substituted with hydroxy or amino.
  • the compound provided herein is selected from:
  • R x and R z are each hydrogen.
  • R w is alkyl.
  • R w is isopropyl.
  • R y is optionally substituted alkyl, wherein the substituents when present are selected from hydroxy and amino.
  • R y is —C(CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 OH.
  • R a and R b are each independently hydrogen or optionally substituted alkyl; where the substituents when present are selected from one or more, in one embodiment, one, two or three groups selected from aryl, amino, amido, hydroxyl, alkoxy, aryl and heteroaryl, each optionally substituted with hydroxy or amino.
  • R a is hydrogen and R b is benzyl.
  • R a is hydrogen
  • R b is —CH 2 —C 6 H 5
  • R y is —C(CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 OH.
  • the thyroid receptor effector compound has formula:
  • the compound or Formula selected from IIIa or b, IVa or b, Va or b, VIa or b, VIIa or b, VIII a or b is derived from a phosphonate compound useful for inhibiting gluconeogenesis, optionally by inhibiting the enzyme fructose 1,6-bisphosphatase (FBPase).
  • FBPase fructose 1,6-bisphosphatase
  • the compound or Formula selected from IXa or b, X a or b, XIa or b, XIIa or b, XIIIa or b, XIVa or b and XVIIIa or b is derived from a compound useful for inhibiting gluconeogenesis, optionally by inhibiting the enzyme fructose 1,6-bisphosphatase (FBPase).
  • FBPase fructose 1,6-bisphosphatase
  • the compound or Formula selected from IIIa or b, IVa or b, Va or b, VIa or b, VIIa or b, VIII a or b is a phosphonic acid-containing compound that binds to a thyroid receptor in the liver, and is optionally an agonist, antagonist, partial agonist or partial antagonist of T3. Inhibition of gluconeogenesis can result in blood glucose lowering in diabetic subjects. Such compounds can exhibit enhanced pharmacokinetics including oral bioavailability and liver drug levels.
  • a method of treatment of a subject in need thereof comprising administering to the subject a phosphoroamidate and phosphonoamidate compound or formula selected from IIIa or b, IVa or b, Va or b, VIa or b, VIIa or b, VIII a or b, IXa or b, X a or b, XIa or b, XIIa or b, XIIIa or b, XIVa or b and XVIIIa or b or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, enantiomer, ester or prodrug thereof thereof, in an amount effective for one or more of the following:
  • thyroid disease thyroid cancer
  • depression glaucoma
  • cardiac arrhythmias heart failure
  • osteoporosis treating thyroid disease, thyroid cancer, depression, glaucoma, cardiac arrhythmias, heart failure, or osteoporosis
  • lipids e.g., cholesterol
  • glucose e.g., glucose
  • lipoproteins e.g., glucose
  • triglycerides e.g., glucose
  • T3-responsive genes e.g., T3-responsive genes
  • the compounds do not affect thyroid function, thyroid production of circulating iodinated thyronines such as T3 and T4, and/or the ratio of T3 to T4.
  • provided herein is a method for treatment of liver fibrosis or inflammation by administering a compound provided herein.
  • compositions comprising the compounds, e.g., in a dosage unit suitable for administration, e.g., oral administration.
  • optically active materials examples include at least the following.
  • compounds provided herein can be prepared by coupling alcohols and H-phosphonate monoesters as illustrated in the reaction scheme below:
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 are each independently hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl or alkoxy. Any reactive function on R y , R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 or on the base should be protected during the coupling reaction. Any coupling agent known to one of skill in the art can be used.
  • Exemplary coupling agents for use in the reaction include, but are not limited to HOBt (N-Hydroxybenzotriazole), HBTU (2-(1H-Benzotriazole-1-yl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethylaminium hexafluorophosphate), DCC (N,N′-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide), BOP (Benzotriazole-1-yl-oxy-tris-(dimethylamino)-phosphoniumhexafluorophosphate), PyBOP (1H-benzotriazol-1-yloxytripyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate) and others known to one of skill in the art.
  • HOBt N-Hydroxybenzotriazole
  • HBTU (2-(1H-Benzotriazole-1-yl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethylaminium hexafluorophosphate
  • DCC N,N′-dicyclo
  • R H, Tr, MMTr or DMTr in case of reactive amine
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 4 , R 6 H, alkyl or halo
  • R 3 /R 5 are both H or isopropylidene.
  • nucleosides and analogs thereof and prodrugs thereof can be prepared according to methods known to one of skill in the art. Exemplary nucleosides and analogs are described in International Publication No. WO 06/125166, contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties.
  • the compounds of formula IIIa or b, IVa or b, Va or b, VIa or b, VIIa or b and VIII a or b can be prepared by methods described herein and methods known to one of skill in the art, for example, see, Erion et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 2007, 104, 15490-15495.
  • the compounds of formula IXa or b, X a or b, XIa or b, XIIa or b, XIIIa or b, XIVa or b and XVIIIa or b can be prepared by methods described herein and methods known to one of skill in the art, for example, see, Dang et al., Discovery of Potent and Specific Fructose-1,6-Bisphosphatase Inhibitors and a Series of orally-Bioavailable Phosphoramidase-Sensitive Prodrugs for the Treatment of Type 2 Diabetes, J. Am. Chem. Soc., 2007, Vol. 129, No. 50, pp. 15491-502.
  • Compounds can be assayed for accumulation in liver cells of a subject according to any assay known to those of skill in the art.
  • a compound can be administered to the subject, and a liver cell of the subject can be assayed for the compound or a derivative thereof.
  • a phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate nucleoside compound is administered to cells, such as liver cells, in vivo or in vitro, and the levels delivered intracellularly are measured, to indicate delivery of the compound in the cell.
  • Assays for other activities, including anti-cancer activity can be done as described in the art. Suitable in vitro assays can be used to preliminarily evaluate the efficacy of a compound in inhibiting growth of cancer cells. The compound can further be examined for its efficacy in treating cancer by in vivo assays known to those of skill in the art. For example, it can be administered to an animal (e.g., a mouse model) having cancer and its therapeutic effect can then assessed. Based on the results, an appropriate dosage range and administration route can also be determined. Exemplary assays are described in the paragraphs below.
  • Compounds provided herein can be shown to inhibit tumor cell proliferation, cell transformation and tumorigenesis in vitro and in vivo using a variety of assays known in the art, or described herein.
  • Such assays can use cells of a cancer cell line, or cells from a patient.
  • Many assays well-known in the art can be used to assess such survival and/or growth; for example, cell proliferation can be assayed by measuring ( 3 H)-thymidine incorporation, by direct cell count, by detecting changes in transcription, translation or activity of known genes such as proto-oncogenes (e.g., fos, myc) or cell cycle markers (Rb, cdc2, cyclin A, D1, D2, D3, E, etc.).
  • proto-oncogenes e.g., fos, myc
  • cell cycle markers Rb, cdc2, cyclin A, D1, D2, D3, E, etc.
  • protein can be quantitated by known immunodiagnostic methods such as Western blotting or immunoprecipitation using commercially available antibodies (for example, many cell cycle marker antibodies are available from Santa Cruz Biotechnology, Inc., Santa Cruz, Calif.).
  • mRNA can be quantitated by methods that are well known and routine in the art, for example, by Northern analysis, RNase protection, and the polymerase chain reaction in connection with the reverse transcription.
  • Cell viability can be assessed by using trypan-blue staining or other cell death or viability markers known in the art. Differentiation can be assessed, for example, visually based on changes in morphology, etc.
  • Cell proliferation analysis can be performed using a variety of techniques known in the art, including but not limited to the following:
  • bromodeoxyuridine (BRDU) incorporation may be used as an assay to identify proliferating cells.
  • the BRDU assay identifies a cell population undergoing DNA synthesis by incorporation of BRDU into newly synthesized DNA. Newly synthesized DNA can then be detected using an anti-BRDU antibody (see Hoshino et al., 1986, Int. J. Cancer 38, 369; Campana et al., 1988, J. Immunol. Meth. 107, 79).
  • Cell proliferation can also be examined using (3H)-thymidine incorporation (see e.g., Chen, J., 1996, Oncogene 13:1395-403; Jeoung, J., 1995, J. Biol. Chem. 270:18367-73).
  • This assay allows for quantitative characterization of S-phase DNA synthesis.
  • cells synthesizing DNA incorporate (3H)-thymidine into newly synthesized DNA.
  • Incorporation can then be measured using standard techniques in the art such as by counting of radioisotope in a Scintillation counter (e.g. Beckman LS 3800 Liquid Scintillation Counter).
  • PCNA proliferating cell nuclear antigen
  • Cell proliferation can be measured by counting samples of a cell population over time (e.g. daily cell counts). Cells may be counted using a hemacytometer and light microscopy (e.g. HyLite hemacytometer, Hausser Scientific). Cell number may be plotted against time in order to obtain a growth curve for the population of interest. In a preferred embodiment, cells counted by this method are first mixed with the dye Trypan-blue, such that living cells exclude the dye, and are counted as viable members of the population.
  • a hemacytometer and light microscopy e.g. HyLite hemacytometer, Hausser Scientific
  • DNA content and/or mitotic index of the cells can be measured, for example, based on the DNA ploidy value of the cell.
  • cells in the GI phase of the cell cycle generally contain a 2N DNA ploidy value.
  • Cells in which DNA has been replicated but have not progressed through mitosis e.g. cells in S-phase
  • Ploidy value and cell-cycle kinetics can be further measured using propidum iodide assay (see e.g. Turner, T., et al., 1998, Prostate 34:175-81).
  • the DNA ploidy can be determined by quantitation of DNA Feulgen staining (which binds to DNA in a stoichiometric manner) on a computerized microdensitometrystaining system (see e.g., Bacus, S., 1989, Am. J. Pathol. 135:783-92).
  • DNA content can be analyzed by preparation of a chromosomal spread (Zabalou, S., 1994, Hereditas. 120:127-40; Pardue, 1994, Meth. Cell Biol. 44:333-351).
  • cell-cycle proteins e.g., CycA, CycB, CycE, CycD, cdc2, Cdk4/6, Rb, p21, p27, etc.
  • identification in an anti-proliferation signaling pathway can be indicated by the induction of p21.
  • Increased levels of p21 expression in cells results in delayed entry into G1 of the cell cycle (Harper et al., 1993, Cell 75:805-816; Li et al., 1996, Curr. Biol. 6:189-199).
  • p21 induction can be identified by immunostaining using a specific anti-p21 antibody available commercially (e.g.
  • cell-cycle proteins may be examined by Western blot analysis using commercially available antibodies.
  • cell populations are synchronized prior to detection of a cell cycle protein.
  • Cell cycle proteins can also be detected by FACS (fluorescence-activated cell sorter) analysis using antibodies against the protein of interest.
  • Detection of changes in length of the cell cycle or speed of cell cycle can also be used to measure inhibition of cell proliferation by the compounds provided herein.
  • the length of the cell cycle is determined by the doubling time of a population of cells (e.g., using cells contacted or not contacted with one or more compounds identified using the pharmacophores of the present invention).
  • FACS analysis is used to analyze the phase of cell cycle progression, or purify G1, S, and G2/M fractions (see e.g., Delia, D. et al., 1997, Oncogene 14:2137-47).
  • the compounds useful in the methods of the present invention can also be demonstrated to inhibit cell transformation (or progression to malignant phenotype) in vitro.
  • cells with a transformed cell phenotype are contacted with one or more compounds of the present invention, and examined for change in characteristics associated with a transformed phenotype (a set of in vitro characteristics associated with a tumorigenic ability in vivo), for example, but not limited to, colony formation in soft agar, a more rounded cell morphology, looser substratum attachment, loss of contact inhibition, loss of anchorage dependence, release of proteases such as plasminogen activator, increased sugar transport, decreased serum requirement, or expression of fetal antigens, etc. (see Luria et al., 1978, General Virology, 3d Ed., John Wiley & Sons, New York, pp. 436-446).
  • Loss of invasiveness or decreased adhesion may also be used to demonstrate the anti-cancer effects of the compounds useful in the methods of the present invention.
  • a critical aspect of the formation of a metastatic cancer is the ability of a precancerous or cancerous cell to detach from primary site of disease and establish a novel colony of growth at a secondary site. The ability of a cell to invade peripheral sites is reflective of a potential for a cancerous state.
  • Loss of invasiveness may be measured by a variety of techniques known in the art including, for example, induction of E-cadherin-mediated cell-cell adhesion. Such E-cadherin-mediated adhesion can result in phenotypic reversion and loss of invasiveness (Hordijk et al., 1997, Science 278:1464-66).
  • Loss of invasiveness may further be examined by inhibition of cell migration.
  • a variety of 2-dimensional and 3-dimensional cellular matrices are commercially available (Calbiochem-Novabiochem Corp. San Diego, Calif.). Cell migration across or into a matrix may be examined by microscopy, time-lapsed photography or videography, or by any method in the art allowing measurement of cellular migration.
  • loss of invasiveness is examined by response to hepatocyte growth factor (HGF). HGF-induced cell scattering is correlated with invasiveness of cells such as Madin-Darby canine kidney (MDCK) cells. This assay identifies a cell population that has lost cell scattering activity in response to HGF (Hordijk et al., 1997, Science 278:1464-66).
  • HGF hepatocyte growth factor
  • loss of invasiveness may be measured by cell migration through a chemotaxis chamber (Neuroprobe/Precision Biochemicals Inc., Vancouver, BC).
  • a chemo-attractant agent is incubated on one side of the chamber (e.g., the bottom chamber) and cells are plated on a filter separating the opposite side (e.g., the top chamber).
  • the cells In order for cells to pass from the top chamber to the bottom chamber, the cells must actively migrate through small pores in the filter.
  • Checkerboard analysis of the number of cells that have migrated may then be correlated with invasiveness (see e.g., Ohnishi, T., 1993, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 193:518-25).
  • the compounds provided herein can also be demonstrated to inhibit tumor formation in vivo.
  • a number of animal models of hyperproliferative disorders, including tumorigenesis and metastatic spread, are known in the art (see Table 317-1, Chapter 317, “Principals of Neoplasia,” in Harrison's Principals of Internal Medicine, 13th Edition, Isselbacher et al., eds., McGraw-Hill, New York, p. 1814, and Lovejoy et al., 1997, J. Pathol. 181:130-135).
  • a compound provided herein can be administered to a test animal, preferably a test animal predisposed to develop a type of tumor, and the test animal subsequently examined for decreased incidence of tumor formation in comparison with controls not administered the compound identified using the pharmacophores of the present invention.
  • a compound useful in the methods of the present invention can be administered to test animals having tumors (e.g., animals in which tumors have been induced by introduction of malignant, neoplastic, or transformed cells, or by administration of a carcinogen) and subsequently examining the tumors in the test animals for tumor regression in comparison to controls that were not administered the compound.
  • Thyroid receptor binding activity that can serve as a mechanism for treatment of diseases sensitive thereto can be tested using assays available in the art.
  • Thyroid hormones are synthesized in the thyroid in response to thyroid stimulating hormone (TSH), which is secreted by the pituitary gland in response to various stimulants.
  • Thyroid hormones are iodinated O-aryl tyrosine analogues excreted into the circulation primarily as 3,3′,5,5′-tetraiodothyronine (T4).
  • T4 is rapidly deiodinated in local tissues by thyroxine 5′-deiodinase to 3,3′,5′-triiodothyronine (T3), which is the most potent TH.
  • T3 3,3′,5′-triiodothyronine
  • THs have profound physiological effects in animals and humans.
  • Hyper-thyroidism is associated with increased body temperature, general nervousness, weight loss despite increased appetite, muscle weakness and fatigue, increased bone resorption and enhanced calcification, and a variety of cardiovascular changes, including increased heart rate, increased stroke volume, increased cardiac index, cardiac hypertrophy, decreased peripheral vascular resistance, and increased pulse pressure.
  • Hypothyroidism is generally associated with the opposite effects.
  • TRs thyroid hormone receptors
  • T3 treatment increases oxygen consumption in isolated perfused liver and isolated hepatocytes.
  • THs also stimulate metabolism of cholesterol to bile acids. Hyperthyroidism leads to decreased plasma cholesterol levels, which is likely due to increased hepatic LDL receptor expression. Hypothyroidism is a well-established cause of hypercholesterolemia and elevated serum LDL. L-T3 is known to lower plasma cholesterol levels. In addition, THs are known to affect levels of other lipoproteins linked to atherosclerosis. THs stimulate apo AI and the secretion of apo AI in HDL while reducing apo B100. Accordingly, one would expect T3 and T3 mimetics to inhibit the atherosclerotic process in the cholesterol fed animal.
  • THs simultaneously increase de novo fatty acid synthesis and oxidation through effects on enzymes such as ACC, FAS, and spot-14.
  • THs increase circulating free fatty acids (FFA) levels in part by increasing production of FFAs from adipose tissue via TH-induced lipolysis.
  • FFA free fatty acids
  • THs increase mitochondrial enzyme levels involved in FFA oxidation, e.g., carnitine palmitoyltransferase 1 (CPT-1) and enzymes involved in energy storage and consumption.
  • CPT-1 carnitine palmitoyltransferase 1
  • the liver represents a major target organ of THs.
  • Microarray analysis of hepatic gene expression from livers of hypothyroid mice and mice treated with T3 showed changes in mRNA levels for 55 genes (14 positively regulated and 41 negatively regulated) (Feng et al., Mol. Endocrinol. 14(7): 947-55 (2000).
  • Others have estimated that approximately 8% of the hepatic genes are regulated by T3. Many of these genes are important to both fatty acid and cholesterol synthesis and metabolism.
  • T3 is also known to have other effects in liver, including effects on carbohydrates through increased glycogenolysis and gluconeogenesis and decreased insulin action.
  • T3 and T3 mimetics are thought to inhibit atherosclerosis by modulating the levels of certain lipoproteins known to be independent risk factors or potential risk factors of atherosclerosis, including low density lipoprotein (LDL)-cholesterol, high density lipoprotein (HDL)-cholesterol, apoAI, which is a major apoprotein constituent of high density lipoprotein (HDL) particles and lipoprotein (a) or Lp(a).
  • LDL low density lipoprotein
  • HDL high density lipoprotein
  • apoAI which is a major apoprotein constituent of high density lipoprotein (HDL) particles and lipoprotein (a) or Lp(a).
  • TH therapy is reported to stimulate hepatic gluconeogenesis. Enzymes specific to gluconeogenesis and important for controlling the pathway and its physiological role of producing glucose are known to be influenced by TH therapy. Phosphoenolpyruvate carboxykinase (PEPCK) is upregulated by TH (Park et al, J. Biol. Chem. 274:211 (1999)) whereas others have found that glucose 6-phosphatase is upregulated (Feng et al., Mol. Endocrinol. 14:947 (2000)). TH therapy is also associated with reduced glycogen levels. TH therapy results in improved non insulin stimulated and insulin stimulated glucose utilization and decreased insulin resistance in the muscle of ob/ob mice. (Oh et al., J. Nutr. 125:125 (1995)).
  • thyromimetics potentially can be used to modulate cholesterol levels, to treat obesity, and other metabolic disorders especially with reduced undesirable effects.
  • SPA scintillation proximity assays
  • Subacute studies also can be conducted in cholesterol-fed rats.
  • the cholesterol-fed rat is an animal model of hypercholesterolemia generated by feeding the animals a diet with high cholesterol content.
  • the purpose of these studies is to evaluate the effects of compounds on serum cholesterol (an efficacy parameter) and on heart weight and heart mGPDH activity (potential toxicity parameters).
  • Compounds can be administered, e.g., IP, e.g., once-a-day for seven days.
  • Microsome/primary hepatocyte stability studies can be conducted using methods available in the art.
  • Prodrug activation in rat liver microsomes can be conducted to determine the kinetics of activation of prodrugs of thyromimetics in microsomal preparations.
  • Microsomes may contain P450 enzyme that may activate a prodrug.
  • the Km, Vmax, and intrinsic clearance values determined are measures of prodrug affinity for the microsomal enzymes, the rate at which the prodrug is activated, and the catalytic efficiency with which the prodrug is activated, respectively.
  • Prodrugs also can be tested for conversion to their respective parent compounds by human liver S9.
  • the S9 fraction is a fraction that contains both cytosolic and microsomal protein.
  • Uptake and activation of prodrug in isolated rat hepatocytes also can be conducted using methods known in the art.
  • Oral bioavailability and liver distribution following oral administration also can be measured using methods available in the art.
  • Thermogenesis is a measurement of energy consumption. Compounds that increase thermogenesis are likely to increase caloric expenditure and thereby cause body weight loss and its associated benefits to metabolic status (e.g., insulin sensitivity). Thermogenesis is assessed in subcellular fractions of various tissues, isolated cells, whole tissues, or in whole animals using changes in oxygen consumption as the endpoint. Oxygen is used up when calories are burned by various metabolic processes.
  • Mitochondrial thermogenesis is measured polarographically with a Clark-type oxygen electrode using mitochondria isolated from various tissues, including liver. Mitochondria are isolated by differential centrifugation. State 3 respiration or cytochrome c oxidase activity are measured in isolated mitochondria. (Iossa, S, FEBS Letters, 544: 133-7 (2003)). Oxygen consumption rates are measured in isolated hepatocytes using a portable Clark-type oxygen electrode placed in the hepatocyte medium. Hepatocytes are isolated from liver using a two-step collagenase perfusion (Berry, M. N., Friend, D. S. J. Cell Biol. 43: 506-520 (1969)) as modified by Groen (Groen, A.
  • Non-parenchymal cells are removed using a Percoll gradient and the cells are resuspended in tissue culture medium in a spinner flask. The oxygen consumption of the cells is measured over time once the system is sealed.
  • Oxygen consumption also can be measured in isolated perfused liver (Fernandez, V., Toxicol Lett. 69:205-10 (1993)). Liver is perfused in situ and oxygen consumption is calculated by measuring the difference between the oxygen saturation of the inflow buffer and the outflow buffer maintained at a constant flow. Whole animal oxygen consumption can be measured using an indirect calorimeter (Oxymax, Columbus Instruments, Columbus, Ohio). Animals are removed from their cages and placed in the chambers. The resting oxygen consumption is measured in animals during periods of inactivity as measured by activity monitors. The oxygen consumption is calculated based on the flow through the chamber and the difference in oxygen partial pressures at the inflow and outlet ports. Carbon dioxide efflux is also measured in parallel using a CO2 electrode.
  • Tissue distribution and the pharmacokinetics of compounds can be assessed following IP or oral administration to normal rats.
  • rats are made hypercholesterolemic by maintenance on a diet containing 1.5% cholesterol and 0.5% cholic acid for at least 2 weeks prior to initiation of treatment.
  • Plasma cholesterol values are assessed prior to and following treatment and the effects of compound are expressed as a percentage change from the pre-dose cholesterol levels.
  • Total cholesterol is analyzed using a commercially available enzymatic kit (Sigma Diagnostics, St. Louis, Mo.).
  • T3 mimetic compounds and prodrugs thereof in vivo on glucose can be measured in ZDF rats.
  • T3 and T3 mimetic mediated myosin heavy chain gene transcription in the heart can be measured.
  • An RT-PCR assay as disclosed in: Sara Danzi, Kaie Ojamaa, and Irwin Klein Am J Physiol Heart Circ Physiol 284: H2255-H2262, 2003 is used to study both the time course and the mechanism for the triiodothyronine (T3)-induced transcription of the ⁇ - and ⁇ -myosin heavy chain (MHC) genes in vivo on the basis of the quantity of specific heterogeneous nuclear RNA (hnRNA).
  • hnRNA specific heterogeneous nuclear RNA
  • the phosphoroamidate and phosphonoamidate compounds of a variety of therapeutic agents can be formed using methods available in the art and those disclosed herein. Such compounds can be used in some embodiments to enhance delivery of the drug to the liver.
  • the compound comprises a S-acyl-2-thioethyl phosphoroamidate or S-acyl-2-thioethyl phosphonoamidate, e.g., a S-pivaloyl-2-thioethyl phosphoroamidate or S-hydroxypivaloyl-2-thioethyl phosphonoamidate derivative.
  • Therapeutic agents that can be derivatized to phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compound form include a therapeutic agent such as an anti-cancer agent or anti-diabetic agent that includes, or has been derivatized to include a reactive group for attachment of the phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate moiety.
  • therapeutic agents for the treatment of liver cancer can be derivatized to form a phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compound as described herein, and used for the treatment of liver cancers.
  • Liver cancers that can be treated include benign tumors, malignant tumors, hemangioma, hepatic adenomas, focal nodular hyperplasia, hepatocellular carcinoma, fibrolamellar carcinoma, cholangiocarcinomas, bile duct cancers, and other primary and metastatic cancers of the liver.
  • Exemplary therapeutic agents include anti-cancer agents having one or more hydroxy groups that can be derivatized as compounds described herein by removal of a hydrogen from one of the hydroxy groups.
  • Exemplary anti-cancer agents include, but are not limited to aclarubicin, decitabine, daunorubicin, dihydro-5-azacytidine, doxorubicin, epirubicin, estramustin, etoposide, fludarabine, 7-hydroxychlorpromazin, neplanocin A, podophyllotoxin, tezacitabine, troxacitabine, vinblastin, vincristin, vindesin, etoposide, teniposide, NK-611, camptothecin, irinotecan, 9-aminocamptothecin, GG-211, topotecan, paclitaxel, azatoxin, coformycin, pirarubicin, nelarabine and losoxan
  • Anti-cancer agents known in the art and described herein can be derivatized to form a phosphoramidate or phosphonoamidate compound as described herein.
  • Immunosuppressants such as combretastatin A-4, mycophenolic, pentostatin, or mitoxantrone, also can be derivatized to form a phosphoramidate or phosphonoamidate compound as described herein.
  • Such compounds can optionally be used in combination with another anti-cancer agent that is optionally in prodrug form.
  • the compounds provided herein are useful in methods for inhibiting gluconeogenesis, optionally by inhibiting the enzyme fructose 1,6-bisphosphatase (FBPase).
  • FBPase fructose 1,6-bisphosphatase
  • the compounds provided herein are useful in methods for inhibiting gluconeogenesis.
  • the compounds provided herein are useful in methods for treatment of metabolic diseases. In certain embodiments, the compounds provided herein are useful in methods for:
  • thyroid disease thyroid cancer
  • depression glaucoma
  • cardiac arrhythmias heart failure
  • osteoporosis treating thyroid disease, thyroid cancer, depression, glaucoma, cardiac arrhythmias, heart failure, or osteoporosis
  • lipids e.g., cholesterol
  • glucose e.g., glucose
  • lipoproteins e.g., glucose
  • triglycerides e.g., glucose
  • T3-responsive genes e.g., T3-responsive genes
  • the compounds provided herein are useful in methods for lowering blood glucose levels, treating diabetes, impaired glucose tolerance, metabolic syndrome x, insulin resistance or hyperinsulinemia.
  • the compounds and compositions provided herein are useful in methods of treatment of a liver disorder, that comprises further administration of a second agent effective for the treatment of the disorder, such as liver cancer in a subject in need thereof.
  • a second agent effective for the treatment of the disorder, such as liver cancer in a subject in need thereof.
  • the second agent can be any agent known to those of skill in the art to be effective for the treatment of the disorder, including those currently approved by the FDA.
  • a compound provided herein is administered in combination with one second agent.
  • a second agent is administered in combination with two second agents.
  • a second agent is administered in combination with two or more second agents.
  • the term “in combination” includes the use of more than one therapy (e.g., one or more prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents).
  • the use of the term “in combination” does not restrict the order in which therapies (e.g., prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents) are administered to a subject with a disorder.
  • a first therapy e.g., a prophylactic or therapeutic agent such as a compound provided herein
  • a first therapy can be administered prior to (e.g., 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours, 72 hours, 96 hours, 1 week, 2 weeks, 3 weeks, 4 weeks, 5 weeks, 6 weeks, 8 weeks, or 12 weeks before), concomitantly with, or subsequent to (e.g., 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours, 72 hours, 96 hours, 1 week, 2 weeks, 3 weeks, 4 weeks, 5 weeks, 6 weeks, 8 weeks, or 12 weeks after) the administration of a second therapy (e.g., a prophylactic or therapeutic agent) to a subject with a disorder.
  • a second therapy e.g., a prophylactic or therapeutic agent
  • the term “synergistic” includes a combination of a compound provided herein and another therapy (e.g., a prophylactic or therapeutic agent) which has been or is currently being used to prevent, manage or treat a disorder, which is more effective than the additive effects of the therapies.
  • a synergistic effect of a combination of therapies permits the use of lower dosages of one or more of the therapies and/or less frequent administration of said therapies to a subject with a disorder.
  • a therapy e.g., a prophylactic or therapeutic agent
  • a synergistic effect can result in improved efficacy of agents in the prevention or treatment of a disorder.
  • a synergistic effect of a combination of therapies e.g., a combination of prophylactic or therapeutic agents
  • the active compounds provided herein can be administered in combination or alternation with another therapeutic agent, for example an anti-cancer agent.
  • the active compounds provided herein can be administered in combination or alternation with second agents useful in treating metabolic disorders such as diabetes, obesity, atherosclerosis, heart disease, metabolic syndrome x, nephrotic syndrome, thyroid disease, and symptoms associated therewith.
  • second agents useful in treating metabolic disorders such as diabetes, obesity, atherosclerosis, heart disease, metabolic syndrome x, nephrotic syndrome, thyroid disease, and symptoms associated therewith.
  • effective dosages of two or more agents are administered together, whereas in alternation or sequential-step therapy, an effective dosage of each agent is administered serially or sequentially.
  • the dosages given will depend on absorption, inactivation and excretion rates of the drug as well as other factors known to those of skill in the art.
  • dosage values will also vary with the severity of the condition to be alleviated. It is to be further understood that for any particular subject, specific dosage regimens and schedules should be adjusted over time according to the individual need and the professional judgment of the person administering or supervising the administration of the compositions.
  • the second agent can be one of the agents disclosed herein.
  • contemplated additional pharmaceutically active substances include drugs commonly used as chemotherapy for treatment of cancer and immune modulator substances.
  • chemotherapeutic agents include anti-metabolites (e.g., Pentostatin®), DNA polymerase inhibitors (e.g, Gemzar®), RNA polymerase inhibitors (e.g., ECyd®), platinum derivatives (e.g., Paraplatin®), anti-estrogens (e.g., Nolvadex®), Taxanes (e.g., Taxotere®), GnRH analogs (e.g., Lupron®), DNA polymerase inhibitors (e.g., Gemzar®), topoisomerase inhibitors (e.g., Hycamptin®), biphosphonates (e.g., Aredia®), somatostatins (e.g., Sandostatin®), nucleoside analogs (e.g., Ribavirin®), and
  • Contemplated immunomodulatory substances include cytokines (e.g., interferon ⁇ and ⁇ , IL2, IL4, IL6, IL8, IL10, and IL12), cytokinins (e.g., kinetin), and chemokines (e.g., MIP-1).
  • cytokines e.g., interferon ⁇ and ⁇ , IL2, IL4, IL6, IL8, IL10, and IL12
  • cytokinins e.g., kinetin
  • chemokines e.g., MIP-1
  • the second agents for use in combination with the compounds provided herein include other agents useful in the treatment, prevention, suppression or amelioration of the diseases or conditions for which compounds provided herein are useful, such as treating metabolic diseases, including diabetes, obesity, atherosclerosis, heart disease, metabolic syndrome x, nephrotic syndrome, thyroid disease, and symptoms associated therewith.
  • Such second agents include, but are not limited to: sulfonylureas, for example, glibenclamide (DAONIL®), glimepiride (AMARYL®), glipizide (GLUCOTROL or MINODIAB), glyburide (MICRONASE®), tolbutamide (ORINASE®), acetohexamide (DYMELOR®), tolazamide (TOLINSE®) and chlorpropamide, (DIABINESE®); insulin and insulin mimetics; biguanides such as metformin (GLUCOPHAGE®); ⁇ -glucosidase inhibitors including acarbose (PRECOSE®) and miglitol (GLYSET®); meglitinides, for example, nateglinide (STARLIX®) and repaglinide (PRANDIN®); thiozolidinediones, for example, ciglitazone, englitazone, rosiglitazone (AVANDIA®),
  • Phosphoroamidate and phosphonoamidate compounds of a variety of therapeutic agents can be formulated into pharmaceutical compositions using methods available in the art and those disclosed herein. Such compounds can be used in some embodiments to enhance delivery of the drug to the liver.
  • the compound comprises a S-acyl-2-thioethyl phosphoroamidate or S-acyl-2-thioethyl phosphonoamidate, e.g., a S-pivaloyl-2-thioethyl phosphoroamidate or S-hydroxypivaloyl-2-thioethyl phosphonoamidate derivative.
  • therapeutic agents that can be derivatized to phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compound form include any anti-cancer agent that includes, or has been derivatized to include a reactive group for attachment of the phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate moiety, including but not limited to nucleosides and nucleoside analogues including acyclic nucleosides.
  • therapeutic agents that can be derivatized to phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compound form include any thyroid harmone receptor effector that includes, or has been derivatized to include a reactive group for attachment of the phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate moiety. Any of the phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compounds disclosed herein can be provided in the appropriate pharmaceutical composition and be administered by a suitable route of administration.
  • compositions containing at least one compound as described herein including a compound of general formula I, Ia, IIb, IIIa, IVa, IXa or IXb if appropriate in the salt form, either used alone or in the form of a combination with one or more compatible and pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, such as diluents or adjuvants, or with other therapeutic agents, such as another anti-cancer or anti-diabetic agent.
  • a compatible and pharmaceutically acceptable carriers such as diluents or adjuvants
  • other therapeutic agents such as another anti-cancer or anti-diabetic agent.
  • the second agent can be formulated or packaged with the compound provided herein.
  • the second agent will only be formulated with the compound provided herein when, according to the judgment of those of skill in the art, such co-formulation should not interfere with the activity of either agent or the method of administration.
  • the compound provided herein and the second agent are formulated separately. They can be packaged together, or packaged separately, for the convenience of the practitioner of skill in the art.
  • the active agents provided herein may be administered by any conventional route, in particular orally, parenterally, rectally or by inhalation (e.g. in the form of aerosols).
  • the compound provided herein is administered orally.
  • compositions for oral administration of tablets, pills, hard gelatin capsules, powders or granules.
  • the active product is mixed with one or more inert diluents or adjuvants, such as sucrose, lactose or starch.
  • compositions can comprise substances other than diluents, for example a lubricant, such as magnesium stearate, or a coating intended for controlled release.
  • a lubricant such as magnesium stearate
  • compositions for oral administration of solutions which are pharmaceutically acceptable, suspensions, emulsions, syrups and elixirs containing inert diluents, such as water or liquid paraffin.
  • solutions which are pharmaceutically acceptable, suspensions, emulsions, syrups and elixirs containing inert diluents, such as water or liquid paraffin.
  • inert diluents such as water or liquid paraffin.
  • These compositions can also comprise substances other than diluents, for example wetting, sweetening or flavoring products.
  • compositions for parenteral administration can be emulsions or sterile solutions. Use may be made, as solvent or vehicle, of propylene glycol, a polyethylene glycol, vegetable oils, in particular olive oil, or injectable organic esters, for example ethyl oleate. These compositions can also contain adjuvants, in particular wetting, isotonizing, emulsifying, dispersing and stabilizing agents. Sterilization can be carried out in several ways, for example using a bacteriological filter, by radiation or by heating. They can also be prepared in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved at the time of use in sterile water or any other injectable sterile medium.
  • compositions for rectal administration are suppositories or rectal capsules which contain, in addition to the active principle, excipients such as cocoa butter, semi-synthetic glycerides or polyethylene glycols.
  • compositions can also be aerosols.
  • the compositions can be stable sterile solutions or solid compositions dissolved at the time of use in apyrogenic sterile water, in saline or any other pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle.
  • the active principle is finely divided and combined with a water-soluble solid diluent or vehicle, for example dextran, mannitol or lactose.
  • compositions provided herein is a pharmaceutical composition or a single unit dosage form.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions and single unit dosage forms provided herein comprise a prophylactically or therapeutically effective amount of one or more prophylactic or therapeutic agents (e.g., a compound provided herein, or other prophylactic or therapeutic agent), and a typically one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers or excipients.
  • prophylactic or therapeutic agents e.g., a compound provided herein, or other prophylactic or therapeutic agent
  • typically one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers or excipients e.g., a typically one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers or excipients.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable includes approval by a regulatory agency of the Federal or a state government or listed in the U.S. Pharmacopeia or other generally recognized pharmacopeia for use in animals, and more particularly in humans.
  • carrier includes a diluent, adjuvant (e.g., Freund's adjuvant (complete and incomplete)), excipient, or vehicle with which the therapeutic is administered.
  • adjuvant e.g., Freund's adjuvant (complete and incomplete)
  • excipient or vehicle with which the therapeutic is administered.
  • Such pharmaceutical carriers can be sterile liquids, such as water and oils, including those of petroleum, animal, vegetable or synthetic origin, such as peanut oil, soybean oil, mineral oil, sesame oil and the like. Water can be used as a carrier when the pharmaceutical composition is administered intravenously.
  • Saline solutions and aqueous dextrose and glycerol solutions can also be employed as liquid carriers, particularly for injectable solutions. Examples of suitable pharmaceutical carriers are described in “Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences” by E. W. Martin.
  • Typical pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms comprise one or more excipients.
  • Suitable excipients are well-known to those skilled in the art of pharmacy, and non-limiting examples of suitable excipients include starch, glucose, lactose, sucrose, gelatin, malt, rice, flour, chalk, silica gel, sodium stearate, glycerol monostearate, talc, sodium chloride, dried skim milk, glycerol, propylene, glycol, water, ethanol and the like.
  • a particular excipient is suitable for incorporation into a pharmaceutical composition or dosage form depends on a variety of factors well known in the art including, but not limited to, the way in which the dosage form will be administered to a subject and the specific active ingredients in the dosage form.
  • the composition or single unit dosage form if desired, can also contain minor amounts of wetting or emulsifying agents, or pH buffering agents.
  • Lactose free compositions can comprise excipients that are well known in the art and are listed, for example, in the U.S. Pharmocopia (USP) SP (XXI)/NF (XVI).
  • USP U.S. Pharmocopia
  • XXI U.S. Pharmocopia
  • NF NF
  • lactose free compositions comprise an active ingredient, a binder/filler, and a lubricant in pharmaceutically compatible and pharmaceutically acceptable amounts.
  • Exemplary lactose free dosage forms comprise an active ingredient, microcrystalline cellulose, pre gelatinized starch, and magnesium stearate.
  • anhydrous pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms comprising active ingredients, since water can facilitate the degradation of some compounds.
  • water e.g., 5%
  • water is widely accepted in the pharmaceutical arts as a means of simulating long term storage in order to determine characteristics such as shelf life or the stability of formulations over time. See, e.g., Jens T. Carstensen, Drug Stability: Principles & Practice, 2d. Ed., Marcel Dekker, NY, N.Y., 1995, pp. 379 80.
  • water and heat accelerate the decomposition of some compounds.
  • the effect of water on a formulation can be of great significance since moisture and/or humidity are commonly encountered during manufacture, handling, packaging, storage, shipment, and use of formulations.
  • Anhydrous pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms provided herein can be prepared using anhydrous or low moisture containing ingredients and low moisture or low humidity conditions.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms that comprise lactose and at least one active ingredient that comprises a primary or secondary amine can be anhydrous if substantial contact with moisture and/or humidity during manufacturing, packaging, and/or storage is expected.
  • anhydrous pharmaceutical composition should be prepared and stored such that its anhydrous nature is maintained. Accordingly, anhydrous compositions can be packaged using materials known to prevent exposure to water such that they can be included in suitable formulary kits. Examples of suitable packaging include, but are not limited to, hermetically sealed foils, plastics, unit dose containers (e.g., vials), blister packs, and strip packs.
  • compositions and dosage forms that comprise one or more compounds that reduce the rate by which an active ingredient will decompose.
  • compounds which are referred to herein as “stabilizers,” include, but are not limited to, antioxidants such as ascorbic acid, pH buffers, or salt buffers.
  • compositions and single unit dosage forms can take the form of solutions, suspensions, emulsion, tablets, pills, capsules, powders, sustained-release formulations and the like.
  • Oral formulation can include standard carriers such as pharmaceutical grades of mannitol, lactose, starch, magnesium stearate, sodium saccharine, cellulose, magnesium carbonate, etc.
  • Such compositions and dosage forms will contain a prophylactically or therapeutically effective amount of a prophylactic or therapeutic agent, in certain embodiments, in purified form, together with a suitable amount of carrier so as to provide the form for proper administration to the subject.
  • the formulation should suit the mode of administration.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions or single unit dosage forms are sterile and in suitable form for administration to a subject, for example, an animal subject, such as a mammalian subject, for example, a human subject.
  • a pharmaceutical composition is formulated to be compatible with its intended route of administration.
  • routes of administration include, but are not limited to, parenteral, e.g., intravenous, intradermal, subcutaneous, intramuscular, subcutaneous, oral, buccal, sublingual, inhalation, intranasal, transdermal, topical, transmucosal, intra-tumoral, intra-synovial and rectal administration.
  • the composition is formulated in accordance with routine procedures as a pharmaceutical composition adapted for intravenous, subcutaneous, intramuscular, oral, intranasal or topical administration to human beings.
  • a pharmaceutical composition is formulated in accordance with routine procedures for subcutaneous administration to human beings.
  • compositions for intravenous administration are solutions in sterile isotonic aqueous buffer.
  • the composition may also include a solubilizing agent and a local anesthetic such as lignocamne to ease pain at the site of the injection.
  • dosage forms include, but are not limited to: tablets; caplets; capsules, such as soft elastic gelatin capsules; cachets; troches; lozenges; dispersions; suppositories; ointments; cataplasms (poultices); pastes; powders; dressings; creams; plasters; solutions; patches; aerosols (e.g., nasal sprays or inhalers); gels; liquid dosage forms suitable for oral or mucosal administration to a subject, including suspensions (e.g., aqueous or non aqueous liquid suspensions, oil in water emulsions, or a water in oil liquid emulsions), solutions, and elixirs; liquid dosage forms suitable for parenteral administration to a subject; and sterile solids (e.g., crystalline or amorphous solids) that can be reconstituted to provide liquid dosage forms suitable for parenteral administration to a subject.
  • suspensions e.g., aqueous or non aque
  • compositions, shape, and type of dosage forms provided herein will typically vary depending on their use.
  • a dosage form used in the initial treatment of liver cancer may contain larger amounts of one or more of the active ingredients it comprises than a dosage form used in the maintenance treatment of the same liver cancer.
  • a parenteral dosage form may contain smaller amounts of one or more of the active ingredients it comprises than an oral dosage form used to treat the same disease or disorder.
  • compositions are supplied either separately or mixed together in unit dosage form, for example, as a dry lyophilized powder or water free concentrate in a hermetically sealed container such as an ampoule or sachette indicating the quantity of active agent.
  • a hermetically sealed container such as an ampoule or sachette indicating the quantity of active agent.
  • the composition is to be administered by infusion, it can be dispensed with an infusion bottle containing sterile pharmaceutical grade water or saline.
  • an ampoule of sterile water for injection or saline can be provided so that the ingredients may be mixed prior to administration.
  • Typical dosage forms comprise a compound provided herein, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or hydrate thereof lie within the range of from about 0.1 mg to about 1000 mg per day, given as a single once-a-day dose in the morning or as divided doses throughout the day taken with food.
  • Particular dosage forms can have about 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 2.5, 5.0, 10.0, 15.0, 20.0, 25.0, 50.0, 100, 200, 250, 500 or 1000 mg of the active compound.
  • compositions that are suitable for oral administration can be presented as discrete dosage forms, such as, but are not limited to, tablets (e.g., chewable tablets), caplets, capsules, and liquids (e.g., flavored syrups).
  • dosage forms contain predetermined amounts of active ingredients, and may be prepared by methods of pharmacy well known to those skilled in the art. See generally, Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 20th ed., Mack Publishing, Easton Pa. (2000).
  • the oral dosage forms are solid and prepared under anhydrous conditions with anhydrous ingredients, as described in detail in the sections above.
  • anhydrous ingredients as described in detail in the sections above.
  • the scope of the compositions provided herein extends beyond anhydrous, solid oral dosage forms. As such, further forms are described herein.
  • Typical oral dosage forms are prepared by combining the active ingredient(s) in an intimate admixture with at least one excipient according to conventional pharmaceutical compounding techniques.
  • Excipients can take a wide variety of forms depending on the form of preparation desired for administration.
  • excipients suitable for use in oral liquid or aerosol dosage forms include, but are not limited to, water, glycols, oils, alcohols, flavoring agents, preservatives, and coloring agents.
  • excipients suitable for use in solid oral dosage forms include, but are not limited to, starches, sugars, micro crystalline cellulose, diluents, granulating agents, lubricants, binders, and disintegrating agents.
  • tablets and capsules represent the most advantageous oral dosage unit forms, in which case solid excipients are employed. If desired, tablets can be coated by standard aqueous or nonaqueous techniques. Such dosage forms can be prepared by any of the methods of pharmacy. In general, pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms are prepared by uniformly and intimately admixing the active ingredients with liquid carriers, finely divided solid carriers, or both, and then shaping the product into the desired presentation if necessary.
  • a tablet can be prepared by compression or molding.
  • Compressed tablets can be prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the active ingredients in a free flowing form such as powder or granules, optionally mixed with an excipient.
  • Molded tablets can be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent.
  • excipients that can be used in oral dosage forms include, but are not limited to, binders, fillers, disintegrants, and lubricants.
  • Binders suitable for use in pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms include, but are not limited to, corn starch, potato starch, or other starches, gelatin, natural and synthetic gums such as acacia, sodium alginate, alginic acid, other alginates, powdered tragacanth, guar gum, cellulose and its derivatives (e.g., ethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate, carboxymethyl cellulose calcium, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), polyvinyl pyrrolidone, methyl cellulose, pre gelatinized starch, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, (e.g., Nos. 2208, 2906, 2910), microcrystalline cellulose, and mixtures thereof.
  • fillers suitable for use in the pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms disclosed herein include, but are not limited to, talc, calcium carbonate (e.g., granules or powder), microcrystalline cellulose, powdered cellulose, dextrates, kaolin, mannitol, silicic acid, sorbitol, starch, pre gelatinized starch, and mixtures thereof.
  • the binder or filler in pharmaceutical compositions is typically present in from about 50 to about 99 weight percent of the pharmaceutical composition or dosage form.
  • Suitable forms of microcrystalline cellulose include, but are not limited to, the materials sold as AVICEL PH 101, AVICEL PH 103 AVICEL RC 581, AVICEL PH 105 (available from FMC Corporation, American Viscose Division, Avicel Sales, Marcus Hook, Pa.), and mixtures thereof.
  • An specific binder is a mixture of microcrystalline cellulose and sodium carboxymethyl cellulose sold as AVICEL RC 581.
  • Suitable anhydrous or low moisture excipients or additives include AVICEL PH 103TM and Starch 1500 LM.
  • Disintegrants are used in the compositions to provide tablets that disintegrate when exposed to an aqueous environment. Tablets that contain too much disintegrant may disintegrate in storage, while those that contain too little may not disintegrate at a desired rate or under the desired conditions. Thus, a sufficient amount of disintegrant that is neither too much nor too little to detrimentally alter the release of the active ingredients should be used to form solid oral dosage forms.
  • the amount of disintegrant used varies based upon the type of formulation, and is readily discernible to those of ordinary skill in the art.
  • Typical pharmaceutical compositions comprise from about 0.5 to about 15 weight percent of disintegrant, specifically from about 1 to about 5 weight percent of disintegrant.
  • Disintegrants that can be used in pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms include, but are not limited to, agar agar, alginic acid, calcium carbonate, microcrystalline cellulose, croscarmellose sodium, crospovidone, polacrilin potassium, sodium starch glycolate, potato or tapioca starch, pre gelatinized starch, other starches, clays, other algins, other celluloses, gums, and mixtures thereof.
  • Lubricants that can be used in pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms include, but are not limited to, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, mineral oil, light mineral oil, glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol, polyethylene glycol, other glycols, stearic acid, sodium lauryl sulfate, talc, hydrogenated vegetable oil (e.g., peanut oil, cottonseed oil, sunflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil, and soybean oil), zinc stearate, ethyl oleate, ethyl laureate, agar, and mixtures thereof.
  • Additional lubricants include, for example, a syloid silica gel (AEROSIL 200, manufactured by W.R.
  • lubricants are typically used in an amount of less than about 1 weight percent of the pharmaceutical compositions or dosage forms into which they are incorporated.
  • Active ingredients such as the compounds provided herein can be administered by controlled release means or by delivery devices that are well known to those of ordinary skill in the art. Examples include, but are not limited to, those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,845,770; 3,916,899; 3,536,809; 3,598,123; and 4,008,719; 5,674,533; 5,059,595; 5,591,767; 5,120,548; 5,073,543; 5,639,476; 5,354,556; 5,639,480; 5,733,566; 5,739,108; 5,891,474; 5,922,356; 5,972,891; 5,980,945; 5,993,855; 6,045,830; 6,087,324; 6,113,943; 6,197,350; 6,248,363; 6,264,970; 6,267,981; 6,376,461; 6,419,961; 6,589,548; 6,613,358; 6,699,500 each of which is
  • Such dosage forms can be used to provide slow or controlled release of one or more active ingredients using, for example, hydropropylmethyl cellulose, other polymer matrices, gels, permeable membranes, osmotic systems, multilayer coatings, microparticles, liposomes, microspheres, or a combination thereof to provide the desired release profile in varying proportions.
  • Suitable controlled release formulations known to those of ordinary skill in the art, including those described herein, can be readily selected for use with the active ingredients provided herein.
  • single unit dosage forms suitable for oral administration such as, but not limited to, tablets, capsules, gelcaps, and caplets that are adapted for controlled release.
  • controlled release pharmaceutical products have a common goal of improving drug therapy over that achieved by their non controlled counterparts.
  • the use of an optimally designed controlled release preparation in medical treatment is characterized by a minimum of drug substance being employed to cure or control the condition in a minimum amount of time.
  • Advantages of controlled release formulations include extended activity of the drug, reduced dosage frequency, and increased subject compliance.
  • controlled release formulations can be used to affect the time of onset of action or other characteristics, such as blood levels of the drug, and can thus affect the occurrence of side (e.g., adverse) effects.
  • Controlled release of an active ingredient can be stimulated by various conditions including, but not limited to, pH, temperature, enzymes, water, or other physiological conditions or compounds.
  • the drug may be administered using intravenous infusion, an implantable osmotic pump, a transdermal patch, liposomes, or other modes of administration.
  • a pump may be used (see, Sefton, CRC Crit. Ref Biomed. Eng. 14:201 (1987); Buchwald et al., Surgery 88:507 (1980); Saudek et al., N. Engl. J. Med. 321:574 (1989)).
  • polymeric materials can be used.
  • a controlled release system can be placed in a subject at an appropriate site determined by a practitioner of skill, i.e., thus requiring only a fraction of the systemic dose (see, e.g., Goodson, Medical Applications of Controlled Release, vol. 2, pp. 115-138 (1984)). Other controlled release systems are discussed in the review by Langer (Science 249:1527-1533 (1990)).
  • the active ingredient can be dispersed in a solid inner matrix, e.g., polymethylmethacrylate, polybutylmethacrylate, plasticized or unplasticized polyvinylchloride, plasticized nylon, plasticized polyethyleneterephthalate, natural rubber, polyisoprene, polyisobutylene, polybutadiene, polyethylene, ethylene-vinylacetate copolymers, silicone rubbers, polydimethylsiloxanes, silicone carbonate copolymers, hydrophilic polymers such as hydrogels of esters of acrylic and methacrylic acid, collagen, cross-linked polyvinylalcohol and cross-linked partially hydrolyzed polyvinyl acetate, that is surrounded by an outer polymeric membrane, e.g., polyethylene, polypropylene, ethylene/propylene copolymers, ethylene/ethyl acrylate copolymers, ethylene/vinylacetate copolymers, silicone rubbers, polydimethyl siloxanes, ne
  • parenteral dosage forms can be administered to subjects by various routes including, but not limited to, subcutaneous, intravenous (including bolus injection), intramuscular, and intraarterial. Because their administration typically bypasses subjects' natural defenses against contaminants, parenteral dosage forms are typically, sterile or capable of being sterilized prior to administration to a subject. Examples of parenteral dosage forms include, but are not limited to, solutions ready for injection, dry products ready to be dissolved or suspended in a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle for injection, suspensions ready for injection, and emulsions.
  • Suitable vehicles that can be used to provide parenteral dosage forms are well known to those skilled in the art. Examples include, but are not limited to: Water for Injection USP; aqueous vehicles such as, but not limited to, Sodium Chloride Injection, Ringer's Injection, Dextrose Injection, Dextrose and Sodium Chloride Injection, and Lactated Ringer's Injection; water miscible vehicles such as, but not limited to, ethyl alcohol, polyethylene glycol, and polypropylene glycol; and non aqueous vehicles such as, but not limited to, corn oil, cottonseed oil, peanut oil, sesame oil, ethyl oleate, isopropyl myristate, and benzyl benzoate.
  • aqueous vehicles such as, but not limited to, Sodium Chloride Injection, Ringer's Injection, Dextrose Injection, Dextrose and Sodium Chloride Injection, and Lactated Ringer's Injection
  • Transdermal, topical, and mucosal dosage forms include, but are not limited to, ophthalmic solutions, sprays, aerosols, creams, lotions, ointments, gels, solutions, emulsions, suspensions, or other forms known to one of skill in the art. See, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 16 th , 18th and 20 th eds., Mack Publishing, Easton Pa. (1980, 1990 & 2000); and Introduction to Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, 4th ed., Lea & Febiger, Philadelphia (1985).
  • transdermal dosage forms suitable for treating mucosal tissues within the oral cavity can be formulated as mouthwashes or as oral gels.
  • transdermal dosage forms include “reservoir type” or “matrix type” patches, which can be applied to the skin and worn for a specific period of time to permit the penetration of a desired amount of active ingredients.
  • Suitable excipients e.g., carriers and diluents
  • other materials that can be used to provide transdermal, topical, and mucosal dosage forms encompassed herein are well known to those skilled in the pharmaceutical arts, and depend on the particular tissue to which a given pharmaceutical composition or dosage form will be applied.
  • typical excipients include, but are not limited to, water, acetone, ethanol, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, butane 1,3 diol, isopropyl myristate, isopropyl palmitate, mineral oil, and mixtures thereof to form lotions, tinctures, creams, emulsions, gels or ointments, which are non toxic and pharmaceutically acceptable.
  • Moisturizers or humectants can also be added to pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms if desired. Examples of such additional ingredients are well known in the art. See, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 16 th , 18th and 20 th eds., Mack Publishing, Easton Pa. (1980, 1990 & 2000).
  • penetration enhancers can be used to assist in delivering the active ingredients to the tissue.
  • Suitable penetration enhancers include, but are not limited to: acetone; various alcohols such as ethanol, oleyl, and tetrahydrofuryl; alkyl sulfoxides such as dimethyl sulfoxide; dimethyl acetamide; dimethyl formamide; polyethylene glycol; pyrrolidones such as polyvinylpyrrolidone; Kollidon grades (Povidone, Polyvidone); urea; and various water soluble or insoluble sugar esters such as Tween 80 (polysorbate 80) and Span 60 (sorbitan monostearate).
  • the pH of a pharmaceutical composition or dosage form, or of the tissue to which the pharmaceutical composition or dosage form is applied may also be adjusted to improve delivery of one or more active ingredients.
  • the polarity of a solvent carrier, its ionic strength, or tonicity can be adjusted to improve delivery.
  • Compounds such as stearates can also be added to pharmaceutical compositions or dosage forms to advantageously alter the hydrophilicity or lipophilicity of one or more active ingredients so as to improve delivery.
  • stearates can serve as a lipid vehicle for the formulation, as an emulsifying agent or surfactant, and as a delivery enhancing or penetration enhancing agent.
  • Different salts, hydrates or solvates of the active ingredients can be used to further adjust the properties of the resulting composition.
  • doses are from about 1 to about 1000 mg per day for an adult, or from about 5 to about 250 mg per day or from about 10 to 50 mg per day for an adult. In certain embodiments, doses are from about 5 to about 400 mg per day or 25 to 200 mg per day per adult. In certain embodiments, dose rates of from about 50 to about 500 mg per day are also contemplated.
  • the amount of the compound or composition which will be effective in the prevention or treatment of a disorder or one or more symptoms thereof will vary with the nature and severity of the disease or condition, and the route by which the active ingredient is administered.
  • the frequency and dosage will also vary according to factors specific for each subject depending on the specific therapy (e.g., therapeutic or prophylactic agents) administered, the severity of the disorder, disease, or condition, the route of administration, as well as age, body, weight, response, and the past medical history of the subject.
  • Effective doses may be extrapolated from dose-response curves derived from in vitro or animal model test systems.
  • exemplary doses of a composition include milligram or microgram amounts of the active compound per kilogram of subject or sample weight (e.g., about 10 micrograms per kilogram to about 50 milligrams per kilogram, about 100 micrograms per kilogram to about 25 milligrams per kilogram, or about 100 microgram per kilogram to about 10 milligrams per kilogram).
  • the dosage administered to a subject is 0.140 mg/kg to 3 mg/kg of the subject's body weight, based on weight of the active compound.
  • the dosage administered to a subject is between 0.20 mg/kg and 2.00 mg/kg, or between 0.30 mg/kg and 1.50 mg/kg of the subject's body weight.
  • the recommended daily dose range of a composition provided herein for the conditions described herein lie within the range of from about 0.1 mg to about 1000 mg per day, given as a single once-a-day dose or as divided doses throughout a day.
  • the daily dose is administered twice daily in equally divided doses.
  • a daily dose range should be from about 10 mg to about 200 mg per day, in other embodiments, between about 10 mg and about 150 mg per day, in further embodiments, between about 25 and about 100 mg per day. It may be necessary to use dosages of the active ingredient outside the ranges disclosed herein in some cases, as will be apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art.
  • the clinician or treating physician will know how and when to interrupt, adjust, or terminate therapy in conjunction with subject response.
  • compositions provided herein are also encompassed by the above described dosage amounts and dose frequency schedules.
  • the dosage administered to the subject may be increased to improve the prophylactic or therapeutic effect of the composition or it may be decreased to reduce one or more side effects that a particular subject is experiencing.
  • the dosage of the composition provided herein, based on weight of the active compound, administered to prevent, treat, manage, or ameliorate a disorder, or one or more symptoms thereof in a subject is 0.1 mg/kg, 1 mg/kg, 2 mg/kg, 3 mg/kg, 4 mg/kg, 5 mg/kg, 6 mg/kg, 10 mg/kg, or 15 mg/kg or more of a subject's body weight.
  • the dosage of the composition or a composition provided herein administered to prevent, treat, manage, or ameliorate a disorder, or one or more symptoms thereof in a subject is a unit dose of 0.1 mg to 200 mg, 0.1 mg to 100 mg, 0.1 mg to 50 mg, 0.1 mg to 25 mg, 0.1 mg to 20 mg, 0.1 mg to 15 mg, 0.1 mg to 10 mg, 0.1 mg to 7.5 mg, 0.1 mg to 5 mg, 0.1 to 2.5 mg, 0.25 mg to 20 mg, 0.25 to 15 mg, 0.25 to 12 mg, 0.25 to 10 mg, 0.25 mg to 7.5 mg, 0.25 mg to 5 mg, 0.5 mg to 2.5 mg, 1 mg to 20 mg, 1 mg to 15 mg, 1 mg to 12 mg, 1 mg to 10 mg, 1 mg to 7.5 mg, 1 mg to 5 mg, or 1 mg to 2.5 mg.
  • treatment or prevention can be initiated with one or more loading doses of a compound or composition provided herein followed by one or more maintenance doses.
  • the loading dose can be, for instance, about 60 to about 400 mg per day, or about 100 to about 200 mg per day for one day to five weeks.
  • the loading dose can be followed by one or more maintenance doses.
  • each maintenance does is, independently, about from about 10 mg to about 200 mg per day, between about 25 mg and about 150 mg per day, or between about 25 and about 80 mg per day.
  • Maintenance doses can be administered daily and can be administered as single doses, or as divided doses.
  • a dose of a compound or composition provided herein can be administered to achieve a steady-state concentration of the active ingredient in blood or serum of the subject.
  • the steady-state concentration can be determined by measurement according to techniques available to those of skill or can be based on the physical characteristics of the subject such as height, weight and age.
  • a sufficient amount of a compound or composition provided herein is administered to achieve a steady-state concentration in blood or serum of the subject of from about 300 to about 4000 ng/mL, from about 400 to about 1600 ng/mL, or from about 600 to about 1200 ng/mL.
  • loading doses can be administered to achieve steady-state blood or serum concentrations of about 1200 to about 8000 ng/mL, or about 2000 to about 4000 ng/mL for one to five days.
  • maintenance doses can be administered to achieve a steady-state concentration in blood or serum of the subject of from about 300 to about 4000 ng/mL, from about 400 to about 1600 ng/mL, or from about 600 to about 1200 ng/mL.
  • administration of the same composition may be repeated and the administrations may be separated by at least 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 5 days, 10 days, 15 days, 30 days, 45 days, 2 months, 75 days, 3 months, or 6 months.
  • administration of the same prophylactic or therapeutic agent may be repeated and the administration may be separated by at least at least 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 5 days, 10 days, 15 days, 30 days, 45 days, 2 months, 75 days, 3 months, or 6 months.
  • unit dosages comprising a compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, in a form suitable for administration. Such forms are described in detail above.
  • the unit dosage comprises 1 to 1000 mg, 5 to 250 mg or 10 to 50 mg active ingredient.
  • the unit dosages comprise about 1, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, 125, 250, 500 or 1000 mg active ingredient.
  • Such unit dosages can be prepared according to techniques familiar to those of skill in the art.
  • the dosages of the second agents are to be used in the combination therapies provided herein.
  • dosages lower than those which have been or are currently being used to prevent or treat the diseases described herein, for example, liver cancer and diabetes are used in the combination therapies provided herein.
  • the recommended dosages of second agents can be obtained from the knowledge of those of skill.
  • the therapies are administered less than 5 minutes apart, less than 30 minutes apart, less than 1 hour apart, 1 hour apart, at about 1 hour apart, at about 1 to about 2 hours apart, at about 2 hours to about 3 hours apart, at about 3 hours to about 4 hours apart, at about 4 hours to about 5 hours apart, at about 5 hours to about 6 hours apart, at about 6 hours to about 7 hours apart, at about 7 hours to about 8 hours apart, at about 8 hours to about 9 hours apart, at about 9 hours to about 10 hours apart, at about 10 hours to about 11 hours apart, at about 11 hours to about 12 hours apart, at about 12 hours to 18 hours apart, 18 hours to 24 hours apart, 24 hours to 36 hours apart, 36 hours to 48 hours apart, 48 hours to 52 hours apart, 52 hours to 60 hours apart, 60 hours to 72 hours apart, 72 hours to 84 hours apart, 84 hours to 96 hours apart, or 96 hours to 120 hours part.
  • the therapies are administered no more than 24 hours apart, less than 30 minutes apart, less than 1 hour apart, 1 hour apart, at about 1 hour apart, at
  • a compound provided herein and a second agent are administered to a patient, for example, a mammal, such as a human, in a sequence and within a time interval such that the compound provided herein can act together with the other agent to provide an increased benefit than if they were administered otherwise.
  • the second active agent can be administered at the same time or sequentially in any order at different points in time; however, if not administered at the same time, they should be administered sufficiently close in time so as to provide the desired therapeutic or prophylactic effect.
  • the compound provided herein and the second active agent exert their effect at times which overlap.
  • Each second active agent can be administered separately, in any appropriate form and by any suitable route.
  • the compound provided herein is administered before, concurrently or after administration of the second active agent.
  • the compound provided herein and the second agent are administered at about 2 to 4 days apart, at about 4 to 6 days apart, at about 1 week part, at about 1 to 2 weeks apart, or more than 2 weeks apart.
  • the compound provided herein and the second agent are cyclically administered to a patient.
  • Cycling therapy involves the administration of a first agent (e.g., a first prophylactic or therapeutic agents) for a period of time, followed by the administration of a second agent and/or third agent (e.g., a second and/or third prophylactic or therapeutic agents) for a period of time and repeating this sequential administration. Cycling therapy can reduce the development of resistance to one or more of the therapies, avoid or reduce the side effects of one of the therapies, and/or improve the efficacy of the treatment.
  • a first agent e.g., a first prophylactic or therapeutic agents
  • second agent and/or third agent e.g., a second and/or third prophylactic or therapeutic agents
  • the compound provided herein and the second active agent are administered in a cycle of less than about 3 weeks, about once every two weeks, about once every 10 days or about once every week.
  • One cycle can comprise the administration of a compound provided herein and the second agent by infusion over about 90 minutes every cycle, about 1 hour every cycle, about 45 minutes every cycle.
  • Each cycle can comprise at least 1 week of rest, at least 2 weeks of rest, at least 3 weeks of rest.
  • the number of cycles administered is from about 1 to about 12 cycles, more typically from about 2 to about 10 cycles, and more typically from about 2 to about 8 cycles.
  • courses of treatment are administered concurrently to a patient, i.e., individual doses of the second agent are administered separately yet within a time interval such that the compound provided herein can work together with the second active agent.
  • one component can be administered once per week in combination with the other components that can be administered once every two weeks or once every three weeks.
  • the dosing regimens are carried out concurrently even if the therapeutics are not administered simultaneously or during the same day.
  • the second agent can act additively or synergistically with the compound provided herein.
  • the compound provided herein is administered concurrently with one or more second agents in the same pharmaceutical composition.
  • a compound provided herein is administered concurrently with one or more second agents in separate pharmaceutical compositions.
  • a compound provided herein is administered prior to or subsequent to administration of a second agent.
  • administration of a compound provided herein and a second agent by the same or different routes of administration, e.g., oral and parenteral.
  • the second active agent when the compound provided herein is administered concurrently with a second agent that potentially produces adverse side effects including, but not limited to, toxicity, can advantageously be administered at a dose that falls below the threshold that the adverse side effect is elicited.
  • kits for use in methods of treatment of a liver disorder such as cancer or metabolic diseases, such as diabetes, hyperlipidemia, atherosclerosis, and obesity.
  • the kits can include a compound or composition provided herein, a second agent or composition, and instructions providing information to a health care provider regarding usage for treating the disorder. Instructions may be provided in printed form or in the form of an electronic medium such as a floppy disc, CD, or DVD, or in the form of a website address where such instructions may be obtained.
  • a unit dose of a compound or composition provided herein, or a second agent or composition can include a dosage such that when administered to a subject, a therapeutically or prophylactically effective plasma level of the compound or composition can be maintained in the subject for at least 1 days.
  • a compound or composition can be included as a sterile aqueous pharmaceutical composition or dry powder (e.g., lyophilized) composition.
  • suitable packaging includes a solid matrix or material customarily used in a system and capable of holding within fixed limits a compound provided herein and/or a second agent suitable for administration to a subject.
  • materials include glass and plastic (e.g., polyethylene, polypropylene, and polycarbonate) bottles, vials, paper, plastic, and plastic-foil laminated envelopes and the like. If e-beam sterilization techniques are employed, the packaging should have sufficiently low density to permit sterilization of the contents.
  • 1,1′-carbonyldiimidazole (830 mg, 5.12 mmol) was added to a stirring solution of carboxylic acid 2 in anhydrous PhMe/DMF (2/1, v/v, 2.7 mL) at room temperature and the reaction mixture turned turbid instantly. After 30 min, the medium was diluted by adding anhydrous PhMe/DMF (93/7, v/v, 17 mL) and cooled to ⁇ 10° C. 2-Mercaptoethanol (359 ⁇ L, 5.12 mmol) was then added dropwise and the solution was stirred for 1 h at this temperature. The reaction mixture was diluted with H 2 O (60 mL) and the product was extracted with Et 2 O (3 ⁇ 15 mL).
  • ⁇ -L-ddA (1.00 g, 4.25 mmol) was co-evaporated with anhydrous pyridine (3 ⁇ 10 mL) and then dissolved in anhydrous pyridine/DMF (1/1, v/v, 21 mL). Diphenyl phosphite (5.76 mL, 29.8 mmol) was then added dropwise to this solution at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred for 20 min upon which a mixture of Et 3 N/H 2 O (1/1, v/v, 8.5 mL) was added dropwise, and stirring was pursued for an additional 20 min.
  • H-Phosphonate monoester 4 (1.03 g, 2.57 mmol) and alcohol 3 (1.66 g, 3.45 mmol) were co-evaporated with anhydrous pyridine (3 ⁇ 5 mL) and then dissolved in anhydrous pyridine (5 mL).
  • PyBOP (1H-benzotriazol-1-yloxytripyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate, 1.60 g, 3.08 mmol) was then added in one portion and the reaction mixture was stirred for 15 min at room temperature. The solution was poured over saturated aqueous NaHCO 3 solution (30 mL) and the product was extracted with CH 2 Cl 2 (4 ⁇ 15 mL).
  • the resulting oil was dissolved in a mixture of dioxan (350 ml) and an aqueous solution of NaOH (30%, 350 ml). The heterogene mixture was refluxed for 16 hours. The reaction mixture was allowed to cool down to room temperature, the two phases were separated, and the organic phase carefully neutralized by dropwise addition of HCl (1M). The product was extracted with methylene chloride and the organic phases were evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude orange oil was recrystallized from methylene chloride to afford carboxylic acid 3 as white crystals (92%).
  • 1,1′-carbonyldiimidazole (1.3 eq, 1.17 g) was added to a stirring solution of carboxylic acid 3 (2 g, 5.56 mmol) in an anhydrous mixture of toluene and dimethylformamide (2/1, v/v, 4.5 ml) at room temperature, and the reaction mixture turned turbid instantly. After 30 min, the reaction mixture was diluted with a mixture of toluene and dimethylformamide (93/7, v/v, 28 ml), cooled to ⁇ 10° C., and 2-mercaptoethanol (1.3 eq, 500 ⁇ L) was added. The solution was stirred for 3 h at this temperature.
  • Phosphorus acid (10 eq, 4.1 g) was coevaporated two times with anhydrous pyridine, dissolved in that solvent (25 ml) and added to crude 4. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature and a white precipitate appeared after few minutes. The reaction mixture was cooled down to 0° C. and pivaloyl chloride (5.5 eq, 3.4 ml) was added. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for 3 h. The reaction was stopped by addition of a solution of triethylammonium bicarbonate (TEAB 1M, 10 ml) and diluted with ethyl acetate (EtOAc).
  • TEAB 1M triethylammonium bicarbonate
  • EtOAc ethyl acetate
  • the crude mixture was purified by silica gel column chromatography (eluant: stepwise gradient of methanol [0-30%] in methylene chloride), followed by a purification on reverse phase chromatography (eluant: stepwise gradient of acetonitrile [0-50%] in water), to give the desired product 10 (B102) (1:1 mixture of diastereoisomers as judged by 31 P-NMR, 36%) which was lyophilized from a mixture of dioxan/water.
  • NM107 (10 g, 38.87 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous pyridine (194 ml) and chlorotrimethylsilane (4.5 eq, 21.6 ml) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature under nitrogen atmosphere for 2h30, then 4,4′-dimethoxytrityl chloride (1.5 eq, 19.8 g) and 4-dimethylaminopyridine (0.5 eq, 2.37 g) were successively added. The reaction mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature, then quenched with a saturated aqueous NaHCO 3 solution. The crude product was extracted with methylene chloride, washed with saturated aq NaHCO 3 solution, and water.
  • Compound 13 can be converted into the phosphoroamidate prodrug 10 (B102) following experimental conditions described for the last step of NM108- and NM105-OH-SATE phosphoroamidate synthesis, in Examples 3 and 4, respectively.
  • the crude mixture was purified on silica gel flash column chromatography (eluant: stepwise gradient [0-30%] of methanol in methylene chloride) and then, on reverse phase column chromatography (eluant: stepwise gradient [0-100%] of acetonitrile in water) to give the desired product 8 (B184) (1:1 mixture of diastereoisomers according to 31 P-NMR, 800 mg, 39%) which was lyophilized from a mixture of dioxan/water.
  • a anti-cancer drug, R—OH, such as an antiviral nucleoside, having a free OH group, is derivatized to form a phosphoramidate compound according to the following scheme. Reactive groups on the molecule, such as other hydroxyl groups, are protected using methods known in the art.
  • a phosphoroamidate of 5-azacytidine is prepared as follows:
  • Examples 6-10 illustrate by way of example the effect of the phosphoroamidate group on an antiviral compound to promote liver specific delivery of an active agent to liver cells.
  • Measurements of the concentration of 2′-3′-dideoxyadenosine-5′-triphosphate (ddATP) (the triphosphate nucleotide of 2′-3′-dideoxyadenosine (ddA) are performed by liquid chromatography tandem mass spectrometry (LC/MS/MS), e.g., of methanolic extracts of hepatocytes.
  • ddATP 2′-3′-dideoxyadenosine-5′-triphosphate
  • ddA the triphosphate nucleotide of 2′-3′-dideoxyadenosine
  • TP-ddA concentration of ddATP is measured by comparison to a standard curve.
  • Working stock solutions of TP-ddA are prepared from a 100 ⁇ mol/ ⁇ l stock solution in de-ionized water of ddATP (tetrasodium salt of >91% purity) purchased from Sigma Chemical Co as follows:
  • Working stock#1 Test compound TP-ddA 100 2000 2000 4000 50.0 500 2.
  • Working stock#2 Test article TP-ddA 100 1000 3000 4000 25.0 250 3.
  • Working stock#4 prepared from stock#1) TP-ddA 100 500 3500 4000 12.5 125 4.
  • Working stock#5 prepared from stock#1) TP-ddA 100 200 3800 4000 5.0 50 5.
  • Working stock#6 prepared from stock#1) TP-ddA 100 100 3900 4000 2.5 25 6.
  • Working stock#7 prepared from stock#1) TP-ddA 100 40 3960 4000 1.0 10
  • calibration standards are prepared as follows using liver
  • HPLC Tandem MS analysis instrument method e.g. HPLC Tandem MS analysis instrument method:
  • HPLC is conducted on Phenomenex Luna Amino 3 ⁇ m 100 A, 30 ⁇ 2 mm column, with a mobile phase: A: 70% 10 mM NH 4 OAc 30% ACN pH 6.0; and B: 70% 1 mM NH 4 OAc 30% ACN pH 10.5 as follows:
  • hepatocytes Primary hepatocytes (Rat, Cynomolgus Monkey or human) were seeded at 0.8 ⁇ 10 6 in a collagen-coated 12-well plate and allowed to attach 4-6 hours after which time the seeding medium was replaced with serum-free culture medium and cells allowed to acclimatize to the new medium overnight. On the next day, cells were exposed for 1, 4, 8 and 24 hours to test article A550 (NM204) at 10 and 50 ⁇ M prepared in fresh culture medium from stock solution in DMSO (final DMSO concentration was 0.1%). At each time point, an aliquot (500 ⁇ l) was collected and immediately added to 500 ⁇ l of acetonitrile and stored at ⁇ 20° C. until analysis.
  • LddA-TP formation in hepatocytes LddA TP Levels (pmol/million cells)
  • Rat Monkey Human A550 (Ex 1) 10 ⁇ M Time (hour) 1 159.5 287.5 161.5 4 388.0 978.0 312.5 8 468.5 1230.0 352.5 24 422.0 344.0 366.0
  • A550 (Ex 1) 50 ⁇ M Time (hour) 1 393.0 2085.0 682.5 4 1212.0 5690.0 1480.0 8 1590.0 6030.0 1930.0 24 1505.0 3030.0 2062.5
  • A550 (NM-204) (the compound of Example 1 (Hydroxy-tBuSATE N-benzylphosphoroamidate derivative of L-ddA) in the rat liver was evaluated following a single intravenous (I.V.) or oral administration of A550 (NM-204) at a dose of 20 (oral) or 10 (I.V.) mg/Kg body weight. The dose solutions were prepared on the same day prior to dose administration.
  • each animal was euthanized by CO 2 gas followed by exsanguination via the abdominal vein. Livers were collected immediately after sacrifice, flash frozen in liquid nitrogen, placed on dry ice, and later stored at ⁇ 70° C., before being analyzed.
  • Control rat liver samples were taken from whole frozen livers (Bioreclamation, Inc. Hicksville, N.Y.) with the aid of a tissue coring utensil (Harris Unicore, 8.0 mm, VWR). Each ⁇ 0.1 g sample was placed in individual 2 mL poly vials with 0.940 mL of 80% MeOH/20% DIH 2 O and homogenates were prepared using a mechanical tissue disruptor (Tissue Master, Omni-International, Inc, Marietta Ga.). The vials received a 10 ⁇ l aliquot of a working stock solution and a 50 ⁇ l aliquot of the ISTD before vortexing for ⁇ 30 sec. The mixtures were stored overnight at ⁇ 20° C.
  • NADPH Incubations Microsomal or S9 incubations were conducted in a final volume of 0.5 mL. Pooled liver microsomal or S9 protein (1.0 mg/mL), suspended in incubation buffer (100 mM potassium phosphate, pH 7.4, 5 mM MgCl 2 , and 0.1 mM EDTA) was preincubated for 5 min at 37° C. with 10-50 ⁇ M OHSATE phosphoroamidate compound from a stock solution in DMSO (final DMSO concentration was 0.1%); the reaction was initiated by the addition of NADPH (3 mM final concentration). Incubations with no NADPH served as controls.
  • incubation buffer 100 mM potassium phosphate, pH 7.4, 5 mM MgCl 2 , and 0.1 mM EDTA
  • FIGS. 1 and 2 depict depletion of NM108 SATE and NM107 SATE, respectively, after incubation with NADPH in monkey liver S9.
  • HPLC Agilent 1100 Column: Phenomenex Luna C18(2), 20 ⁇ 2 mm, Mobile phases (MP): MP(A) 10 mM K 2 HPO 4 pH5, MP(B) ACN Gradient elution: 20 to 63% MP(B) run from 0 to 30 min Runtime: 20 min Flow rate: 1 mL/min Injection volume: 10-20 ⁇ L UV: 252 nm-NM108SATE 272 nm-NM107SATE
  • the metabolism is NADPH dependent, it is possible that the phosphoroamidate compound is preferentially activated by Cytochrome P450 in the liver.
  • HPM hepatocyte culture medium
  • Hepatocyte incubations were conducted in a final volume of 1.0 mL HCM/well (0.8 million cells/mL). HCM from overnight incubation of cells was removed and replaced with fresh HCM, pre-warmed to 37° C., containing 10 ⁇ M test article from a stock solution in DMSO (final DMSO concentration was 0.1%). At specific times (up to 24 hrs), incubation medium was discarded and the cell monolayers were carefully washed two times with ice-cold PBS. Following the last wash, all PBS was carefully removed and 1 mL of extraction buffer (ice-cold 70% methanol) was added. Each well was sealed with parafilm immediately following addition of methanol.
  • extraction buffer ice-cold 70% methanol
  • HepG2s or Huh7 cells were plated at 0.4 ⁇ 10 6 cells/well in collagen-coated 12-well plates. Cells were allowed to attach overnight. Culture medium from overnight incubation of cells was removed and replaced with fresh culture medium, pre-warmed to 37° C., containing 10 ⁇ M test article from a stock solution in DMSO (final DMSO concentration was 0.1%). After 24-72 hours, incubation medium was discarded and the cell monolayers were carefully washed two times with ice-cold PBS. Following the last wash, all PBS was carefully removed and 1 mL of extraction buffer (ice-cold 70% methanol) was added. Each well was sealed with parafilm immediately following addition of methanol.
  • extraction buffer ice-cold 70% methanol
  • Cellular extracts were prepared by transferring 0.9 mL of extract into 2 mL microfuge tubes followed by centrifugation for 5 min at 14,000 rpm. Approximately 100 ⁇ L of the supernatant was transferred to HPLC vials and triphosphate levels determined by LCMS/MS as described below.
  • NM107 triphosphate levels and B102 in cell extracts were observed as follows:

Abstract

Provided herein are compounds, compositions and methods for the treatment of liver disorders, including liver cancer and metabolic diseases, such as diabetes, hyperlipidemia, atherosclerosis, and obesity. Specifically, compounds and compositions of nucleoside derivatives are disclosed, which can be administered either alone or in combination with other anti-cancer agents.

Description

    1. CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This patent applications claims the benefit of priority under 35 U.S.C. § 119 to 1) U.S. Provisional Appl. No. 60/877,944, filed Dec. 28, 2006; 2) U.S. Provisional Appl. No. 60/936,290, filed Jun. 18, 2007; and 3) U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/985,891, filed Nov. 6, 2007. The disclosures of the above referenced applications are incorporated by reference in their entirety herein.
  • 2. FIELD
  • The present invention relates to compounds, methods and pharmaceutical compositions, for use in treatment and prevention of disorders of the liver, including cancer.
  • 3. BACKGROUND
  • Drug induced toxicities and pharmacological side effects are often associated with interactions by the drug or drug metabolite in tissues not associated with the pharmacological benefits of the drug therapy. In other cases, the desired pharmacological effect is poorly achieved either because of dose-limiting toxicities or inadequate drug levels in the target tissues. Thus, there is a need to deliver drugs to specific tissues or organs. High organ specificity can be achieved by a variety of mechanisms including local administration to the target organ and drug-protein conjugates. Local administration to the target organ is an invasive procedure. Drug-protein conjugates exhibit poor oral bioavailability, limitations in carrier manufacturing and drug loading, a potential for diminished liver uptake due to down regulation of the receptor in diseased tissue, and a high incidence of antibody induction. A third approach entails use of prodrugs that are activated by enzymes highly enriched in the target organ.
  • There is a particular need to deliver drugs to the liver to treat diseases such as cancer and metabolic disorders. Many therapies for these conditions have narrow therapeutic indices and many therapeutic indications could be benefitted by selective delivery of the therapeutic agent to the liver.
  • 4. SUMMARY
  • Phosphoroamidate and phosphonoamidate compound forms of a variety of therapeutic agents are provided, as well as methods for their manufacture and use in the treatment of a variety of disorders including liver cancer, inflammation, fibrosis and metabolic disorders. In one embodiment, the compound is a S-pivaloyl-2-thioethyl phosphoroamidate, S-pivaloyl-2-thioethyl phosphonoamidate, S-hydroxypivaloyl-2-thioethyl phosphoroamidate or S-hydroxypivaloyl-2-thioethyl phosphonoamidate. As used herein, a “phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compound of a therapeutic agent” includes a therapeutic agent derivatized to include a phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate group. The therapeutic agent is, for example, an anti-cancer agent that includes, or has been derivatized to include, a reactive group, such as a hydroxyl, for attachment of the phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate moiety. Such therapeutic agents include, but are not limited to nucleosides and nucleoside analogs including acyclic nucleosides. In some embodiments, phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compounds of nucleotides and nucleotide analogs, such as 2′-branched and 4′-branched nucleosides are provided. Such compounds can be administered in an effective amount for the treatment of liver disorders, including cancer.
  • In certain embodiments, while not being limited to any theory, it is possible that the parent drug is obtained from selective metabolism of the phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compound in the liver and thus the parent drug provided herein is capable of accumulating in the liver. Accordingly, provided are methods of directing phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compounds disclosed herein to the liver.
  • In certain embodiments, phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compounds of pharmaceutical agents for the treatment of a liver disorder can be made and used therapeutically as described herein. A variety of phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compounds can be used in the treatment of liver disorders. In particular, therapeutic agents for the treatment of liver cancer can be derivatized to form a phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compound as described herein, and used for the treatment of liver cancers. Liver cancers that can be treated include benign tumors, malignant tumors, hemangioma, hepatic adenomas, focal nodular hyperplasia, hepatocellular carcinoma, fibrolamellar carcinoma, cholangiocarcinomas, bile duct cancers, and other primary and metastatic cancers of the liver.
  • Phosphoroamidate and phosphonoamidate compounds of a variety of therapeutic agents are provided. The compounds can be formed using methods available in the art and those disclosed herein. Such compounds can be used in some embodiments to enhance delivery of the drug to the liver. In one embodiment, the compound comprises an S-acyl-2-thioethyl phosphoroamidate or an S-acyl-2-thioethyl phosphonoamidate derivative, e.g., a S-pivaloyl-2-thioethyl phosphoroamidate or a S-hydroxypivaloyl-2-thioethyl phosphonoamidate derivative.
  • In some embodiments, the phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compounds, as well as salts thereof, and compositions comprising the compounds, provided herein are useful for treatment of disorders of the liver, including cancer. In other embodiments, the phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compounds, as well as salts thereof, and compositions comprising the compounds, provided herein are useful for treatment of metabolic diseases, such as diabetes, hyperlipidemia, atherosclerosis, and obesity. In other embodiments, the compounds, as well as salts thereof, and compositions comprising the compounds, provided herein are useful for treatment of liver fibrosis and inflammation.
  • In one embodiment, the compound provided herein is a compound of Formula I:
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00001
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, a stereoisomeric, tautomeric or polymorphic form thereof, wherein
  • Xa is
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00002
  • Z is O or S;
  • each W is independently O or S;
  • Ry and Ru each independently represent alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, amino, aminoalkyl, alkoxy, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl, all optionally substituted;
  • Ra and Rb are selected as follows:
  • i) Ra and Rb are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyarylalkyl, acyloxyalkyl, aminocarbonylalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, aryl, aryl alkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl or heterocyclyl, all optionally substituted; or
  • ii) Ra and Rb together with the nitrogen atom on which they are substituted form a 3-7 membered heterocyclic or heteroaryl ring;
  • n is 0-3; n2 is 1-4; and
  • R1 is a moiety derivable by removal of a hydrogen from a group, such as a hydroxy group, of a therapeutic agent such as an anti-cancer drug.
  • In another embodiment,
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00003
  • Z is O, S, NH or NRw, where Rw is, e.g., alkyl, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, amino, aminoalkyl, alkoxy, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl, all optionally substituted;
  • each W is O, S, NH or NRw, where Rw is, e.g., alkyl, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, amino, aminoalkyl, alkoxy, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl, all optionally substituted;
  • Ry and Ru each independently represent alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, amino, aminoalkyl, alkoxy, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl, all optionally substituted;
  • Ra and Rb are selected as follows:
  • i) Ra and Rb are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyarylalkyl, acyloxyalkyl, aminocarbonylalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, aryl, aryl alkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl or heterocyclyl, all optionally substituted; or
  • ii) Ra and Rb together with the nitrogen atom on which they are substituted form a 3-7 membered heterocyclic or heteroaryl ring;
  • n is 0-3; n2 is 1-4; and
  • R1 is a moiety derivable by removal of a hydrogen from a group, such as a hydroxy group, of a therapeutic agent such as an anti-cancer drug.
  • Those of skill in the art will recognize that compounds of Formula I can be designed or prepared by reaction, e.g., at a hydroxy group of said drug, for example via condensation or dehydration. For convenience, in the description herein when exemplary substituents, such as R1 groups are identified as a drug in a phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compound, e.g. in a formula, those of skill in the art will recognize that the compound comprises a derivative, e.g. a radical of the anti-cancer drug. Those derivatives can for example be prepared by elimination of a hydrogen radical from a hydroxy group of the drug, for instance in a dehydration reaction.
  • In certain embodiments of Formula I, R1 is a nucleoside comprising a cyclic or acyclic sugar or an analog thereof.
  • In certain embodiments, R1 is an anti-cancer drug selected from clarubicin, decitabine, daunorubicin, dihydro-5-azacytidine, doxorubicin, epirubicin, estramustin, etoposide, fludarabine, 7-hydroxychlorpromazin, neplanocin A, podophyllotoxin, tezacitabine, troxacitabine, vinblastin, vincristin, vindesin, etoposide, teniposide, NK-611, camptothecin, irinotecan, 9-aminocamptothecin, GG-211, topotecan, paclitaxel, Azatoxin, coformycin, pirarubicin, nelarabine and losoxantrone.
  • In one embodiment, R1 is an immunosuppressant, such as pentostatin, combretastatin A-4, mycophenolic acid or mitoxantrone.
  • In certain embodiments according to formula I, Ry is substituted alkyl, e.g. hydroxyalkyl or aminoalkyl; and Ra and Rb are independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, benzyl or substituted benzyl, for instance hydroxy- or amino-substituted alkyl or benzyl.
  • In another embodiment, Ry is —ORc, —C(Rc)3 or —NHRc where each Rc is independently alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl or substituted aryl, for instance hydroxy- or amino-substituted alkyl or aryl; and Ra and Rb are independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, benzyl or substituted benzyl, for instance hydroxy- or amino-substituted alkyl or benzyl.
  • In a further embodiment, Ra and Rb are independently benzyl or substituted alkyl. In a further embodiment, Ry is selected from the group consisting of alkyl and hydroxyalkyl. In certain embodiments, Ry is —C(CH3)2CH2OH.
  • In certain embodiments, the compounds provided herein are selected such that R1 is not 3′-azido-2′,3′-dideoxythymidine.
  • In another embodiment, the compound provided herein is a compound of Formula IIa or IIb:
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00004
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, a stereoisomeric, tautomeric or polymorphic form thereof, wherein
  • Ry is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, amino, aminoalkyl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl, all optionally substituted;
  • Ra and Rb are selected as follows:
  • i) Ra and Rb are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyarylalkyl, acyloxyalkyl, aminocarbonylalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, aryl, aryl alkyl cycloalkyl, heteroaryl or heterocyclyl, all optionally substituted; or
  • ii) Ra and Rb together with the nitrogen atom on which they are substituted form a 3-7 membered heterocyclic or heteroaryl ring; and
  • R1 is a drug such as an anti-cancer drug.
  • In certain embodiments according to Formula IIa or IIb, Ry is substituted alkyl, e.g. hydroxyalkyl or aminoalkyl; and Ra and Rb are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, benzyl or substituted benzyl, for instance hydroxy- or amino-substituted alkyl or benzyl. In another embodiment, Ry is —ORc, —C(Rc)3 or —NHRc where each Rc is independently alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl or substituted aryl, for instance hydroxy- or amino-substituted alkyl or aryl; and Ra and Rb are independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, benzyl or substituted benzyl, for instance hydroxy- or amino-substituted alkyl or benzyl. In a further embodiment, Ra and Rb are each independently benzyl or substituted alkyl. In a further embodiment, Ry is selected from the group consisting of alkyl and hydroxyalkyl. In certain embodiments, Ry is —C(CH3)2CH2OH.
  • In some embodiments, provided herein are:
    • (a) compounds as described herein, e.g. of Formula I, IIa or IIb, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts and compositions thereof;
    • (b) compounds as described herein, e.g. of Formula I, IIa or IIb, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts and compositions thereof for use in the treatment and/or prophylaxis of a liver disorder;
    • (c) processes for the preparation of compounds as described herein, e.g. of Formula I, IIa or IIb, as described in more detail below;
    • (d) pharmaceutical formulations comprising a compound as described herein, e.g. of Formula I, IIa or IIb, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof together with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent; and
    • (e) pharmaceutical formulations comprising a compound as described herein, e.g. of Formula I, IIa or IIb, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof together with one or more other effective anti-cancer agents, optionally in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
  • In certain embodiments, the following phosphoroamidate and phosphonoamidate formulas and compounds are provided, which optionally act as thyroid hormone receptor effectors:
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00005
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00006
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00007
  • wherein
  • each R, if present, is independently alkyl, halogen or hydroxyl;
  • X, if present, is CH2, O or S;
  • Ry, if present, is optionally substituted alkyl, wherein the substituted alkyl is optionally hydroxyalkyl or aminoalkyl, e.g., —C(CH3)2CH2OH; and
  • Ra and Rb, if present, are independently hydrogen; unsubstituted alkyl; or alkyl substituted with aryl, amino, amido, hydroxyl, alkoxy, aminoalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each optionally substituted; wherein, in one embodiment, Ra and Rb are independently H or a benzyl that is optionally substituted, for example, with hydroxy or amino.
  • In certain embodiments according to formula IIIa or b, IVa or b, Va or b, VIa or b, VIIa or b, VIII a or b, Ra is hydrogen, Rb is —CH2—C6H5 and Ry is —C(CH3)2CH2OH.
  • In certain embodiments, the thyroid hormone receptor effector compound provided herein has a formula selected from:
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00008
  • wherein
  • Rx and Rz are each independently hydrogen or alkyl;
  • Rw is alkyl;
  • Ry is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, amino, aminoalkyl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl, all optionally substituted;
  • Ra and Rb are selected as follows:
  • i) Ra and Rb are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyarylalkyl, acyloxyalkyl, aminocarbonylalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, aryl, aryl alkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl or heterocyclyl, all optionally substituted; or
  • ii) Ra and Rb together with the nitrogen atom on which they are substituted form a 3-7 membered heterocyclic or heteroaryl ring.
  • In certain embodiments, the thyroid hormone receptor effector provided herein is selected from:
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00009
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00010
  • In certain embodiments, Ra is hydrogen, Rb is —CH2—C6H5 and Ry is —C(CH3)2CH2OH.
  • In certain embodiments, the compound or Formula selected from IIIa or b, IVa or b, Va or b, VIa or b, VIIa or b, VIII a or b is derived from a phosphonate compound useful for inhibiting gluconeogenesis, optionally by inhibiting the enzyme fructose 1,6-bisphosphatase (FBPase).
  • In certain embodiments, the compound or Formula selected from IXa or b, Xa or b, XIa or b, XIIa or b, XIIIa or b and XIVa or b is derived from a compound useful for inhibiting gluconeogenesis, optionally by inhibiting the enzyme fructose 1,6-bisphosphatase (FBPase).
  • In certain embodiments, the compound or Formula selected from IIIa or b, IVa or b, Va or b, VIa or b, VIIa or b, VIII a or b is a phosphonic acid-containing compound that binds to a thyroid receptor in the liver, and is optionally an agonist, antagonist, partial agonist or partial antagonist of T3. Inhibition of gluconeogenesis can result in blood glucose lowering in diabetic subjects. Such compounds can exhibit enhanced pharmacokinetics including oral bioavailability and liver drug levels.
  • In certain embodiments, provided is a method of treatment of a subject in need thereof, the method comprising administering to the subject a phosphoroamidate and phosphonoamidate compound or Formula selected from IIIa or b, IVa or b, Va or b, VIa or b, VIIa or b, VIII a or b, IXa or b, X a or b, XIa or b, XIIa or b, XIIIa or b and XIVa or b or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, enantiomer, ester or prodrug thereof, in an amount effective for one or more of the following:
  • reducing plasma lipid levels, lowering cholesterol levels, reducing triglyceride levels, or increasing the ratio of HDL to LDL;
  • lowering blood glucose levels;
  • treating hyperlipidemia or hypercholesterolemia;
  • treating obesity, reducing fat content, treating fatty liver, reducing weight or preventing weight gain;
  • treating atherosclerosis, coronary heart disease, heart failure, nephrotic syndrome, or chronic renal failure;
  • lowering blood glucose levels, treating diabetes, impaired glucose tolerance, metabolic syndrome x, insulin resistance or hyperinsulinemia;
  • increasing levels of genes associated with gluconeogenesis;
  • decreasing hepatic glycogen levels or maintaining or improving glycemic control;
  • amelioration of hyperinsulinemia and/or decrease of glucose levels in diabetic subjects at doses that optionally do not affect cardiac function, e.g., heart rate, force of systolic contraction, duration of diastolic relaxation, vascular tone, or heart weight;
  • treating thyroid disease, thyroid cancer, depression, glaucoma, cardiac arrhythmias, heart failure, or osteoporosis;
  • increasing mitochondrial biogenesis, or increasing expression of PGC-1, AMP activated protein kinase or nuclear respiratory factor;
  • inhibiting hepatic gluconeogenesis; or
  • modulating expression of certain genes in the liver resulting in effects on lipids (e.g., cholesterol), glucose, lipoproteins, and triglycerides, or modulation of T3-responsive genes.
  • In certain embodiments, the compounds do not affect thyroid function, thyroid production of circulating iodinated thyronines such as T3 and T4, and/or the ratio of T3 to T4.
  • Also provided are pharmaceutical compositions comprising the compounds, e.g., in a dosage unit suitable for administration, e.g., oral administration.
  • 5. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1 depicts depletion of B184 (NM108 hydroxySATE phosphoroamidate) after incubation with and without NADPH in monkey liver S9.
  • FIG. 2 depicts depletion of B102 (NM107 hydroxySATE phosphoroamidate) after incubation with and without NADPH in monkey liver S9.
  • 6. DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS
  • Provided herein are compounds, compositions and methods useful for treating liver disorders, such as cancer, or metabolic diseases, such as diabetes, hyperlipidemia, atherosclerosis, and obesity. Further provided are dosage forms useful for such methods.
  • 6.1 Definitions
  • When referring to the compounds provided herein, the following terms have the following meanings unless indicated otherwise.
  • The term “alkyl”, as used herein, unless otherwise specified, includes a saturated straight, branched, or cyclic, primary, secondary, or tertiary hydrocarbon of typically C1 to C10, and specifically includes methyl, CF3, CCl3, CFCl2, CF2Cl, ethyl, CH2CF3, CF2CF3, propyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, secbutyl, t-butyl, pentyl, cyclopentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, isohexyl, cyclohexyl, cyclohexylmethyl, 3-methylpentyl, 2,2-dimethylbutyl, and 2,3-dimethylbutyl. The term includes both substituted and unsubstituted alkyl groups, and particularly includes halogenated alkyl groups, and even more particularly fluorinated alkyl groups. Non-limiting examples of moieties with which the alkyl group can be substituted are selected from the group consisting of halogen (fluoro, chloro, bromo or iodo), hydroxyl, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, alkoxy, aryloxy, nitro, cyano, sulfonic acid, sulfate, phosphonic acid, phosphate, or phosphonate, either unprotected, or protected as necessary, as known to those skilled in the art, for example, as taught in Greene, et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991, hereby incorporated by reference.
  • The term “lower alkyl”, as used herein, and unless otherwise specified, includes a C to C4 saturated straight, branched, or if appropriate, a cyclic (for example, cyclopropyl) alkyl group, including both substituted and unsubstituted moieties.
  • “Alkylene” includes divalent saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon groups particularly having up to about 11 carbon atoms and more particularly 1 to 6 carbon atoms which can be straight-chained or branched. This term is exemplified by groups such as methylene (—CH2—), ethylene (—CH2CH2—), the propylene isomers (e.g., —CH2CH2CH2— and —CH(CH3)CH2—) and the like.
  • “Alkenyl” includes monovalent olefinically unsaturated hydrocarbon groups, in certain embodiment, having up to about 11 carbon atoms, from 2 to 8 carbon atoms, or from 2 to 6 carbon atoms, which can be straight-chained or branched and having at least 1 or from 1 to 2 sites of olefinic unsaturation. Exemplary alkenyl groups include ethenyl (—CH═CH2), n-propenyl (—CH2CH═CH2), isopropenyl (—C(CH3)═CH2), vinyl and substituted vinyl, and the like.
  • “Alkenylene” includes divalent olefinically unsaturated hydrocarbon groups, in certain embodiments, having up to about 11 carbon atoms or from 2 to 6 carbon atoms which can be straight-chained or branched and having at least 1 or from 1 to 2 sites of olefinic unsaturation. This term is exemplified by groups such as ethenylene (—CH═CH—), the propenylene isomers (e.g., —CH═CHCH2— and —C(CH3)═CH— and —CH═C(CH3)—) and the like.
  • “Alkynyl” includes acetylenically unsaturated hydrocarbon groups, in certain embodiments, having up to about 11 carbon atoms or from 2 to 6 carbon atoms which can be straight-chained or branched and having at least 1 or from 1 to 2 sites of alkynyl unsaturation. Non-limiting examples of alkynyl groups include acetylenic, ethynyl (—C≡CH), propargyl (—CH2C≡CH), and the like.
  • The term “aryl”, as used herein, and unless otherwise specified, includes phenyl, biphenyl, or naphthyl, and preferably phenyl. The term includes both substituted and unsubstituted moieties. The aryl group can be substituted with any described moiety, including, but not limited to, one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of halogen (fluoro, chloro, bromo or iodo), alkyl, hydroxyl, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, alkoxy, aryloxy, nitro, cyano, sulfonic acid, sulfate, phosphonic acid, phosphate, or phosphonate, either unprotected, or protected as necessary, as known to those skilled in the art, for example, as taught in Greene, et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991.
  • “Alkoxy” includes the group —OR where R is alkyl. Particular alkoxy groups include, by way of example, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, tert-butoxy, sec-butoxy, n-pentoxy, n-hexoxy, 1,2-dimethylbutoxy, and the like.
  • “Alkoxycarbonyl” includes a radical —C(O)-alkoxy where alkoxy is as defined herein.
  • “Amino” includes the radical —NH2.
  • “Carboxyl” includes the radical —C(O)OH.
  • The term “alkylamino” or “arylamino” includes an amino group that has one or two alkyl or aryl substituents, respectively. Unless otherwise specifically stated in this application, when alkyl is a suitable moiety, lower alkyl is preferred. Similarly, when alkyl or lower alkyl is a suitable moiety, unsubstituted alkyl or lower alkyl is preferred.
  • “Halogen” or “halo” includes chloro, bromo, fluoro or iodo.
  • “Monoalkylamino” includes the group alkyl-NR′—, wherein R′ is selected from hydrogen and alkyl.
  • “Thioalkoxy” includes the group —SR where R is alkyl.
  • The term “protected” as used herein and unless otherwise defined refers to a group that is added to an oxygen, nitrogen, or phosphorus atom to prevent its further reaction or for other purposes. A wide variety of oxygen and nitrogen protecting groups are known to those skilled in the art of organic synthesis.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable salt” includes any salt of a compound provided herein which retains its biological properties and which is not toxic or otherwise undesirable for pharmaceutical use. Such salts may be derived from a variety of organic and inorganic counter-ions well known in the art. Such salts include: (1) acid addition salts formed with organic or inorganic acids such as hydrochloric, hydrobromic, sulfuric, nitric, phosphoric, sulfamic, acetic, trifluoroacetic, trichloroacetic, propionic, hexanoic, cyclopentylpropionic, glycolic, glutaric, pyruvic, lactic, malonic, succinic, sorbic, ascorbic, malic, maleic, fumaric, tartaric, citric, benzoic, 3-(4-hydroxybenzoyl)benzoic, picric, cinnamic, mandelic, phthalic, lauric, methanesulfonic, ethanesulfonic, 1,2-ethane-disulfonic, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonic, benzenesulfonic, 4-chlorobenzenesulfonic, 2-naphthalenesulfonic, 4-toluenesulfonic, camphoric, camphorsulfonic, 4-methylbicyclo[2.2.2]-oct-2-ene-1-carboxylic, glucoheptonic, 3-phenylpropionic, trimethylacetic, tert-butylacetic, lauryl sulfuric, gluconic, benzoic, glutamic, hydroxynaphthoic, salicylic, stearic, cyclohexylsulfamic, quinic, muconic acid and the like acids; or (2) salts formed when an acidic proton present in the parent compound either (a) is replaced by a metal ion, e.g., an alkali metal ion, an alkaline earth ion or an aluminum ion, or alkali metal or alkaline earth metal hydroxides, such as sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, aluminum, lithium, zinc, and barium hydroxide, ammonia or (b) coordinates with an organic base, such as aliphatic, alicyclic, or aromatic organic amines, such as ammonia, methylamine, dimethylamine, diethylamine, picoline, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, ethylenediamine, lysine, arginine, ornithine, choline, N,N′-dibenzylethylene-diamine, chloroprocaine, diethanolamine, procaine, N-benzylphenethylamine, N-methylglucamine piperazine, tris(hydroxymethyl)-aminomethane, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, and the like.
  • Salts further include, by way of example only, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, tetraalkylammonium and the like, and when the compound contains a basic functionality, salts of non-toxic organic or inorganic acids, such as hydrohalides, e.g. hydrochloride and hydrobromide, sulfate, phosphate, sulfamate, nitrate, acetate, trifluoroacetate, trichloroacetate, propionate, hexanoate, cyclopentylpropionate, glycolate, glutarate, pyruvate, lactate, malonate, succinate, sorbate, ascorbate, malate, maleate, fumarate, tartarate, citrate, benzoate, 3-(4-hydroxybenzoyl)benzoate, picrate, cinnamate, mandelate, phthalate, laurate, methanesulfonate (mesylate), ethanesulfonate, 1,2-ethane-disulfonate, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonate, benzenesulfonate (besylate), 4-chlorobenzenesulfonate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, 4-toluenesulfonate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, 4-methylbicyclo[2.2.2]-oct-2-ene-1-carboxylate, glucoheptonate, 3-phenylpropionate, trimethylacetate, tert-butylacetate, lauryl sulfate, gluconate, benzoate, glutamate, hydroxynaphthoate, salicylate, stearate, cyclohexylsulfamate, quinate, muconate and the like.
  • The term “alkaryl” or “alkylaryl” includes an aryl group with an alkyl substituent. The term aralkyl or arylalkyl includes an alkyl group with an aryl substituent.
  • The term “purine” or “pyrimidine” base includes, but is not limited to, adenine, N6-alkylpurines, N6-acylpurines (wherein acyl is C(O)(alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or arylalkyl), N6-benzylpurine, N6-halopurine, N6-vinylpurine, N6-acetylenic purine, N6-acyl purine, N6-hydroxyalkyl purine, N6-alkylaminopurine, N6-thioalkyl purine, N2-alkylpurines, N2-alkyl-6-thiopurines, thymine, cytosine, 5-fluorocytosine, 5-methylcytosine, 6-azapyrimidine, including 6-azacytosine, 2- and/or 4-mercaptopyrmidine, uracil, 5-halouracil, including 5-fluorouracil, C5-alkylpyrimidines, C5-benzylpyrimidines, C5-halopyrimidines, C5-vinylpyrimidine, C5-acetylenic pyrimidine, C5-acyl pyrimidine, C5-hydroxyalkyl purine, C5-amidopyrimidine, C5-cyanopyrimidine, C5-iodopyrimidine, C6-iodo-pyrimidine, C5—Br-vinyl pyrimidine, C6—Br-vinyl pyrimidine, C5-nitropyrimidine, C5-amino-pyrimidine, N2-alkylpurines, N2-alkyl-6-thiopurines, 5-azacytidinyl, 5-azauracilyl, triazolopyridinyl, imidazolopyridinyl, pyrrolopyrimidinyl, and pyrazolopyrimidinyl. Purine bases include, but are not limited to, guanine, adenine, hypoxanthine, 7-deazaguanine, 7-deazaadenine, 2,6-diaminopurine, and 6-chloropurine. Functional oxygen and nitrogen groups on the base can be protected as necessary or desired. Suitable protecting groups are well known to those skilled in the art, and include trimethylsilyl, dimethylhexylsilyl, t-butyldimethylsilyl, and t-butyldiphenylsilyl, trityl, alkyl groups, and acyl groups such as acetyl and propionyl, methanesulfonyl, and p-toluenesulfonyl.
  • The term “acyl” or “O-linked ester” includes a group of the formula C(O)R′, wherein R′ is an straight, branched, or cyclic alkyl (including lower alkyl), carboxylate reside of amino acid, aryl including phenyl, alkaryl, arylalkyl including benzyl, alkoxyalkyl including methoxymethyl, aryloxyalkyl such as phenoxymethyl; or substituted alkyl (including lower alkyl), aryl including phenyl optionally substituted with chloro, bromo, fluoro, iodo, C1 to C4 alkyl or C1 to C4 alkoxy, sulfonate esters such as alkyl or arylalkyl sulphonyl including methanesulfonyl, the mono, di or triphosphate ester, trityl or monomethoxy-trityl, substituted benzyl, alkaryl, arylalkyl including benzyl, alkoxyalkyl including methoxymethyl, aryloxyalkyl such as phenoxymethyl. Aryl groups in the esters optimally comprise a phenyl group. In particular, acyl groups include acetyl, trifluoroacetyl, methylacetyl, cyclpropylacetyl, propionyl, butyryl, hexanoyl, heptanoyl, octanoyl, neo-heptanoyl, phenylacetyl, 2-acetoxy-2-phenylacetyl, diphenylacetyl, α-methoxy-α-trifluoromethyl-phenylacetyl, bromoacetyl, 2-nitro-benzeneacetyl, 4-chloro-benzeneacetyl, 2-chloro-2,2-diphenylacetyl, 2-chloro-2-phenylacetyl, trimethylacetyl, chlorodifluoroacetyl, perfluoroacetyl, fluoroacetyl, bromodifluoroacetyl, methoxyacetyl, 2-thiopheneacetyl, chlorosulfonylacetyl, 3-methoxyphenylacetyl, phenoxyacetyl, tert-butylacetyl, trichloroacetyl, monochloro-acetyl, dichloroacetyl, 7H-dodecafluoro-heptanoyl, perfluoro-heptanoyl, 7H-dodeca-fluoroheptanoyl, 7-chlorododecafluoro-heptanoyl, 7-chloro-dodecafluoro-heptanoyl, 7H-dodecafluoroheptanoyl, 7H-dodeca-fluoroheptanoyl, nonafluoro-3,6-dioxa-heptanoyl, nonafluoro-3,6-dioxaheptanoyl, perfluoroheptanoyl, methoxybenzoyl, methyl 3-amino-5-phenylthiophene-2-carboxyl, 3,6-dichloro-2-methoxy-benzoyl, 4-(1,1,2,2-tetrafluoro-ethoxy)-benzoyl, 2-bromo-propionyl, omega-aminocapryl, decanoyl, n-pentadecanoyl, stearyl, 3-cyclopentyl-propionyl, 1-benzene-carboxyl, O-acetylmandelyl, pivaloyl acetyl, 1-adamantane-carboxyl, cyclohexane-carboxyl, 2,6-pyridinedicarboxyl, cyclopropane-carboxyl, cyclobutane-carboxyl, perfluorocyclohexyl carboxyl, 4-methylbenzoyl, chloromethyl isoxazolyl carbonyl, perfluorocyclohexyl carboxyl, crotonyl, 1-methyl-1H-indazole-3-carbonyl, 2-propenyl, isovaleryl, 1-pyrrolidinecarbonyl, 4-phenylbenzoyl.
  • The term “amino acid” includes naturally occurring and synthetic α, β γ or δ amino acids, and includes but is not limited to, amino acids found in proteins, i.e. glycine, alanine, valine, leucine, isoleucine, methionine, phenylalanine, tryptophan, proline, serine, threonine, cysteine, tyrosine, asparagine, glutamine, aspartate, glutamate, lysine, arginine and histidine. In a preferred embodiment, the amino acid is in the L-configuration. Alternatively, the amino acid can be a derivative of alanyl, valinyl, leucinyl, isoleuccinyl, prolinyl, phenylalaninyl, tryptophanyl, methioninyl, glycinyl, serinyl, threoninyl, cysteinyl, tyrosinyl, asparaginyl, glutaminyl, aspartoyl, glutaroyl, lysinyl, argininyl, histidinyl, β-alanyl, β-valinyl, β-leucinyl, β-isoleuccinyl, β-prolinyl, β-phenylalaninyl, β-tryptophanyl, β-methioninyl, β-glycinyl, β-serinyl, β-threoninyl, β-cysteinyl, β-tyrosinyl, β-asparaginyl, β-glutaminyl, β-aspartoyl, β-glutaroyl, β-lysinyl, β-argininyl or β-histidinyl.
  • As used herein, the term “substantially free of” or “substantially in the absence of” with respect to a nucleoside composition includes a nucleoside composition that includes at least 85 or 90% by weight, preferably 95%, 98%, 99% or 100% by weight, of the designated enantiomer of that nucleoside. In a preferred embodiment, in the methods and compounds of this invention, the compounds are substantially free of enantiomers.
  • Similarly, the term “isolated” with respect to a nucleoside composition includes a nucleoside composition that includes at least 85, 90%, 95%, 98%, 99% to 100% by weight, of the nucleoside, the remainder comprising other chemical species or enantiomers.
  • “Solvate” includes a compound provided herein or a salt thereof, that further includes a stoichiometric or non-stoichiometric amount of solvent bound by non-covalent intermolecular forces. Where the solvent is water, the solvate is a hydrate.
  • As used herein, the terms “subject” and “patient” are used interchangeably herein. The terms “subject” and “subjects” refer to an animal, such as a mammal including a non-primate (e.g., a cow, pig, horse, cat, dog, rat, and mouse) and a primate (e.g., a monkey such as a cynomolgous monkey, a chimpanzee and a human), and for example, a human. In one embodiment, the subject is refractory or non-responsive to current treatments for cancer. In another embodiment, the subject is a farm animal (e.g., a horse, a cow, a pig, etc.) or a pet (e.g., a dog or a cat). In one embodiment, the subject is a human.
  • As used herein, the terms “therapeutic agent” and “therapeutic agents” refer to any agent(s) which can be used in the treatment or prevention of a disorder or one or more symptoms thereof. In certain embodiments, the term “therapeutic agent” includes a compound provided herein. In one embodiment, a therapeutic agent is an agent which is known to be useful for, or has been or is currently being used for the treatment or prevention of a disorder or one or more symptoms thereof.
  • “Therapeutically effective amount” includes an amount of a compound or composition that, when administered to a subject for treating a disease, is sufficient to effect such treatment for the disease. A “therapeutically effective amount” can vary depending on, inter alia, the compound, the disease and its severity, and the age, weight, etc., of the subject to be treated.
  • “Treating” or “treatment” of any disease or disorder refers, in one embodiment, to ameliorating a disease or disorder that exists in a subject. In another embodiment, “treating” or “treatment” includes ameliorating at least one physical parameter, which may be indiscernible by the subject. In yet another embodiment, “treating” or “treatment” includes modulating the disease or disorder, either physically (e.g., stabilization of a discernible symptom) or physiologically (e.g., stabilization of a physical parameter) or both. In yet another embodiment, “treating” or “treatment” includes delaying the onset of the disease or disorder.
  • As used herein, the terms “prophylactic agent” and “prophylactic agents” as used refer to any agent(s) which can be used in the prevention of a disorder or one or more symptoms thereof. In certain embodiments, the term “prophylactic agent” includes a compound provided herein. In certain other embodiments, the term “prophylactic agent” does not refer a compound provided herein. For example, a prophylactic agent is an agent which is known to be useful for, or has been or is currently being used to the prevent or impede the onset, development, progression and/or severity of a disorder.
  • As used herein, the phrase “prophylactically effective amount” includes the amount of a therapy (e.g., prophylactic agent) which is sufficient to result in the prevention or reduction of the development, recurrence or onset of one or more symptoms associated with a disorder (, or to enhance or improve the prophylactic effect(s) of another therapy (e.g., another prophylactic agent).
  • 6.2 Exemplary Embodiments
  • 6.2.1 Compounds
  • Phosphoroamidate and phosphonoamidate compounds of a variety of therapeutic agents can be formed using methods available in the art and those disclosed herein. Such compounds can be used in some embodiments to enhance delivery of the drug to the liver. In one embodiment, the compound is an S-acyl-2-thioethyl phosphoroamidate or an S-acyl-2-thioethyl phosphonoamidate derivative, e.g., a S-pivaloyl-2-thioethyl phosphoroamidate or a S-hydroxypivaloyl-2-thioethyl phosphonoamidate. Therapeutic agents that can be derivatized to compound form include an anti-cancer agent that includes, or has been derivatized to include a reactive group for attachment of the phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate moiety, including but not limited to nucleosides and nucleoside analogues including acyclic nucleosides.
  • Phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compound forms of a variety of nucleosides can be formed from nucleosides disclosed herein and available in the art. In particular, anti-cancer nucleosides can be derivatized to form a phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compound that can enhance delivery to the liver.
  • In one embodiment, the phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compound provided herein is a compound of formula IIa or IIb:
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00011
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, a stereoisomeric, tautomeric or polymorphic form thereof, wherein;
  • Ry is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, amino, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl, all optionally substituted;
  • Ra and Rb are selected as follows:
  • i) Ra and Rb are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyarylalkyl, acyloxyalkyl, aminocarbonylalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl or heterocyclyl, all optionally substituted; or
  • ii) Ra and Rb together with the nitrogen atom on which they are substituted form a 3-7 membered heterocyclic or heteroaryl ring; and
  • R1 is a drug such as an anti-cancer drug.
  • In certain embodiments, the compound of formula IIa or IIb is selected with a proviso that when Ry is tert-butyl or hydroxy-tert-butyl, then R1 is not 3′-azido-2′,3′-dideoxythymidine.
  • In certain embodiments, R1, Ra, Rb and Ry are optionally substituted with one or more substituents as defined herein, e.g., in the definitions.
  • In certain embodiments, the compounds are of Formula IIa or IIb, wherein Ry is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, amino, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl;
  • Ra and Rb are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyarylalkyl, acyloxyalkyl, aminocarbonylalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl or heterocyclyl, all optionally substituted; and
  • R1 is an anti-cancer drug.
  • In one embodiment, R1 or R1—CH2— is a nucleoside comprising a cyclic or acyclic sugar or analog thereof, including any nucleoside or analogue thereof described herein or known in the art.
  • In certain embodiments of Formula IIa or IIb, Ry is substituted alkyl, e.g. hydroxyalkyl or aminoalkyl; and Ra and Rb are independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, benzyl or substituted benzyl, for instance hydroxy- or amino-substituted alkyl or benzyl. In another embodiment, Ry is —ORc, —C(Rc)3 or —NHRc where each Rc is independently alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl or substituted aryl, for instance hydroxy- or amino-substituted alkyl or aryl; and Ra and Rb are independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, benzyl or substituted benzyl, for instance hydroxy- or amino-substituted alkyl or benzyl. In a further embodiment, Ra and Rb are independently benzyl or substituted alkyl. In a further embodiment, Ry is selected from the group consisting of alkyl and hydroxyalkyl. In certain embodiments, Ry is —C(CH3)2CH2OH. In certain embodiments according to this paragraph, R2 and R3 are each hydrogen, Ra is hydrogen, Rb is —CH2—C6H5 and Ry is —C(CH3)2CH2OH.
  • In one embodiment, Ry is alkyl or hydroxyalkyl. In one embodiment, Ry is methyl, tert-butyl, hydroxy-tert-butyl or hydroxyethyl. In certain embodiments, Ry is —C(CH3)2CH2OH.
  • In one embodiment, Ra and Rb are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyarylalkyl, acyloxyalkyl, aminocarbonylalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, aryl or arylalkyl, wherein the alkyl groups can be further substituted with one or more substitutents. In one embodiment, at least one of Ra or Rb is other than hydrogen. In one embodiment, Ra and Rb are each independently hydrogen, methyl or benzyl.
  • In certain embodiments, Ry is —C(CH3)2CH2OH and Ra and Rb are each independently hydrogen, methyl or benzyl. In certain embodiments, Ry is —C(CH3)2CH2OH and Ra is hydrogen and Rb is benzyl.
  • In another embodiment, the compound provided herein is a compound of formula:
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00012
  • wherein R1 and Ry are as defined in formula IIa or IIb. In one embodiment, Ry is alkyl or hydroxyalkyl. In one embodiment, Ry is methyl, tert-butyl, hydroxy-tert-butyl or hydroxyethyl. In one embodiment, Ry is —C(CH3)2CH2OH.
  • In certain embodiments according to formula XVa or XVb, Ry is substituted alkyl, e.g. hydroxyalkyl or aminoalkyl. In another embodiment, Ry is —ORc, —C(Rc)3 or —NHRc where each Rc is independently alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl or substituted aryl, for instance hydroxy- or amino-substituted alkyl or aryl. In a further embodiment, Ry is selected from the group consisting of alkyl and hydroxyalkyl. In certain embodiments, Ry is —C(CH3)2CH2OH.
  • In another embodiment, the compound provided herein is a compound of formula:
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00013
  • Wherein:
  • R1 is an anti-cancer drug, such as a nucleoside or nucleoside derivative; and
  • Ra and Rb are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyarylalkyl, acyloxyalkyl, aminocarbonylalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl or heterocyclyl, all optionally substituted; and
  • wherein in one embodiment, one of Ra and Rb is H and the other is alkyl optionally substituted with aryl, benzyl, or heteroaryl, each optionally substituted.
  • In certain embodiments according to formula XVIa or XVIb, Ra and Rb are independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, benzyl or substituted benzyl, for instance hydroxy- or amino-substituted alkyl or benzyl. In another embodiment, Ra and Rb are independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, benzyl or substituted benzyl, for instance hydroxy- or amino-substituted alkyl or benzyl. In a further embodiment, Ra and Rb are independently benzyl or substituted alkyl.
  • In another embodiment, the compound provided herein is a compound of formula:
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00014
  • wherein R1 is a drug such as an anti-cancer drug.
  • Exemplary anti-cancer drugs (R1's) that can be derivatized as described herein, for example via a free hydroxyl group, or after adding a hydroxylated linker, are:
  • Name Structure
    Aclarubicin
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00015
    Decitabine
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00016
    Daunorubicin
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00017
    5-azacytidine
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00018
    Doxorubicin
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00019
    Epirubicin
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00020
    Estramustine
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00021
    Etoposide
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00022
    Fludarabine
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00023
    Neplanocin A
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00024
    Tezacitabine([(E)-2′-deoxy-2′-(fluoromethylene)cytidine(FMdC)])
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00025
    Troxacitabine((-)-2′-Deoxy-3′-oxacytidine)
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00026
    Vinblastin
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00027
    Vincristin
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00028
    Vindesin
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00029
    Teniposide
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00030
    NK-611
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00031
    Camptothecin
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00032
    Irinotecan
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00033
    9-Aminocamptothecin
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00034
    Topotecan
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00035
    Paclitaxel
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00036
    Azatoxin
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00037
    Coformycin
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00038
    Pirarubicin
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00039
    Nelarabine
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00040
    Losoxantrone
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00041
    Fluxoridine
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00042
    Mitomycin C
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00043
    Erlotinib (Tarceva ®)
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00044
    Thalidomide
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00045
  • Exemplary immunosupressant drugs that can be derivatized as described herein are:
  • Mitoxantrone
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00046
    CombretastatinA-4
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00047
    Mycophenolicacid
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00048
    Pentostatin
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00049
  • In certain embodiments, R1 is an anti-cancer drug such as aclarubicin, decitabine, daunorubicin, dihydro-5-azacytidine, doxorubicin, epirubicin, estramustin, etoposide, fludarabine, 7-hydroxychlorpromazin, neplanocin A, podophyllotoxin, tezacitabine, troxacitabine, vinblastin, vincristin, vindesin, etoposide, teniposide, NK-611, camptothecin, irinotecan, 9-aminocamptothecin, GG-211, topotecan, paclitaxel, azatoxin, coformycin, pirarubicin and losoxantrone. In a particular embodiment, the anti-cancer drug is camptothecin or azotoxin.
  • In another embodiment, R1 is a purine nucleoside analog (see, e.g., Robak et al., Curr. Med. Chem. 2006, 13, 3165-3189). R1 is, for example, a cytotoxic agent such as fludarabine (9-β-D-arabinofuranosyl-2-fluoradenine), cladribine (2-chloro-2′-deoxyadenosine, CldA), pentostatin (2′-deoxycoformycin, DCF), clofarabine (CAFdA), nelabarine, immucillin H (BCX-1777, forodesine) or 8-chloroadenosine (8-Cl-Ado).
  • The anti-cancer drug also can be (2′S)-2′-deoxy-2′-C-methylcytidine (SMDC), 1-(2-deoxy-2-methylene-β-D-erythro-pentofuranosyl)cytosine (DMDC), 1-(2-C-cyano-2-deoxy-1-β-D-arabino-pentofuranosyl)cytosine (CNDAC) or 1-(3-C-ethynyl-β-D-ribo-pentofuranosyl)cytosine (ECyd). See, e.g., Matsuda et al., Cancer Sci, 2004, 95:105-111.
  • In one embodiment, R1 is an immunosuppressant, such as combretastatin A-4, mycophenolic acid, pentostatin or mitoxantrone.
  • The anti-cancer drug can be derivatized to include the phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate at, e.g., a free OH or free carboxy group.
  • In another embodiment, R1 is (−)-2′-Deoxy-3′-oxacytidine (BCH-4556, Troxacitabine):
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00050
  • In another embodiment, R1 is tezacitabine (2′-fluoromethylene-2′-deoxycytidine). In another embodiment, R1 is a 5′-aza-pyrimidine, such as 5′-aza-cytidine, 5′-azadeoxycytidine (decytabine), or fazarabine.
  • In certain embodiments, R1 is a 2′-deoxy-2′-methylidenepyrimidine nucleoside compound, disclosed, e.g. in U.S. Pat. No. 5,401,726, such as 2′-deoxy-2′-methylidene-5-fluorocytidine, 2′-deoxy-2′-methylidene-5-chlorocytidine, 2′-deoxy-2′-methylidene-5-bromocytidine, 2′-deoxy-2′-methylidene-5-iodocytidine, 2′-deoxy-2′-methylidene-5-methylcytidine, 2′-deoxy-2′-methylidene-5-ethylcytidine, 2′-deoxy-2′-methylidene-5-ethyluridine, 2′-deoxy-2′-methylidene-5-ethynyluridine or 2′-deoxy-2′-methylidene-5-fluorocytidine-5′-phosphoric acid. In one embodiment, R1 is 5-fluorouracil.
  • R1 also can be a pyrido[2,3-D]pyrimidine or pyrimido[4,5-D]pyrimidine nucleoside as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,081,449, such as 4-amino-5-oxo-8-(4-C-hydroxymethyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)pyrido-[2,3d]pyrimidine; 4-amino-5-oxo-8-(5(R)—C-methyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)pyrido[2,3-d]pyrimidine; 4-amino-5-oxo-8-(5(R)—C-allyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)pyrido[2,3-d]pyrimidine; 4-amino-5-oxo-8-(5(R,S)—C-ethynyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)pyrido[2,3-d]pyrimidine; 4-Amino-5-oxo-8-(5(R,S)—C-vinyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)pyrido[2,3-d]pyrimidine; 4-Amino-5-oxo-8-(β-D-ribofuranosyl)pyrido[2,3-d]pyrimidine; 4-amino-5-oxo-8-(β-L-ribofuranosyl)pyrido[2,3-d]pyrimidine; 4-amino-5-oxo-8-(4-C-methyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)pyrido[2,3-d]pyrimidine; 4-amino-5-oxo-8-(4-C-ethyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)pyrido[2,3-d]pyrimidine; 4-amino-5-oxo-8-(5(R,S)—C-ethyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)pyrido-[2,3d]pyrimidine; 4-amino-5-oxo-8-(5(R)—C-propyl-β-D-ribofuranosyl)pyrido[2,3-d]pyrimidine; or 4-amino-5-oxo-8-(2-deoxy-β-D-ribofuranosyl)pyrido[2,3-d]pyrimidine. In a particular embodiment, R1 is 4-amino-5-oxo-8-(β-D-ribofuranosyl)pyrido[2,3-d]pyrimidine.
  • Other anti-cancer drugs include: dichloroacetal, Nexavar (sorafenib), cimetidine, adriamycin, Cytoxan (cyclophosphamide), methotrexate, vincristine, and 6-mercaptopurine.
  • In another embodiment, the anti-cancer drug is selected from 2′,3-dideoxyinosine (ddl), or 2,3-didehydro-3-deoxythymidine (d4T). See, e.g., WO/2006/125166.
  • In one embodiment, R1 is an anti-inflammatory drug, such as a corticosteroid or a non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAID) that can be derivatized to include the phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate at, e.g., a free OH or free carboxy group.
  • Exemplary corticosteroid drugs suitable for use herein are provided below:
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00051
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00052
  • Exemplary NSAID drugs suitable for use herein are provided below:
  • Sodium salicylate Salicylsalicylic acid
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00053
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00054
  • In certain embodiments of the compounds of Formula IIa below:
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00055
  • the moiety:
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00056
  • is derived from a drug that is an acyclic nucleoside phosphonate, i.e.:
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00057
  • Thus, compounds of Formula IIa, in one embodiment, are phosphonoamidates of an acyclic nucleoside phosphonate that have potential anti-cancer activity, such as (S)-9-[3-hydroxy-2-(phosphonomethoxy)-propyl]cytosine (HPMPC, cidofovir), (S)-9-{3-hydroxy-2-(phosphonomethoxy)-propyl]adenine ((S)-HPMPA), phosphonomethoxyethylguanine (PMEG), phosphonomethoxyethyl-adenine (PMEA, adefovir), phosphonomethoxy-propyladenine (PMPA, tenofovir), acyclovir, ganciclovir or penciclovir. See e.g., WO/2006/125166 and De Clercq et al., Antiviral Research, Volume 75, Issue 1, July 2007, Pages 1-13.
  • Embodiments for Delivery of Thyroid Hormone Receptor Effectors
  • In certain embodiments, the following phosphoroamidate and phosphonoamidate formulas and compounds are provided, which optionally act as thyroid hormone receptor effectors:
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00058
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00059
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00060
  • wherein
  • each R, if present, is independently alkyl, halogen or hydroxyl;
  • X, if present, is CH2, O or S;
  • Ry is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, amino, aminoalkyl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl, all optionally substituted;
  • Ra and Rb are selected as follows:
  • i) Ra and Rb are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyarylalkyl, acyloxyalkyl, aminocarbonylalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, aryl, aryl alkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl or heterocyclyl, all optionally substituted; or
  • ii) Ra and Rb together with the nitrogen atom on which they are substituted form a 3-7 membered heterocyclic or heteroaryl ring.
  • In certain embodiments, the compound provided herein has formula selected from IIIa, IIIb, IVa, IVb, Va, Vb, VIa, VIb, VIIa, VIIb, VIIIa or VIIIb, wherein
  • each R, if present, is independently alkyl, halogen or hydroxyl;
  • X, if present, is CH2, O or S;
  • Ry, if present, is optionally substituted alkyl, wherein the substituted alkyl is optionally hydroxyalkyl or aminoalkyl, e.g., —C(CH3)2CH2OH; and
  • Ra and Rb, if present, are independently hydrogen; unsubstituted alkyl; or alkyl substituted with aryl, amino, amido, hydroxyl, alkoxy, aminoalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each optionally substituted; wherein, in one embodiment, Ra and Rb are independently H or a benzyl that is optionally substituted, for example, with hydroxy or amino; and
      • wherein, in another embodiment, if present, Ra is hydrogen, Rb is —CH2—C6H5 and Ry is —C(CH3)2CH2OH.
  • In certain embodiments, the compound provided herein has a formula selected from:
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00061
  • wherein
  • Rx and Rz are each independently hydrogen or alkyl;
  • Rw is alkyl;
  • X1 is O or S;
  • Ry is optionally substituted alkyl, wherein the substituents when present are selected from hydroxy and amino;
  • Ra and Rb are each independently hydrogen or optionally substituted alkyl; where the substituents when present are selected from one or more, in one embodiment, one, two or three groups selected from aryl, amino, amido, hydroxyl, alkoxy, aryl and heteroaryl, each optionally substituted with hydroxy or amino.
  • In certain embodiments, the compound provided herein is selected from:
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00062
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00063
  • In certain embodiments, Rx and Rz are each hydrogen. In certain embodiments, Rw is alkyl. In certain embodiments, Rw is isopropyl. In certain embodiments, Ry is optionally substituted alkyl, wherein the substituents when present are selected from hydroxy and amino. In certain embodiments, Ry is —C(CH3)2CH2OH. In certain embodiments, Ra and Rb are each independently hydrogen or optionally substituted alkyl; where the substituents when present are selected from one or more, in one embodiment, one, two or three groups selected from aryl, amino, amido, hydroxyl, alkoxy, aryl and heteroaryl, each optionally substituted with hydroxy or amino. In certain embodiments, Ra is hydrogen and Rb is benzyl.
  • In certain embodiments, Ra is hydrogen, Rb is —CH2—C6H5 and Ry is —C(CH3)2CH2OH.
  • In one embodiment, the thyroid receptor effector compound has formula:
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00064
  • In certain embodiments, the compound or Formula selected from IIIa or b, IVa or b, Va or b, VIa or b, VIIa or b, VIII a or b is derived from a phosphonate compound useful for inhibiting gluconeogenesis, optionally by inhibiting the enzyme fructose 1,6-bisphosphatase (FBPase).
  • In certain embodiments, the compound or Formula selected from IXa or b, X a or b, XIa or b, XIIa or b, XIIIa or b, XIVa or b and XVIIIa or b is derived from a compound useful for inhibiting gluconeogenesis, optionally by inhibiting the enzyme fructose 1,6-bisphosphatase (FBPase).
  • In certain embodiments, the compound or Formula selected from IIIa or b, IVa or b, Va or b, VIa or b, VIIa or b, VIII a or b is a phosphonic acid-containing compound that binds to a thyroid receptor in the liver, and is optionally an agonist, antagonist, partial agonist or partial antagonist of T3. Inhibition of gluconeogenesis can result in blood glucose lowering in diabetic subjects. Such compounds can exhibit enhanced pharmacokinetics including oral bioavailability and liver drug levels.
  • In certain embodiments, provided is a method of treatment of a subject in need thereof, the method comprising administering to the subject a phosphoroamidate and phosphonoamidate compound or formula selected from IIIa or b, IVa or b, Va or b, VIa or b, VIIa or b, VIII a or b, IXa or b, X a or b, XIa or b, XIIa or b, XIIIa or b, XIVa or b and XVIIIa or b or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, enantiomer, ester or prodrug thereof thereof, in an amount effective for one or more of the following:
  • reducing plasma lipid levels, lowering cholesterol levels, reducing triglyceride levels, or increasing the ratio of HDL to LDL;
  • lowering blood glucose levels;
  • treating hyperlipidemia or hypercholesterolemia;
  • treating obesity, reducing fat content, treating fatty liver, reducing weight or preventing weight gain;
  • treating atherosclerosis, coronary heart disease, heart failure, nephrotic syndrome, or chronic renal failure;
  • lowering blood glucose levels, treating diabetes, impaired glucose tolerance, metabolic syndrome x, insulin resistance or hyperinsulinemia;
  • increasing levels of genes associated with gluconeogenesis;
  • decreasing hepatic glycogen levels or maintaining or improving glycemic control;
  • amelioration of hyperinsulinemia and/or decrease of glucose levels in diabetic subjects at doses that optionally do not affect cardiac function, e.g., heart rate, force of systolic contraction, duration of diastolic relaxation, vascular tone, or heart weight;
  • treating thyroid disease, thyroid cancer, depression, glaucoma, cardiac arrhythmias, heart failure, or osteoporosis;
  • increasing mitochondrial biogenesis, or increasing expression of PGC-1, AMP activated protein kinase or nuclear respiratory factor;
  • inhibiting hepatic gluconeogenesis; or
  • modulating expression of certain genes in the liver resulting in effects on lipids (e.g., cholesterol), glucose, lipoproteins, and triglycerides, or modulation of T3-responsive genes.
  • In certain embodiments, the compounds do not affect thyroid function, thyroid production of circulating iodinated thyronines such as T3 and T4, and/or the ratio of T3 to T4.
  • In certain embodiments, provided herein is a method for treatment of liver fibrosis or inflammation by administering a compound provided herein.
  • Also provided are pharmaceutical compositions comprising the compounds, e.g., in a dosage unit suitable for administration, e.g., oral administration.
  • Optically Active Compounds
  • It is appreciated that compounds provided herein have several chiral centers and may exist in and be isolated in optically active and racemic forms. Some compounds may exhibit polymorphism. It is to be understood that any racemic, optically-active, diastereomeric, polymorphic, or stereoisomeric form, or mixtures thereof, of a compound provided herein, which possess the useful properties described herein is within the scope of the invention. Techniques known in the art can be used to prepare optically active forms (for example, by resolution of the racemic form by recrystallization techniques, by synthesis from optically-active starting materials, by chiral synthesis, or by chromatographic separation using a chiral stationary phase).
  • Examples of methods to obtain optically active materials are known in the art, and include at least the following.
      • i) physical separation of crystals—a technique whereby macroscopic crystals of the individual enantiomers are manually separated. This technique can be used if crystals of the separate enantiomers exist, i.e., the material is a conglomerate, and the crystals are visually distinct;
      • ii) simultaneous crystallization—a technique whereby the individual enantiomers are separately crystallized from a solution of the racemate, possible only if the latter is a conglomerate in the solid state;
      • iii) enzymatic resolutions—a technique whereby partial or complete separation of a racemate by virtue of differing rates of reaction for the enantiomers with an enzyme;
      • iv) enzymatic asymmetric synthesis—a synthetic technique whereby at least one step of the synthesis uses an enzymatic reaction to obtain an enantiomerically pure or enriched synthetic precursor of the desired enantiomer;
      • v) chemical asymmetric synthesis—a synthetic technique whereby the desired enantiomer is synthesized from an achiral precursor under conditions that produce asymmetry (i.e., chirality) in the product, which may be achieved using chiral catalysts or chiral auxiliaries;
      • vi) diastereomer separations—a technique whereby a racemic compound is reacted with an enantiomerically pure reagent (the chiral auxiliary) that converts the individual enantiomers to diastereomers. The resulting diastereomers are then separated by chromatography or crystallization by virtue of their now more distinct structural differences and the chiral auxiliary later removed to obtain the desired enantiomer;
      • vii) first- and second-order asymmetric transformations—a technique whereby diastereomers from the racemate equilibrate to yield a preponderance in solution of the diastereomer from the desired enantiomer or where preferential crystallization of the diastereomer from the desired enantiomer perturbs the equilibrium such that eventually in principle all the material is converted to the crystalline diastereomer from the desired enantiomer. The desired enantiomer is then released from the diastereomer;
      • viii) kinetic resolutions—this technique refers to the achievement of partial or complete resolution of a racemate (or of a further resolution of a partially resolved compound) by virtue of unequal reaction rates of the enantiomers with a chiral, non-racemic reagent or catalyst under kinetic conditions;
      • ix) enantiospecific synthesis from non-racemic precursors—a synthetic technique whereby the desired enantiomer is obtained from non-chiral starting materials and where the stereochemical integrity is not or is only minimally compromised over the course of the synthesis;
      • x) chiral liquid chromatography—a technique whereby the enantiomers of a racemate are separated in a liquid mobile phase by virtue of their differing interactions with a stationary phase. The stationary phase can be made of chiral material or the mobile phase can contain an additional chiral material to provoke the differing interactions;
      • xi) chiral gas chromatography—a technique whereby the racemate is volatilized and enantiomers are separated by virtue of their differing interactions in the gaseous mobile phase with a column containing a fixed non-racemic chiral adsorbent phase;
      • xii) extraction with chiral solvents—a technique whereby the enantiomers are separated by virtue of preferential dissolution of one enantiomer into a particular chiral solvent;
      • xiii) transport across chiral membranes—a technique whereby a racemate is placed in contact with a thin membrane barrier. The barrier typically separates two miscible fluids, one containing the racemate, and a driving force such as concentration or pressure differential causes preferential transport across the membrane barrier. Separation occurs as a result of the non-racemic chiral nature of the membrane which allows only one enantiomer of the racemate to pass through.
    Preparation of Compounds
  • The compounds provided herein can be prepared, isolated or obtained by any method apparent to those of skill in the art. Exemplary methods of preparation are described in detail in the examples below.
  • In certain embodiments, compounds provided herein can be prepared by coupling alcohols and H-phosphonate monoesters as illustrated in the reaction scheme below:
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00065
  • wherein R7, R8, R9, R10 are each independently hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl or alkoxy. Any reactive function on Ry, R7, R8, R9, R10 or on the base should be protected during the coupling reaction. Any coupling agent known to one of skill in the art can be used. Exemplary coupling agents for use in the reaction include, but are not limited to HOBt (N-Hydroxybenzotriazole), HBTU (2-(1H-Benzotriazole-1-yl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethylaminium hexafluorophosphate), DCC (N,N′-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide), BOP (Benzotriazole-1-yl-oxy-tris-(dimethylamino)-phosphoniumhexafluorophosphate), PyBOP (1H-benzotriazol-1-yloxytripyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate) and others known to one of skill in the art.
  • A general scheme for the synthesis of hydroxytBuSATE N-benzylphosphoramidate nucleoside derivatives represented by B is provided in Schemes B1-B3 below, in which modifications of nucleosides are made by way of example, but the methodology may be used for other active agents as well.
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00066
  • where R=H, Tr, MMTr or DMTr in case of reactive amine; R1, R2, R4, R6=H, alkyl or halo and R3/R5 are both H or isopropylidene.
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00067
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00068
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00069
  • In addition, certain nucleosides and analogs thereof and prodrugs thereof can be prepared according to methods known to one of skill in the art. Exemplary nucleosides and analogs are described in International Publication No. WO 06/125166, contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties.
  • The compounds of formula IIIa or b, IVa or b, Va or b, VIa or b, VIIa or b and VIII a or b can be prepared by methods described herein and methods known to one of skill in the art, for example, see, Erion et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 2007, 104, 15490-15495.
  • The compounds of formula IXa or b, X a or b, XIa or b, XIIa or b, XIIIa or b, XIVa or b and XVIIIa or b can be prepared by methods described herein and methods known to one of skill in the art, for example, see, Dang et al., Discovery of Potent and Specific Fructose-1,6-Bisphosphatase Inhibitors and a Series of orally-Bioavailable Phosphoramidase-Sensitive Prodrugs for the Treatment of Type 2 Diabetes, J. Am. Chem. Soc., 2007, Vol. 129, No. 50, pp. 15491-502.
  • Assay Methods
  • Compounds can be assayed for accumulation in liver cells of a subject according to any assay known to those of skill in the art. In certain embodiments, a compound can be administered to the subject, and a liver cell of the subject can be assayed for the compound or a derivative thereof.
  • In one embodiment, a phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate nucleoside compound is administered to cells, such as liver cells, in vivo or in vitro, and the levels delivered intracellularly are measured, to indicate delivery of the compound in the cell.
  • Assays for other activities, including anti-cancer activity can be done as described in the art. Suitable in vitro assays can be used to preliminarily evaluate the efficacy of a compound in inhibiting growth of cancer cells. The compound can further be examined for its efficacy in treating cancer by in vivo assays known to those of skill in the art. For example, it can be administered to an animal (e.g., a mouse model) having cancer and its therapeutic effect can then assessed. Based on the results, an appropriate dosage range and administration route can also be determined. Exemplary assays are described in the paragraphs below.
  • Anti-Cancer Activity
  • Compounds provided herein can be shown to inhibit tumor cell proliferation, cell transformation and tumorigenesis in vitro and in vivo using a variety of assays known in the art, or described herein. Such assays can use cells of a cancer cell line, or cells from a patient. Many assays well-known in the art can be used to assess such survival and/or growth; for example, cell proliferation can be assayed by measuring (3H)-thymidine incorporation, by direct cell count, by detecting changes in transcription, translation or activity of known genes such as proto-oncogenes (e.g., fos, myc) or cell cycle markers (Rb, cdc2, cyclin A, D1, D2, D3, E, etc.). The levels of such protein and mRNA and activity can be determined by any method well known in the art. For example, protein can be quantitated by known immunodiagnostic methods such as Western blotting or immunoprecipitation using commercially available antibodies (for example, many cell cycle marker antibodies are available from Santa Cruz Biotechnology, Inc., Santa Cruz, Calif.). mRNA can be quantitated by methods that are well known and routine in the art, for example, by Northern analysis, RNase protection, and the polymerase chain reaction in connection with the reverse transcription. Cell viability can be assessed by using trypan-blue staining or other cell death or viability markers known in the art. Differentiation can be assessed, for example, visually based on changes in morphology, etc.
  • Cell proliferation analysis can be performed using a variety of techniques known in the art, including but not limited to the following:
  • As one example, bromodeoxyuridine (BRDU) incorporation may be used as an assay to identify proliferating cells. The BRDU assay identifies a cell population undergoing DNA synthesis by incorporation of BRDU into newly synthesized DNA. Newly synthesized DNA can then be detected using an anti-BRDU antibody (see Hoshino et al., 1986, Int. J. Cancer 38, 369; Campana et al., 1988, J. Immunol. Meth. 107, 79).
  • Cell proliferation can also be examined using (3H)-thymidine incorporation (see e.g., Chen, J., 1996, Oncogene 13:1395-403; Jeoung, J., 1995, J. Biol. Chem. 270:18367-73). This assay allows for quantitative characterization of S-phase DNA synthesis. In this assay, cells synthesizing DNA incorporate (3H)-thymidine into newly synthesized DNA. Incorporation can then be measured using standard techniques in the art such as by counting of radioisotope in a Scintillation counter (e.g. Beckman LS 3800 Liquid Scintillation Counter).
  • Detection of proliferating cell nuclear antigen (PCNA) can also be used to measure cell proliferation. PCNA is a 36 kilodalton protein whose expression is elevated in proliferating cells, particularly in early G1 and S phases of the cell cycle and therefore can serve as a marker for proliferating cells. Positive cells are identified by immunostaining using an anti-PCNA antibody (see Li et al., 1996, Curr. Biol. 6:189-199; Vassilev et al., 1995, J. Cell Sci. 108:1205-15).
  • Cell proliferation can be measured by counting samples of a cell population over time (e.g. daily cell counts). Cells may be counted using a hemacytometer and light microscopy (e.g. HyLite hemacytometer, Hausser Scientific). Cell number may be plotted against time in order to obtain a growth curve for the population of interest. In a preferred embodiment, cells counted by this method are first mixed with the dye Trypan-blue, such that living cells exclude the dye, and are counted as viable members of the population.
  • DNA content and/or mitotic index of the cells can be measured, for example, based on the DNA ploidy value of the cell. For example, cells in the GI phase of the cell cycle generally contain a 2N DNA ploidy value. Cells in which DNA has been replicated but have not progressed through mitosis (e.g. cells in S-phase) exhibit a ploidy value higher than 2N and up to 4N DNA content. Ploidy value and cell-cycle kinetics can be further measured using propidum iodide assay (see e.g. Turner, T., et al., 1998, Prostate 34:175-81). Alternatively, the DNA ploidy can be determined by quantitation of DNA Feulgen staining (which binds to DNA in a stoichiometric manner) on a computerized microdensitometrystaining system (see e.g., Bacus, S., 1989, Am. J. Pathol. 135:783-92). In an another embodiment, DNA content can be analyzed by preparation of a chromosomal spread (Zabalou, S., 1994, Hereditas. 120:127-40; Pardue, 1994, Meth. Cell Biol. 44:333-351).
  • The expression of cell-cycle proteins (e.g., CycA, CycB, CycE, CycD, cdc2, Cdk4/6, Rb, p21, p27, etc.) provide information relating to the proliferative state of a cell or population of cells. For example, identification in an anti-proliferation signaling pathway can be indicated by the induction of p21. Increased levels of p21 expression in cells results in delayed entry into G1 of the cell cycle (Harper et al., 1993, Cell 75:805-816; Li et al., 1996, Curr. Biol. 6:189-199). p21 induction can be identified by immunostaining using a specific anti-p21 antibody available commercially (e.g. Santa Cruz Biotechnology, Inc., Santa Cruz, Calif.). Similarly, cell-cycle proteins may be examined by Western blot analysis using commercially available antibodies. In another embodiment, cell populations are synchronized prior to detection of a cell cycle protein. Cell cycle proteins can also be detected by FACS (fluorescence-activated cell sorter) analysis using antibodies against the protein of interest.
  • Detection of changes in length of the cell cycle or speed of cell cycle can also be used to measure inhibition of cell proliferation by the compounds provided herein. In one embodiment the length of the cell cycle is determined by the doubling time of a population of cells (e.g., using cells contacted or not contacted with one or more compounds identified using the pharmacophores of the present invention). In another embodiment, FACS analysis is used to analyze the phase of cell cycle progression, or purify G1, S, and G2/M fractions (see e.g., Delia, D. et al., 1997, Oncogene 14:2137-47).
  • The compounds useful in the methods of the present invention can also be demonstrated to inhibit cell transformation (or progression to malignant phenotype) in vitro. In this embodiment, cells with a transformed cell phenotype are contacted with one or more compounds of the present invention, and examined for change in characteristics associated with a transformed phenotype (a set of in vitro characteristics associated with a tumorigenic ability in vivo), for example, but not limited to, colony formation in soft agar, a more rounded cell morphology, looser substratum attachment, loss of contact inhibition, loss of anchorage dependence, release of proteases such as plasminogen activator, increased sugar transport, decreased serum requirement, or expression of fetal antigens, etc. (see Luria et al., 1978, General Virology, 3d Ed., John Wiley & Sons, New York, pp. 436-446).
  • Loss of invasiveness or decreased adhesion may also be used to demonstrate the anti-cancer effects of the compounds useful in the methods of the present invention. For example, a critical aspect of the formation of a metastatic cancer is the ability of a precancerous or cancerous cell to detach from primary site of disease and establish a novel colony of growth at a secondary site. The ability of a cell to invade peripheral sites is reflective of a potential for a cancerous state. Loss of invasiveness may be measured by a variety of techniques known in the art including, for example, induction of E-cadherin-mediated cell-cell adhesion. Such E-cadherin-mediated adhesion can result in phenotypic reversion and loss of invasiveness (Hordijk et al., 1997, Science 278:1464-66).
  • Loss of invasiveness may further be examined by inhibition of cell migration. A variety of 2-dimensional and 3-dimensional cellular matrices are commercially available (Calbiochem-Novabiochem Corp. San Diego, Calif.). Cell migration across or into a matrix may be examined by microscopy, time-lapsed photography or videography, or by any method in the art allowing measurement of cellular migration. In a related embodiment, loss of invasiveness is examined by response to hepatocyte growth factor (HGF). HGF-induced cell scattering is correlated with invasiveness of cells such as Madin-Darby canine kidney (MDCK) cells. This assay identifies a cell population that has lost cell scattering activity in response to HGF (Hordijk et al., 1997, Science 278:1464-66).
  • Alternatively, loss of invasiveness may be measured by cell migration through a chemotaxis chamber (Neuroprobe/Precision Biochemicals Inc., Vancouver, BC). In such assay, a chemo-attractant agent is incubated on one side of the chamber (e.g., the bottom chamber) and cells are plated on a filter separating the opposite side (e.g., the top chamber). In order for cells to pass from the top chamber to the bottom chamber, the cells must actively migrate through small pores in the filter. Checkerboard analysis of the number of cells that have migrated may then be correlated with invasiveness (see e.g., Ohnishi, T., 1993, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 193:518-25).
  • The compounds provided herein can also be demonstrated to inhibit tumor formation in vivo. A number of animal models of hyperproliferative disorders, including tumorigenesis and metastatic spread, are known in the art (see Table 317-1, Chapter 317, “Principals of Neoplasia,” in Harrison's Principals of Internal Medicine, 13th Edition, Isselbacher et al., eds., McGraw-Hill, New York, p. 1814, and Lovejoy et al., 1997, J. Pathol. 181:130-135).
  • For example, a compound provided herein can be administered to a test animal, preferably a test animal predisposed to develop a type of tumor, and the test animal subsequently examined for decreased incidence of tumor formation in comparison with controls not administered the compound identified using the pharmacophores of the present invention. Alternatively, a compound useful in the methods of the present invention can be administered to test animals having tumors (e.g., animals in which tumors have been induced by introduction of malignant, neoplastic, or transformed cells, or by administration of a carcinogen) and subsequently examining the tumors in the test animals for tumor regression in comparison to controls that were not administered the compound.
  • Thyroid Receptor Binding Activity
  • Thyroid receptor binding activity that can serve as a mechanism for treatment of diseases sensitive thereto can be tested using assays available in the art. Thyroid hormones (TH) are synthesized in the thyroid in response to thyroid stimulating hormone (TSH), which is secreted by the pituitary gland in response to various stimulants. Thyroid hormones are iodinated O-aryl tyrosine analogues excreted into the circulation primarily as 3,3′,5,5′-tetraiodothyronine (T4). T4 is rapidly deiodinated in local tissues by thyroxine 5′-deiodinase to 3,3′,5′-triiodothyronine (T3), which is the most potent TH. Most of the circulating T4 and T3 is eliminated through the liver.
  • THs have profound physiological effects in animals and humans. Hyper-thyroidism is associated with increased body temperature, general nervousness, weight loss despite increased appetite, muscle weakness and fatigue, increased bone resorption and enhanced calcification, and a variety of cardiovascular changes, including increased heart rate, increased stroke volume, increased cardiac index, cardiac hypertrophy, decreased peripheral vascular resistance, and increased pulse pressure. Hypothyroidism is generally associated with the opposite effects.
  • The biological activity of THs is mediated largely through thyroid hormone receptors (TRs). TRs belong to the nuclear receptor superfamily, which, along with its common partner, the retinoid X receptor, form heterodimers that act as ligand-inducible transcription factors.
  • The most widely recognized effects of THs are an increase in metabolic rate, oxygen consumption and heat production. T3 treatment increases oxygen consumption in isolated perfused liver and isolated hepatocytes. (Oh et al., J. Nutr. 125(1):112-24 (1995); Oh et al., Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 207(3): 260-7 (1994))
  • THs also stimulate metabolism of cholesterol to bile acids. Hyperthyroidism leads to decreased plasma cholesterol levels, which is likely due to increased hepatic LDL receptor expression. Hypothyroidism is a well-established cause of hypercholesterolemia and elevated serum LDL. L-T3 is known to lower plasma cholesterol levels. In addition, THs are known to affect levels of other lipoproteins linked to atherosclerosis. THs stimulate apo AI and the secretion of apo AI in HDL while reducing apo B100. Accordingly, one would expect T3 and T3 mimetics to inhibit the atherosclerotic process in the cholesterol fed animal.
  • THs simultaneously increase de novo fatty acid synthesis and oxidation through effects on enzymes such as ACC, FAS, and spot-14. THs increase circulating free fatty acids (FFA) levels in part by increasing production of FFAs from adipose tissue via TH-induced lipolysis. In addition, THs increase mitochondrial enzyme levels involved in FFA oxidation, e.g., carnitine palmitoyltransferase 1 (CPT-1) and enzymes involved in energy storage and consumption.
  • The liver represents a major target organ of THs. Microarray analysis of hepatic gene expression from livers of hypothyroid mice and mice treated with T3 showed changes in mRNA levels for 55 genes (14 positively regulated and 41 negatively regulated) (Feng et al., Mol. Endocrinol. 14(7): 947-55 (2000). Others have estimated that approximately 8% of the hepatic genes are regulated by T3. Many of these genes are important to both fatty acid and cholesterol synthesis and metabolism. T3 is also known to have other effects in liver, including effects on carbohydrates through increased glycogenolysis and gluconeogenesis and decreased insulin action.
  • TH has been used as an antiobesity drug for over 50 years. In the 1940s TH was used alone, whereas in the 1950s it was used in combination with diuretics and in the 1960s in combination with amphetamines. Treating hypothyroidism patients with T3 leads to a decrease in body weight for most patients. T3 and T3 mimetics are thought to inhibit atherosclerosis by modulating the levels of certain lipoproteins known to be independent risk factors or potential risk factors of atherosclerosis, including low density lipoprotein (LDL)-cholesterol, high density lipoprotein (HDL)-cholesterol, apoAI, which is a major apoprotein constituent of high density lipoprotein (HDL) particles and lipoprotein (a) or Lp(a).
  • Hyperthyroidism worsens glycemic control in type 2 diabetics. TH therapy is reported to stimulate hepatic gluconeogenesis. Enzymes specific to gluconeogenesis and important for controlling the pathway and its physiological role of producing glucose are known to be influenced by TH therapy. Phosphoenolpyruvate carboxykinase (PEPCK) is upregulated by TH (Park et al, J. Biol. Chem. 274:211 (1999)) whereas others have found that glucose 6-phosphatase is upregulated (Feng et al., Mol. Endocrinol. 14:947 (2000)). TH therapy is also associated with reduced glycogen levels. TH therapy results in improved non insulin stimulated and insulin stimulated glucose utilization and decreased insulin resistance in the muscle of ob/ob mice. (Oh et al., J. Nutr. 125:125 (1995)).
  • Thus, thyromimetics potentially can be used to modulate cholesterol levels, to treat obesity, and other metabolic disorders especially with reduced undesirable effects.
  • Studies can be used to determine the affinity of T3 and various thyromimetics for human thyroid hormone receptors TRα1 and TRβ1, and their resulting efficacy in related disorders. Binding of compounds to either the TRα1 or TRβ1 receptors can be performed by means of scintillation proximity assays (SPA). The SPA assay, a common method used for the quantitation of receptor-ligand equilibria, makes use of special beads coated with a scintillant and a capture molecule, copper, which binds to the histidine-tagged α or β receptor. When labeled T3 is mixed with receptor and the SPA beads, radioactive counts are observed only when the complex of protein and radiolabeled ligand is captured on the surface of the bead. Displacement curves are generated with labeled T3 and increasing concentrations of unlabeled thyromimetics of interest. Subacute studies can be used in ZDF Rats (Charles River Laboratory) to demonstrate an improved therapeutic index for T3 Mimetics.
  • Subacute studies also can be conducted in cholesterol-fed rats. The cholesterol-fed rat is an animal model of hypercholesterolemia generated by feeding the animals a diet with high cholesterol content. The purpose of these studies is to evaluate the effects of compounds on serum cholesterol (an efficacy parameter) and on heart weight and heart mGPDH activity (potential toxicity parameters). Compounds can be administered, e.g., IP, e.g., once-a-day for seven days.
  • Microsome/primary hepatocyte stability studies can be conducted using methods available in the art. Prodrug activation in rat liver microsomes can be conducted to determine the kinetics of activation of prodrugs of thyromimetics in microsomal preparations. Microsomes may contain P450 enzyme that may activate a prodrug. The Km, Vmax, and intrinsic clearance values determined are measures of prodrug affinity for the microsomal enzymes, the rate at which the prodrug is activated, and the catalytic efficiency with which the prodrug is activated, respectively. Prodrugs also can be tested for conversion to their respective parent compounds by human liver S9. The S9 fraction is a fraction that contains both cytosolic and microsomal protein. Uptake and activation of prodrug in isolated rat hepatocytes also can be conducted using methods known in the art. Oral bioavailability and liver distribution following oral administration also can be measured using methods available in the art.
  • Oxygen consumption studies can be conducted. Thermogenesis is a measurement of energy consumption. Compounds that increase thermogenesis are likely to increase caloric expenditure and thereby cause body weight loss and its associated benefits to metabolic status (e.g., insulin sensitivity). Thermogenesis is assessed in subcellular fractions of various tissues, isolated cells, whole tissues, or in whole animals using changes in oxygen consumption as the endpoint. Oxygen is used up when calories are burned by various metabolic processes.
  • Mitochondrial thermogenesis is measured polarographically with a Clark-type oxygen electrode using mitochondria isolated from various tissues, including liver. Mitochondria are isolated by differential centrifugation. State 3 respiration or cytochrome c oxidase activity are measured in isolated mitochondria. (Iossa, S, FEBS Letters, 544: 133-7 (2003)). Oxygen consumption rates are measured in isolated hepatocytes using a portable Clark-type oxygen electrode placed in the hepatocyte medium. Hepatocytes are isolated from liver using a two-step collagenase perfusion (Berry, M. N., Friend, D. S. J. Cell Biol. 43: 506-520 (1969)) as modified by Groen (Groen, A. K. et al., Eur J. Biochem 122: 87-93 (1982)). Non-parenchymal cells are removed using a Percoll gradient and the cells are resuspended in tissue culture medium in a spinner flask. The oxygen consumption of the cells is measured over time once the system is sealed.
  • Oxygen consumption also can be measured in isolated perfused liver (Fernandez, V., Toxicol Lett. 69:205-10 (1993)). Liver is perfused in situ and oxygen consumption is calculated by measuring the difference between the oxygen saturation of the inflow buffer and the outflow buffer maintained at a constant flow. Whole animal oxygen consumption can be measured using an indirect calorimeter (Oxymax, Columbus Instruments, Columbus, Ohio). Animals are removed from their cages and placed in the chambers. The resting oxygen consumption is measured in animals during periods of inactivity as measured by activity monitors. The oxygen consumption is calculated based on the flow through the chamber and the difference in oxygen partial pressures at the inflow and outlet ports. Carbon dioxide efflux is also measured in parallel using a CO2 electrode.
  • Tissue distribution and the pharmacokinetics of compounds can be assessed following IP or oral administration to normal rats.
  • Studies can be conducted to evaluate the effects of a T3 mimetic on serum cholesterol and TSH levels, hepatic and cardiac gene expression and enzyme activities, heart weight, and clinical chemistry parameters using methods available in the art. In one embodiment, rats are made hypercholesterolemic by maintenance on a diet containing 1.5% cholesterol and 0.5% cholic acid for at least 2 weeks prior to initiation of treatment. Plasma cholesterol values are assessed prior to and following treatment and the effects of compound are expressed as a percentage change from the pre-dose cholesterol levels. Total cholesterol is analyzed using a commercially available enzymatic kit (Sigma Diagnostics, St. Louis, Mo.).
  • Effects of T3 mimetic compounds (and prodrugs thereof) in vivo on glucose can be measured in ZDF rats. T3 and T3 mimetic mediated myosin heavy chain gene transcription in the heart can be measured. An RT-PCR assay as disclosed in: Sara Danzi, Kaie Ojamaa, and Irwin Klein Am J Physiol Heart Circ Physiol 284: H2255-H2262, 2003 is used to study both the time course and the mechanism for the triiodothyronine (T3)-induced transcription of the α- and β-myosin heavy chain (MHC) genes in vivo on the basis of the quantity of specific heterogeneous nuclear RNA (hnRNA). The temporal relationship of changes in transcriptional activity to the amount of α-MHC mRNA and the coordinated regulation of transcription of more than one gene in response to T3 and T3 mimetics are demonstrated. Analysis of a time course of T3 and T3 mimetics that are not liver specific show mediated induction of α-MHC hnRNA and repression of β-MHC hnRNA, whereas no significant affect is observed with compounds at doses that are therapeutically useful.
  • The effect of T3 on cardiovascular function (heart rate, inotropic state, and aortic pressure) can be studied in the Sprague Dawley (SD) rat model using assay methods known in the art.
  • Thus, various assays known in the art can be used to assay for thyroid hormone agonist and its accompanying therapeutic activity and to establish appropriate dosages.
  • Methods of Use
  • The phosphoroamidate and phosphonoamidate compounds of a variety of therapeutic agents can be formed using methods available in the art and those disclosed herein. Such compounds can be used in some embodiments to enhance delivery of the drug to the liver. In one embodiment, the compound comprises a S-acyl-2-thioethyl phosphoroamidate or S-acyl-2-thioethyl phosphonoamidate, e.g., a S-pivaloyl-2-thioethyl phosphoroamidate or S-hydroxypivaloyl-2-thioethyl phosphonoamidate derivative. Therapeutic agents that can be derivatized to phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compound form include a therapeutic agent such as an anti-cancer agent or anti-diabetic agent that includes, or has been derivatized to include a reactive group for attachment of the phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate moiety.
  • Cancer Treatment Methods
  • In one embodiment, therapeutic agents for the treatment of liver cancer can be derivatized to form a phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compound as described herein, and used for the treatment of liver cancers. Liver cancers that can be treated include benign tumors, malignant tumors, hemangioma, hepatic adenomas, focal nodular hyperplasia, hepatocellular carcinoma, fibrolamellar carcinoma, cholangiocarcinomas, bile duct cancers, and other primary and metastatic cancers of the liver.
  • Exemplary therapeutic agents include anti-cancer agents having one or more hydroxy groups that can be derivatized as compounds described herein by removal of a hydrogen from one of the hydroxy groups. Exemplary anti-cancer agents include, but are not limited to aclarubicin, decitabine, daunorubicin, dihydro-5-azacytidine, doxorubicin, epirubicin, estramustin, etoposide, fludarabine, 7-hydroxychlorpromazin, neplanocin A, podophyllotoxin, tezacitabine, troxacitabine, vinblastin, vincristin, vindesin, etoposide, teniposide, NK-611, camptothecin, irinotecan, 9-aminocamptothecin, GG-211, topotecan, paclitaxel, azatoxin, coformycin, pirarubicin, nelarabine and losoxantrone. Anti-cancer agents known in the art and described herein can be derivatized to form a phosphoramidate or phosphonoamidate compound as described herein. Immunosuppressants, such as combretastatin A-4, mycophenolic, pentostatin, or mitoxantrone, also can be derivatized to form a phosphoramidate or phosphonoamidate compound as described herein.
  • Such compounds can optionally be used in combination with another anti-cancer agent that is optionally in prodrug form.
  • Methods of Treating Metabolic Diseases
  • In certain embodiments, the compounds provided herein are useful in methods for inhibiting gluconeogenesis, optionally by inhibiting the enzyme fructose 1,6-bisphosphatase (FBPase).
  • In certain embodiments, the compounds provided herein are useful in methods for inhibiting gluconeogenesis.
  • In certain embodiments, the compounds provided herein are useful in methods for treatment of metabolic diseases. In certain embodiments, the compounds provided herein are useful in methods for:
  • reducing plasma lipid levels, lowering cholesterol levels, reducing triglyceride levels, or increasing the ratio of HDL to LDL;
  • lowering blood glucose levels;
  • treating hyperlipidemia or hypercholesterolemia;
  • treating obesity, reducing fat content, treating fatty liver, reducing weight or preventing weight gain;
  • treating atherosclerosis, coronary heart disease, heart failure, nephrotic syndrome, or chronic renal failure;
  • lowering blood glucose levels, treating diabetes, impaired glucose tolerance, metabolic syndrome x, insulin resistance or hyperinsulinemia;
  • increasing levels of genes associated with gluconeogenesis;
  • decreasing hepatic glycogen levels or maintaining or improving glycemic control;
  • amelioration of hyperinsulinemia and/or decrease of glucose levels in diabetic subjects at doses that optionally do not affect cardiac function, e.g., heart rate, force of systolic contraction, duration of diastolic relaxation, vascular tone, or heart weight;
  • treating thyroid disease, thyroid cancer, depression, glaucoma, cardiac arrhythmias, heart failure, or osteoporosis;
  • increasing mitochondrial biogenesis, or increasing expression of PGC-1, AMP activated protein kinase or nuclear respiratory factor;
  • inhibiting hepatic gluconeogenesis; or
  • modulating expression of certain genes in the liver resulting in effects on lipids (e.g., cholesterol), glucose, lipoproteins, and triglycerides, or modulation of T3-responsive genes.
  • In certain embodiments, the compounds provided herein are useful in methods for lowering blood glucose levels, treating diabetes, impaired glucose tolerance, metabolic syndrome x, insulin resistance or hyperinsulinemia.
  • Second Agents Useful in the Methods
  • In certain embodiments, the compounds and compositions provided herein are useful in methods of treatment of a liver disorder, that comprises further administration of a second agent effective for the treatment of the disorder, such as liver cancer in a subject in need thereof. The second agent can be any agent known to those of skill in the art to be effective for the treatment of the disorder, including those currently approved by the FDA.
  • In certain embodiments, a compound provided herein is administered in combination with one second agent. In further embodiments, a second agent is administered in combination with two second agents. In still further embodiments, a second agent is administered in combination with two or more second agents.
  • As used herein, the term “in combination” includes the use of more than one therapy (e.g., one or more prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents). The use of the term “in combination” does not restrict the order in which therapies (e.g., prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents) are administered to a subject with a disorder. A first therapy (e.g., a prophylactic or therapeutic agent such as a compound provided herein) can be administered prior to (e.g., 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours, 72 hours, 96 hours, 1 week, 2 weeks, 3 weeks, 4 weeks, 5 weeks, 6 weeks, 8 weeks, or 12 weeks before), concomitantly with, or subsequent to (e.g., 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours, 72 hours, 96 hours, 1 week, 2 weeks, 3 weeks, 4 weeks, 5 weeks, 6 weeks, 8 weeks, or 12 weeks after) the administration of a second therapy (e.g., a prophylactic or therapeutic agent) to a subject with a disorder.
  • As used herein, the term “synergistic” includes a combination of a compound provided herein and another therapy (e.g., a prophylactic or therapeutic agent) which has been or is currently being used to prevent, manage or treat a disorder, which is more effective than the additive effects of the therapies. A synergistic effect of a combination of therapies (e.g., a combination of prophylactic or therapeutic agents) permits the use of lower dosages of one or more of the therapies and/or less frequent administration of said therapies to a subject with a disorder. The ability to utilize lower dosages of a therapy (e.g., a prophylactic or therapeutic agent) and/or to administer said therapy less frequently reduces the toxicity associated with the administration of said therapy to a subject without reducing the efficacy of said therapy in the prevention or treatment of a disorder). In addition, a synergistic effect can result in improved efficacy of agents in the prevention or treatment of a disorder. Finally, a synergistic effect of a combination of therapies (e.g., a combination of prophylactic or therapeutic agents) may avoid or reduce adverse or unwanted side effects associated with the use of either therapy alone.
  • In certain embodiments, the active compounds provided herein can be administered in combination or alternation with another therapeutic agent, for example an anti-cancer agent. In certain embodiments, the active compounds provided herein can be administered in combination or alternation with second agents useful in treating metabolic disorders such as diabetes, obesity, atherosclerosis, heart disease, metabolic syndrome x, nephrotic syndrome, thyroid disease, and symptoms associated therewith. In combination therapy, effective dosages of two or more agents are administered together, whereas in alternation or sequential-step therapy, an effective dosage of each agent is administered serially or sequentially. The dosages given will depend on absorption, inactivation and excretion rates of the drug as well as other factors known to those of skill in the art. It is to be noted that dosage values will also vary with the severity of the condition to be alleviated. It is to be further understood that for any particular subject, specific dosage regimens and schedules should be adjusted over time according to the individual need and the professional judgment of the person administering or supervising the administration of the compositions.
  • The second agent can be one of the agents disclosed herein. In certain embodiments, contemplated additional pharmaceutically active substances include drugs commonly used as chemotherapy for treatment of cancer and immune modulator substances. For example, chemotherapeutic agents include anti-metabolites (e.g., Pentostatin®), DNA polymerase inhibitors (e.g, Gemzar®), RNA polymerase inhibitors (e.g., ECyd®), platinum derivatives (e.g., Paraplatin®), anti-estrogens (e.g., Nolvadex®), Taxanes (e.g., Taxotere®), GnRH analogs (e.g., Lupron®), DNA polymerase inhibitors (e.g., Gemzar®), topoisomerase inhibitors (e.g., Hycamptin®), biphosphonates (e.g., Aredia®), somatostatins (e.g., Sandostatin®), nucleoside analogs (e.g., Ribavirin®), and IMPDH-inhibitors (e.g., Tiazofurin®). Contemplated immunomodulatory substances include cytokines (e.g., interferon α and γ, IL2, IL4, IL6, IL8, IL10, and IL12), cytokinins (e.g., kinetin), and chemokines (e.g., MIP-1).
  • In certain embodiments, the second agents for use in combination with the compounds provided herein include other agents useful in the treatment, prevention, suppression or amelioration of the diseases or conditions for which compounds provided herein are useful, such as treating metabolic diseases, including diabetes, obesity, atherosclerosis, heart disease, metabolic syndrome x, nephrotic syndrome, thyroid disease, and symptoms associated therewith. Such second agents include, but are not limited to: sulfonylureas, for example, glibenclamide (DAONIL®), glimepiride (AMARYL®), glipizide (GLUCOTROL or MINODIAB), glyburide (MICRONASE®), tolbutamide (ORINASE®), acetohexamide (DYMELOR®), tolazamide (TOLINSE®) and chlorpropamide, (DIABINESE®); insulin and insulin mimetics; biguanides such as metformin (GLUCOPHAGE®); α-glucosidase inhibitors including acarbose (PRECOSE®) and miglitol (GLYSET®); meglitinides, for example, nateglinide (STARLIX®) and repaglinide (PRANDIN®); thiozolidinediones, for example, ciglitazone, englitazone, rosiglitazone (AVANDIA®), pioglitazone (ACTOS®) and troglitazone (REZULIN®); incretin mimetics such as exenatide (BYETTA™); cholesterol lowering agents such as HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors (e.g., lovastatin, simvastatin, pravastatin, fluvastatin, atorvastatin and other statins), bile acid sequestrants (e.g., cholestyramine and colestipol), vitamin B3 (also known as nicotinic acid, or niacin), vitamin B6 (pyridoxine), vitamin B12 (cyanocobalamin), fibric acid derivatives (e.g., gemfibrozil, clofibrate, fenofibrate and benzafibrate), probucol, and inhibitors of cholesterol absorption (e.g., beta-sitosterol and acylCoA-cholesterol acyltransferase (ACAT) inhibitors such as melinamide), HMG-CoA synthase inhibitors, squalene epoxidase inhibitors and squalene synthetase inhibitors; antithrombotic agents, such as thrombolytic agents (e.g., streptokinase, alteplase, anistreplase and reteplase), heparin, hirudin and warfarin derivatives, β-blockers (e.g., atenolol), β-adrenergic agonists (e.g., isoproterenol) and ACE inhibitors and vasodilators (e.g., sodium nitroprusside, nicardipine hydrochloride, nitroglycerin and enaloprilat).
  • Pharmaceutical Compositions and Methods of Administration
  • Phosphoroamidate and phosphonoamidate compounds of a variety of therapeutic agents can be formulated into pharmaceutical compositions using methods available in the art and those disclosed herein. Such compounds can be used in some embodiments to enhance delivery of the drug to the liver. In one embodiment, the compound comprises a S-acyl-2-thioethyl phosphoroamidate or S-acyl-2-thioethyl phosphonoamidate, e.g., a S-pivaloyl-2-thioethyl phosphoroamidate or S-hydroxypivaloyl-2-thioethyl phosphonoamidate derivative. In certain embodiments, therapeutic agents that can be derivatized to phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compound form include any anti-cancer agent that includes, or has been derivatized to include a reactive group for attachment of the phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate moiety, including but not limited to nucleosides and nucleoside analogues including acyclic nucleosides. In certain embodiments, therapeutic agents that can be derivatized to phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compound form include any thyroid harmone receptor effector that includes, or has been derivatized to include a reactive group for attachment of the phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate moiety. Any of the phosphoroamidate or phosphonoamidate compounds disclosed herein can be provided in the appropriate pharmaceutical composition and be administered by a suitable route of administration.
  • The methods provided herein encompass administering pharmaceutical compositions containing at least one compound as described herein, including a compound of general formula I, Ia, IIb, IIIa, IVa, IXa or IXb if appropriate in the salt form, either used alone or in the form of a combination with one or more compatible and pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, such as diluents or adjuvants, or with other therapeutic agents, such as another anti-cancer or anti-diabetic agent.
  • In certain embodiments, the second agent can be formulated or packaged with the compound provided herein. Of course, the second agent will only be formulated with the compound provided herein when, according to the judgment of those of skill in the art, such co-formulation should not interfere with the activity of either agent or the method of administration. In certain embodiments, the compound provided herein and the second agent are formulated separately. They can be packaged together, or packaged separately, for the convenience of the practitioner of skill in the art.
  • In clinical practice the active agents provided herein may be administered by any conventional route, in particular orally, parenterally, rectally or by inhalation (e.g. in the form of aerosols). In certain embodiments, the compound provided herein is administered orally.
  • Use may be made, as solid compositions for oral administration, of tablets, pills, hard gelatin capsules, powders or granules. In these compositions, the active product is mixed with one or more inert diluents or adjuvants, such as sucrose, lactose or starch.
  • These compositions can comprise substances other than diluents, for example a lubricant, such as magnesium stearate, or a coating intended for controlled release.
  • Use may be made, as liquid compositions for oral administration, of solutions which are pharmaceutically acceptable, suspensions, emulsions, syrups and elixirs containing inert diluents, such as water or liquid paraffin. These compositions can also comprise substances other than diluents, for example wetting, sweetening or flavoring products.
  • The compositions for parenteral administration can be emulsions or sterile solutions. Use may be made, as solvent or vehicle, of propylene glycol, a polyethylene glycol, vegetable oils, in particular olive oil, or injectable organic esters, for example ethyl oleate. These compositions can also contain adjuvants, in particular wetting, isotonizing, emulsifying, dispersing and stabilizing agents. Sterilization can be carried out in several ways, for example using a bacteriological filter, by radiation or by heating. They can also be prepared in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved at the time of use in sterile water or any other injectable sterile medium.
  • The compositions for rectal administration are suppositories or rectal capsules which contain, in addition to the active principle, excipients such as cocoa butter, semi-synthetic glycerides or polyethylene glycols.
  • The compositions can also be aerosols. For use in the form of liquid aerosols, the compositions can be stable sterile solutions or solid compositions dissolved at the time of use in apyrogenic sterile water, in saline or any other pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle. For use in the form of dry aerosols intended to be directly inhaled, the active principle is finely divided and combined with a water-soluble solid diluent or vehicle, for example dextran, mannitol or lactose.
  • In one embodiment, a composition provided herein is a pharmaceutical composition or a single unit dosage form. Pharmaceutical compositions and single unit dosage forms provided herein comprise a prophylactically or therapeutically effective amount of one or more prophylactic or therapeutic agents (e.g., a compound provided herein, or other prophylactic or therapeutic agent), and a typically one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers or excipients. In a specific embodiment and in this context, the term “pharmaceutically acceptable” includes approval by a regulatory agency of the Federal or a state government or listed in the U.S. Pharmacopeia or other generally recognized pharmacopeia for use in animals, and more particularly in humans. The term “carrier” includes a diluent, adjuvant (e.g., Freund's adjuvant (complete and incomplete)), excipient, or vehicle with which the therapeutic is administered. Such pharmaceutical carriers can be sterile liquids, such as water and oils, including those of petroleum, animal, vegetable or synthetic origin, such as peanut oil, soybean oil, mineral oil, sesame oil and the like. Water can be used as a carrier when the pharmaceutical composition is administered intravenously. Saline solutions and aqueous dextrose and glycerol solutions can also be employed as liquid carriers, particularly for injectable solutions. Examples of suitable pharmaceutical carriers are described in “Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences” by E. W. Martin.
  • Typical pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms comprise one or more excipients. Suitable excipients are well-known to those skilled in the art of pharmacy, and non-limiting examples of suitable excipients include starch, glucose, lactose, sucrose, gelatin, malt, rice, flour, chalk, silica gel, sodium stearate, glycerol monostearate, talc, sodium chloride, dried skim milk, glycerol, propylene, glycol, water, ethanol and the like. Whether a particular excipient is suitable for incorporation into a pharmaceutical composition or dosage form depends on a variety of factors well known in the art including, but not limited to, the way in which the dosage form will be administered to a subject and the specific active ingredients in the dosage form. The composition or single unit dosage form, if desired, can also contain minor amounts of wetting or emulsifying agents, or pH buffering agents.
  • Lactose free compositions provided herein can comprise excipients that are well known in the art and are listed, for example, in the U.S. Pharmocopia (USP) SP (XXI)/NF (XVI). In general, lactose free compositions comprise an active ingredient, a binder/filler, and a lubricant in pharmaceutically compatible and pharmaceutically acceptable amounts. Exemplary lactose free dosage forms comprise an active ingredient, microcrystalline cellulose, pre gelatinized starch, and magnesium stearate.
  • Further encompassed herein are anhydrous pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms comprising active ingredients, since water can facilitate the degradation of some compounds. For example, the addition of water (e.g., 5%) is widely accepted in the pharmaceutical arts as a means of simulating long term storage in order to determine characteristics such as shelf life or the stability of formulations over time. See, e.g., Jens T. Carstensen, Drug Stability: Principles & Practice, 2d. Ed., Marcel Dekker, NY, N.Y., 1995, pp. 379 80. In effect, water and heat accelerate the decomposition of some compounds. Thus, the effect of water on a formulation can be of great significance since moisture and/or humidity are commonly encountered during manufacture, handling, packaging, storage, shipment, and use of formulations.
  • Anhydrous pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms provided herein can be prepared using anhydrous or low moisture containing ingredients and low moisture or low humidity conditions. Pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms that comprise lactose and at least one active ingredient that comprises a primary or secondary amine can be anhydrous if substantial contact with moisture and/or humidity during manufacturing, packaging, and/or storage is expected.
  • An anhydrous pharmaceutical composition should be prepared and stored such that its anhydrous nature is maintained. Accordingly, anhydrous compositions can be packaged using materials known to prevent exposure to water such that they can be included in suitable formulary kits. Examples of suitable packaging include, but are not limited to, hermetically sealed foils, plastics, unit dose containers (e.g., vials), blister packs, and strip packs.
  • Further provided are pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms that comprise one or more compounds that reduce the rate by which an active ingredient will decompose. Such compounds, which are referred to herein as “stabilizers,” include, but are not limited to, antioxidants such as ascorbic acid, pH buffers, or salt buffers.
  • The pharmaceutical compositions and single unit dosage forms can take the form of solutions, suspensions, emulsion, tablets, pills, capsules, powders, sustained-release formulations and the like. Oral formulation can include standard carriers such as pharmaceutical grades of mannitol, lactose, starch, magnesium stearate, sodium saccharine, cellulose, magnesium carbonate, etc. Such compositions and dosage forms will contain a prophylactically or therapeutically effective amount of a prophylactic or therapeutic agent, in certain embodiments, in purified form, together with a suitable amount of carrier so as to provide the form for proper administration to the subject. The formulation should suit the mode of administration. In a certain embodiment, the pharmaceutical compositions or single unit dosage forms are sterile and in suitable form for administration to a subject, for example, an animal subject, such as a mammalian subject, for example, a human subject.
  • A pharmaceutical composition is formulated to be compatible with its intended route of administration. Examples of routes of administration include, but are not limited to, parenteral, e.g., intravenous, intradermal, subcutaneous, intramuscular, subcutaneous, oral, buccal, sublingual, inhalation, intranasal, transdermal, topical, transmucosal, intra-tumoral, intra-synovial and rectal administration. In a specific embodiment, the composition is formulated in accordance with routine procedures as a pharmaceutical composition adapted for intravenous, subcutaneous, intramuscular, oral, intranasal or topical administration to human beings. In an embodiment, a pharmaceutical composition is formulated in accordance with routine procedures for subcutaneous administration to human beings. Typically, compositions for intravenous administration are solutions in sterile isotonic aqueous buffer. Where necessary, the composition may also include a solubilizing agent and a local anesthetic such as lignocamne to ease pain at the site of the injection.
  • Examples of dosage forms include, but are not limited to: tablets; caplets; capsules, such as soft elastic gelatin capsules; cachets; troches; lozenges; dispersions; suppositories; ointments; cataplasms (poultices); pastes; powders; dressings; creams; plasters; solutions; patches; aerosols (e.g., nasal sprays or inhalers); gels; liquid dosage forms suitable for oral or mucosal administration to a subject, including suspensions (e.g., aqueous or non aqueous liquid suspensions, oil in water emulsions, or a water in oil liquid emulsions), solutions, and elixirs; liquid dosage forms suitable for parenteral administration to a subject; and sterile solids (e.g., crystalline or amorphous solids) that can be reconstituted to provide liquid dosage forms suitable for parenteral administration to a subject.
  • The composition, shape, and type of dosage forms provided herein will typically vary depending on their use. For example, a dosage form used in the initial treatment of liver cancer may contain larger amounts of one or more of the active ingredients it comprises than a dosage form used in the maintenance treatment of the same liver cancer. Similarly, a parenteral dosage form may contain smaller amounts of one or more of the active ingredients it comprises than an oral dosage form used to treat the same disease or disorder. These and other ways in which specific dosage forms encompassed herein will vary from one another will be readily apparent to those skilled in the art. See, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 20th ed., Mack Publishing, Easton Pa. (2000).
  • Generally, the ingredients of compositions are supplied either separately or mixed together in unit dosage form, for example, as a dry lyophilized powder or water free concentrate in a hermetically sealed container such as an ampoule or sachette indicating the quantity of active agent. Where the composition is to be administered by infusion, it can be dispensed with an infusion bottle containing sterile pharmaceutical grade water or saline. Where the composition is administered by injection, an ampoule of sterile water for injection or saline can be provided so that the ingredients may be mixed prior to administration.
  • Typical dosage forms comprise a compound provided herein, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or hydrate thereof lie within the range of from about 0.1 mg to about 1000 mg per day, given as a single once-a-day dose in the morning or as divided doses throughout the day taken with food. Particular dosage forms can have about 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 2.5, 5.0, 10.0, 15.0, 20.0, 25.0, 50.0, 100, 200, 250, 500 or 1000 mg of the active compound.
  • Oral Dosage Forms
  • Pharmaceutical compositions that are suitable for oral administration can be presented as discrete dosage forms, such as, but are not limited to, tablets (e.g., chewable tablets), caplets, capsules, and liquids (e.g., flavored syrups). Such dosage forms contain predetermined amounts of active ingredients, and may be prepared by methods of pharmacy well known to those skilled in the art. See generally, Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 20th ed., Mack Publishing, Easton Pa. (2000).
  • In certain embodiments, the oral dosage forms are solid and prepared under anhydrous conditions with anhydrous ingredients, as described in detail in the sections above. However, the scope of the compositions provided herein extends beyond anhydrous, solid oral dosage forms. As such, further forms are described herein.
  • Typical oral dosage forms are prepared by combining the active ingredient(s) in an intimate admixture with at least one excipient according to conventional pharmaceutical compounding techniques. Excipients can take a wide variety of forms depending on the form of preparation desired for administration. For example, excipients suitable for use in oral liquid or aerosol dosage forms include, but are not limited to, water, glycols, oils, alcohols, flavoring agents, preservatives, and coloring agents. Examples of excipients suitable for use in solid oral dosage forms (e.g., powders, tablets, capsules, and caplets) include, but are not limited to, starches, sugars, micro crystalline cellulose, diluents, granulating agents, lubricants, binders, and disintegrating agents.
  • Because of their ease of administration, tablets and capsules represent the most advantageous oral dosage unit forms, in which case solid excipients are employed. If desired, tablets can be coated by standard aqueous or nonaqueous techniques. Such dosage forms can be prepared by any of the methods of pharmacy. In general, pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms are prepared by uniformly and intimately admixing the active ingredients with liquid carriers, finely divided solid carriers, or both, and then shaping the product into the desired presentation if necessary.
  • For example, a tablet can be prepared by compression or molding. Compressed tablets can be prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the active ingredients in a free flowing form such as powder or granules, optionally mixed with an excipient. Molded tablets can be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent.
  • Examples of excipients that can be used in oral dosage forms include, but are not limited to, binders, fillers, disintegrants, and lubricants. Binders suitable for use in pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms include, but are not limited to, corn starch, potato starch, or other starches, gelatin, natural and synthetic gums such as acacia, sodium alginate, alginic acid, other alginates, powdered tragacanth, guar gum, cellulose and its derivatives (e.g., ethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate, carboxymethyl cellulose calcium, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), polyvinyl pyrrolidone, methyl cellulose, pre gelatinized starch, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, (e.g., Nos. 2208, 2906, 2910), microcrystalline cellulose, and mixtures thereof.
  • Examples of fillers suitable for use in the pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms disclosed herein include, but are not limited to, talc, calcium carbonate (e.g., granules or powder), microcrystalline cellulose, powdered cellulose, dextrates, kaolin, mannitol, silicic acid, sorbitol, starch, pre gelatinized starch, and mixtures thereof. The binder or filler in pharmaceutical compositions is typically present in from about 50 to about 99 weight percent of the pharmaceutical composition or dosage form.
  • Suitable forms of microcrystalline cellulose include, but are not limited to, the materials sold as AVICEL PH 101, AVICEL PH 103 AVICEL RC 581, AVICEL PH 105 (available from FMC Corporation, American Viscose Division, Avicel Sales, Marcus Hook, Pa.), and mixtures thereof. An specific binder is a mixture of microcrystalline cellulose and sodium carboxymethyl cellulose sold as AVICEL RC 581. Suitable anhydrous or low moisture excipients or additives include AVICEL PH 103™ and Starch 1500 LM.
  • Disintegrants are used in the compositions to provide tablets that disintegrate when exposed to an aqueous environment. Tablets that contain too much disintegrant may disintegrate in storage, while those that contain too little may not disintegrate at a desired rate or under the desired conditions. Thus, a sufficient amount of disintegrant that is neither too much nor too little to detrimentally alter the release of the active ingredients should be used to form solid oral dosage forms. The amount of disintegrant used varies based upon the type of formulation, and is readily discernible to those of ordinary skill in the art. Typical pharmaceutical compositions comprise from about 0.5 to about 15 weight percent of disintegrant, specifically from about 1 to about 5 weight percent of disintegrant.
  • Disintegrants that can be used in pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms include, but are not limited to, agar agar, alginic acid, calcium carbonate, microcrystalline cellulose, croscarmellose sodium, crospovidone, polacrilin potassium, sodium starch glycolate, potato or tapioca starch, pre gelatinized starch, other starches, clays, other algins, other celluloses, gums, and mixtures thereof.
  • Lubricants that can be used in pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms include, but are not limited to, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, mineral oil, light mineral oil, glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol, polyethylene glycol, other glycols, stearic acid, sodium lauryl sulfate, talc, hydrogenated vegetable oil (e.g., peanut oil, cottonseed oil, sunflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil, and soybean oil), zinc stearate, ethyl oleate, ethyl laureate, agar, and mixtures thereof. Additional lubricants include, for example, a syloid silica gel (AEROSIL 200, manufactured by W.R. Grace Co. of Baltimore, Md.), a coagulated aerosol of synthetic silica (marketed by Degussa Co. of Plano, Tex.), CAB O SIL (a pyrogenic silicon dioxide product sold by Cabot Co. of Boston, Mass.), and mixtures thereof. If used at all, lubricants are typically used in an amount of less than about 1 weight percent of the pharmaceutical compositions or dosage forms into which they are incorporated.
  • Delayed Release Dosage Forms
  • Active ingredients such as the compounds provided herein can be administered by controlled release means or by delivery devices that are well known to those of ordinary skill in the art. Examples include, but are not limited to, those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,845,770; 3,916,899; 3,536,809; 3,598,123; and 4,008,719; 5,674,533; 5,059,595; 5,591,767; 5,120,548; 5,073,543; 5,639,476; 5,354,556; 5,639,480; 5,733,566; 5,739,108; 5,891,474; 5,922,356; 5,972,891; 5,980,945; 5,993,855; 6,045,830; 6,087,324; 6,113,943; 6,197,350; 6,248,363; 6,264,970; 6,267,981; 6,376,461; 6,419,961; 6,589,548; 6,613,358; 6,699,500 each of which is incorporated herein by reference. Such dosage forms can be used to provide slow or controlled release of one or more active ingredients using, for example, hydropropylmethyl cellulose, other polymer matrices, gels, permeable membranes, osmotic systems, multilayer coatings, microparticles, liposomes, microspheres, or a combination thereof to provide the desired release profile in varying proportions. Suitable controlled release formulations known to those of ordinary skill in the art, including those described herein, can be readily selected for use with the active ingredients provided herein. Thus encompassed herein are single unit dosage forms suitable for oral administration such as, but not limited to, tablets, capsules, gelcaps, and caplets that are adapted for controlled release.
  • All controlled release pharmaceutical products have a common goal of improving drug therapy over that achieved by their non controlled counterparts. Ideally, the use of an optimally designed controlled release preparation in medical treatment is characterized by a minimum of drug substance being employed to cure or control the condition in a minimum amount of time. Advantages of controlled release formulations include extended activity of the drug, reduced dosage frequency, and increased subject compliance. In addition, controlled release formulations can be used to affect the time of onset of action or other characteristics, such as blood levels of the drug, and can thus affect the occurrence of side (e.g., adverse) effects.
  • Most controlled release formulations are designed to initially release an amount of drug (active ingredient) that promptly produces the desired therapeutic effect, and gradually and continually release of other amounts of drug to maintain this level of therapeutic or prophylactic effect over an extended period of time. In order to maintain this constant level of drug in the body, the drug must be released from the dosage form at a rate that will replace the amount of drug being metabolized and excreted from the body. Controlled release of an active ingredient can be stimulated by various conditions including, but not limited to, pH, temperature, enzymes, water, or other physiological conditions or compounds.
  • In certain embodiments, the drug may be administered using intravenous infusion, an implantable osmotic pump, a transdermal patch, liposomes, or other modes of administration. In one embodiment, a pump may be used (see, Sefton, CRC Crit. Ref Biomed. Eng. 14:201 (1987); Buchwald et al., Surgery 88:507 (1980); Saudek et al., N. Engl. J. Med. 321:574 (1989)). In another embodiment, polymeric materials can be used. In yet another embodiment, a controlled release system can be placed in a subject at an appropriate site determined by a practitioner of skill, i.e., thus requiring only a fraction of the systemic dose (see, e.g., Goodson, Medical Applications of Controlled Release, vol. 2, pp. 115-138 (1984)). Other controlled release systems are discussed in the review by Langer (Science 249:1527-1533 (1990)). The active ingredient can be dispersed in a solid inner matrix, e.g., polymethylmethacrylate, polybutylmethacrylate, plasticized or unplasticized polyvinylchloride, plasticized nylon, plasticized polyethyleneterephthalate, natural rubber, polyisoprene, polyisobutylene, polybutadiene, polyethylene, ethylene-vinylacetate copolymers, silicone rubbers, polydimethylsiloxanes, silicone carbonate copolymers, hydrophilic polymers such as hydrogels of esters of acrylic and methacrylic acid, collagen, cross-linked polyvinylalcohol and cross-linked partially hydrolyzed polyvinyl acetate, that is surrounded by an outer polymeric membrane, e.g., polyethylene, polypropylene, ethylene/propylene copolymers, ethylene/ethyl acrylate copolymers, ethylene/vinylacetate copolymers, silicone rubbers, polydimethyl siloxanes, neoprene rubber, chlorinated polyethylene, polyvinylchloride, vinylchloride copolymers with vinyl acetate, vinylidene chloride, ethylene and propylene, ionomer polyethylene terephthalate, butyl rubber epichlorohydrin rubbers, ethylene/vinyl alcohol copolymer, ethylene/vinyl acetate/vinyl alcohol terpolymer, and ethylene/vinyloxyethanol copolymer, that is insoluble in body fluids. The active ingredient then diffuses through the outer polymeric membrane in a release rate controlling step. The percentage of active ingredient in such parenteral compositions is highly dependent on the specific nature thereof, as well as the needs of the subject.
  • Parenteral Dosage Forms
  • In one embodiment, provided are parenteral dosage forms. Parenteral dosage forms can be administered to subjects by various routes including, but not limited to, subcutaneous, intravenous (including bolus injection), intramuscular, and intraarterial. Because their administration typically bypasses subjects' natural defenses against contaminants, parenteral dosage forms are typically, sterile or capable of being sterilized prior to administration to a subject. Examples of parenteral dosage forms include, but are not limited to, solutions ready for injection, dry products ready to be dissolved or suspended in a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle for injection, suspensions ready for injection, and emulsions.
  • Suitable vehicles that can be used to provide parenteral dosage forms are well known to those skilled in the art. Examples include, but are not limited to: Water for Injection USP; aqueous vehicles such as, but not limited to, Sodium Chloride Injection, Ringer's Injection, Dextrose Injection, Dextrose and Sodium Chloride Injection, and Lactated Ringer's Injection; water miscible vehicles such as, but not limited to, ethyl alcohol, polyethylene glycol, and polypropylene glycol; and non aqueous vehicles such as, but not limited to, corn oil, cottonseed oil, peanut oil, sesame oil, ethyl oleate, isopropyl myristate, and benzyl benzoate.
  • Compounds that increase the solubility of one or more of the active ingredients disclosed herein can also be incorporated into the parenteral dosage forms.
  • Transdermal, Topical & Mucosal Dosage Forms
  • Also provided are transdermal, topical, and mucosal dosage forms. Transdermal, topical, and mucosal dosage forms include, but are not limited to, ophthalmic solutions, sprays, aerosols, creams, lotions, ointments, gels, solutions, emulsions, suspensions, or other forms known to one of skill in the art. See, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 16th, 18th and 20th eds., Mack Publishing, Easton Pa. (1980, 1990 & 2000); and Introduction to Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, 4th ed., Lea & Febiger, Philadelphia (1985). Dosage forms suitable for treating mucosal tissues within the oral cavity can be formulated as mouthwashes or as oral gels. Further, transdermal dosage forms include “reservoir type” or “matrix type” patches, which can be applied to the skin and worn for a specific period of time to permit the penetration of a desired amount of active ingredients.
  • Suitable excipients (e.g., carriers and diluents) and other materials that can be used to provide transdermal, topical, and mucosal dosage forms encompassed herein are well known to those skilled in the pharmaceutical arts, and depend on the particular tissue to which a given pharmaceutical composition or dosage form will be applied. With that fact in mind, typical excipients include, but are not limited to, water, acetone, ethanol, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, butane 1,3 diol, isopropyl myristate, isopropyl palmitate, mineral oil, and mixtures thereof to form lotions, tinctures, creams, emulsions, gels or ointments, which are non toxic and pharmaceutically acceptable. Moisturizers or humectants can also be added to pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms if desired. Examples of such additional ingredients are well known in the art. See, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 16th, 18th and 20th eds., Mack Publishing, Easton Pa. (1980, 1990 & 2000).
  • Depending on the specific tissue to be treated, additional components may be used prior to, in conjunction with, or subsequent to treatment with active ingredients provided. For example, penetration enhancers can be used to assist in delivering the active ingredients to the tissue. Suitable penetration enhancers include, but are not limited to: acetone; various alcohols such as ethanol, oleyl, and tetrahydrofuryl; alkyl sulfoxides such as dimethyl sulfoxide; dimethyl acetamide; dimethyl formamide; polyethylene glycol; pyrrolidones such as polyvinylpyrrolidone; Kollidon grades (Povidone, Polyvidone); urea; and various water soluble or insoluble sugar esters such as Tween 80 (polysorbate 80) and Span 60 (sorbitan monostearate).
  • The pH of a pharmaceutical composition or dosage form, or of the tissue to which the pharmaceutical composition or dosage form is applied, may also be adjusted to improve delivery of one or more active ingredients. Similarly, the polarity of a solvent carrier, its ionic strength, or tonicity can be adjusted to improve delivery. Compounds such as stearates can also be added to pharmaceutical compositions or dosage forms to advantageously alter the hydrophilicity or lipophilicity of one or more active ingredients so as to improve delivery. In this regard, stearates can serve as a lipid vehicle for the formulation, as an emulsifying agent or surfactant, and as a delivery enhancing or penetration enhancing agent. Different salts, hydrates or solvates of the active ingredients can be used to further adjust the properties of the resulting composition.
  • Dosage and Unit Dosage Forms
  • In human therapeutics, the doctor will determine the posology which he considers most appropriate according to a preventive or curative treatment and according to the age, weight, stage of the disease, for example, cancer and other factors specific to the subject to be treated. In certain embodiments, doses are from about 1 to about 1000 mg per day for an adult, or from about 5 to about 250 mg per day or from about 10 to 50 mg per day for an adult. In certain embodiments, doses are from about 5 to about 400 mg per day or 25 to 200 mg per day per adult. In certain embodiments, dose rates of from about 50 to about 500 mg per day are also contemplated.
  • In further aspects, provided are methods of treating or preventing liver cancer in a subject by administering, to a subject in need thereof, an effective amount of a compound provided herein, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In other aspects, provided are methods of treating or preventing metabolic diseases in a subject by administering, to a Subject in need thereof, an effective amount of a compound provided herein, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. The amount of the compound or composition which will be effective in the prevention or treatment of a disorder or one or more symptoms thereof will vary with the nature and severity of the disease or condition, and the route by which the active ingredient is administered. The frequency and dosage will also vary according to factors specific for each subject depending on the specific therapy (e.g., therapeutic or prophylactic agents) administered, the severity of the disorder, disease, or condition, the route of administration, as well as age, body, weight, response, and the past medical history of the subject. Effective doses may be extrapolated from dose-response curves derived from in vitro or animal model test systems.
  • In certain embodiments, exemplary doses of a composition include milligram or microgram amounts of the active compound per kilogram of subject or sample weight (e.g., about 10 micrograms per kilogram to about 50 milligrams per kilogram, about 100 micrograms per kilogram to about 25 milligrams per kilogram, or about 100 microgram per kilogram to about 10 milligrams per kilogram). For compositions provided herein, in certain embodiments, the dosage administered to a subject is 0.140 mg/kg to 3 mg/kg of the subject's body weight, based on weight of the active compound. In certain embodiments, the dosage administered to a subject is between 0.20 mg/kg and 2.00 mg/kg, or between 0.30 mg/kg and 1.50 mg/kg of the subject's body weight.
  • In certain embodiments, the recommended daily dose range of a composition provided herein for the conditions described herein lie within the range of from about 0.1 mg to about 1000 mg per day, given as a single once-a-day dose or as divided doses throughout a day. In one embodiment, the daily dose is administered twice daily in equally divided doses. In certain embodiments, a daily dose range should be from about 10 mg to about 200 mg per day, in other embodiments, between about 10 mg and about 150 mg per day, in further embodiments, between about 25 and about 100 mg per day. It may be necessary to use dosages of the active ingredient outside the ranges disclosed herein in some cases, as will be apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art. Furthermore, it is noted that the clinician or treating physician will know how and when to interrupt, adjust, or terminate therapy in conjunction with subject response.
  • Different therapeutically effective amounts may be applicable for different diseases and conditions, as will be readily known by those of ordinary skill in the art. Similarly, amounts sufficient to prevent, manage, treat or ameliorate such disorders, but insufficient to cause, or sufficient to reduce, adverse effects associated with the composition provided herein are also encompassed by the above described dosage amounts and dose frequency schedules. Further, when a subject is administered multiple dosages of a composition provided herein, not all of the dosages need be the same. For example, the dosage administered to the subject may be increased to improve the prophylactic or therapeutic effect of the composition or it may be decreased to reduce one or more side effects that a particular subject is experiencing.
  • In certain embodiment, the dosage of the composition provided herein, based on weight of the active compound, administered to prevent, treat, manage, or ameliorate a disorder, or one or more symptoms thereof in a subject is 0.1 mg/kg, 1 mg/kg, 2 mg/kg, 3 mg/kg, 4 mg/kg, 5 mg/kg, 6 mg/kg, 10 mg/kg, or 15 mg/kg or more of a subject's body weight. In another embodiment, the dosage of the composition or a composition provided herein administered to prevent, treat, manage, or ameliorate a disorder, or one or more symptoms thereof in a subject is a unit dose of 0.1 mg to 200 mg, 0.1 mg to 100 mg, 0.1 mg to 50 mg, 0.1 mg to 25 mg, 0.1 mg to 20 mg, 0.1 mg to 15 mg, 0.1 mg to 10 mg, 0.1 mg to 7.5 mg, 0.1 mg to 5 mg, 0.1 to 2.5 mg, 0.25 mg to 20 mg, 0.25 to 15 mg, 0.25 to 12 mg, 0.25 to 10 mg, 0.25 mg to 7.5 mg, 0.25 mg to 5 mg, 0.5 mg to 2.5 mg, 1 mg to 20 mg, 1 mg to 15 mg, 1 mg to 12 mg, 1 mg to 10 mg, 1 mg to 7.5 mg, 1 mg to 5 mg, or 1 mg to 2.5 mg.
  • In certain embodiments, treatment or prevention can be initiated with one or more loading doses of a compound or composition provided herein followed by one or more maintenance doses. In such embodiments, the loading dose can be, for instance, about 60 to about 400 mg per day, or about 100 to about 200 mg per day for one day to five weeks. The loading dose can be followed by one or more maintenance doses. In certain embodiments, each maintenance does is, independently, about from about 10 mg to about 200 mg per day, between about 25 mg and about 150 mg per day, or between about 25 and about 80 mg per day. Maintenance doses can be administered daily and can be administered as single doses, or as divided doses.
  • In certain embodiments, a dose of a compound or composition provided herein can be administered to achieve a steady-state concentration of the active ingredient in blood or serum of the subject. The steady-state concentration can be determined by measurement according to techniques available to those of skill or can be based on the physical characteristics of the subject such as height, weight and age. In certain embodiments, a sufficient amount of a compound or composition provided herein is administered to achieve a steady-state concentration in blood or serum of the subject of from about 300 to about 4000 ng/mL, from about 400 to about 1600 ng/mL, or from about 600 to about 1200 ng/mL. In some embodiments, loading doses can be administered to achieve steady-state blood or serum concentrations of about 1200 to about 8000 ng/mL, or about 2000 to about 4000 ng/mL for one to five days. In certain embodiments, maintenance doses can be administered to achieve a steady-state concentration in blood or serum of the subject of from about 300 to about 4000 ng/mL, from about 400 to about 1600 ng/mL, or from about 600 to about 1200 ng/mL.
  • In certain embodiments, administration of the same composition may be repeated and the administrations may be separated by at least 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 5 days, 10 days, 15 days, 30 days, 45 days, 2 months, 75 days, 3 months, or 6 months. In other embodiments, administration of the same prophylactic or therapeutic agent may be repeated and the administration may be separated by at least at least 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 5 days, 10 days, 15 days, 30 days, 45 days, 2 months, 75 days, 3 months, or 6 months.
  • In certain aspects, provided herein are unit dosages comprising a compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, in a form suitable for administration. Such forms are described in detail above. In certain embodiments, the unit dosage comprises 1 to 1000 mg, 5 to 250 mg or 10 to 50 mg active ingredient. In particular embodiments, the unit dosages comprise about 1, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, 125, 250, 500 or 1000 mg active ingredient. Such unit dosages can be prepared according to techniques familiar to those of skill in the art.
  • The dosages of the second agents are to be used in the combination therapies provided herein. In certain embodiments, dosages lower than those which have been or are currently being used to prevent or treat the diseases described herein, for example, liver cancer and diabetes, are used in the combination therapies provided herein. The recommended dosages of second agents can be obtained from the knowledge of those of skill. For those second agents that are approved for clinical use, recommended dosages are described in, for example, Hardman et al., eds., 1996, Goodman & Gilman's The Pharmacological Basis Of Basis Of Therapeutics 9th Ed, Mc-Graw-Hill, New York; Physician's Desk Reference (PDR) 57th Ed., 2003, Medical Economics Co., Inc., Montvale, N.J., which are incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • In various embodiments, the therapies (e.g., a compound provided herein and the second agent) are administered less than 5 minutes apart, less than 30 minutes apart, less than 1 hour apart, 1 hour apart, at about 1 hour apart, at about 1 to about 2 hours apart, at about 2 hours to about 3 hours apart, at about 3 hours to about 4 hours apart, at about 4 hours to about 5 hours apart, at about 5 hours to about 6 hours apart, at about 6 hours to about 7 hours apart, at about 7 hours to about 8 hours apart, at about 8 hours to about 9 hours apart, at about 9 hours to about 10 hours apart, at about 10 hours to about 11 hours apart, at about 11 hours to about 12 hours apart, at about 12 hours to 18 hours apart, 18 hours to 24 hours apart, 24 hours to 36 hours apart, 36 hours to 48 hours apart, 48 hours to 52 hours apart, 52 hours to 60 hours apart, 60 hours to 72 hours apart, 72 hours to 84 hours apart, 84 hours to 96 hours apart, or 96 hours to 120 hours part. In various embodiments, the therapies are administered no more than 24 hours apart or no more than 48 hours apart. In certain embodiments, two or more therapies are administered within the same patient visit. In other embodiments, the compound provided herein and the second agent are administered concurrently.
  • In certain embodiments, a compound provided herein and a second agent are administered to a patient, for example, a mammal, such as a human, in a sequence and within a time interval such that the compound provided herein can act together with the other agent to provide an increased benefit than if they were administered otherwise. For example, the second active agent can be administered at the same time or sequentially in any order at different points in time; however, if not administered at the same time, they should be administered sufficiently close in time so as to provide the desired therapeutic or prophylactic effect. In one embodiment, the compound provided herein and the second active agent exert their effect at times which overlap. Each second active agent can be administered separately, in any appropriate form and by any suitable route. In other embodiments, the compound provided herein is administered before, concurrently or after administration of the second active agent.
  • In other embodiments, the compound provided herein and the second agent are administered at about 2 to 4 days apart, at about 4 to 6 days apart, at about 1 week part, at about 1 to 2 weeks apart, or more than 2 weeks apart.
  • In certain embodiments, the compound provided herein and the second agent are cyclically administered to a patient. Cycling therapy involves the administration of a first agent (e.g., a first prophylactic or therapeutic agents) for a period of time, followed by the administration of a second agent and/or third agent (e.g., a second and/or third prophylactic or therapeutic agents) for a period of time and repeating this sequential administration. Cycling therapy can reduce the development of resistance to one or more of the therapies, avoid or reduce the side effects of one of the therapies, and/or improve the efficacy of the treatment.
  • In certain embodiments, the compound provided herein and the second active agent are administered in a cycle of less than about 3 weeks, about once every two weeks, about once every 10 days or about once every week. One cycle can comprise the administration of a compound provided herein and the second agent by infusion over about 90 minutes every cycle, about 1 hour every cycle, about 45 minutes every cycle. Each cycle can comprise at least 1 week of rest, at least 2 weeks of rest, at least 3 weeks of rest. The number of cycles administered is from about 1 to about 12 cycles, more typically from about 2 to about 10 cycles, and more typically from about 2 to about 8 cycles.
  • In other embodiments, courses of treatment are administered concurrently to a patient, i.e., individual doses of the second agent are administered separately yet within a time interval such that the compound provided herein can work together with the second active agent. For example, one component can be administered once per week in combination with the other components that can be administered once every two weeks or once every three weeks. In other words, the dosing regimens are carried out concurrently even if the therapeutics are not administered simultaneously or during the same day.
  • The second agent can act additively or synergistically with the compound provided herein. In one embodiment, the compound provided herein is administered concurrently with one or more second agents in the same pharmaceutical composition. In another embodiment, a compound provided herein is administered concurrently with one or more second agents in separate pharmaceutical compositions. In still another embodiment, a compound provided herein is administered prior to or subsequent to administration of a second agent. Also contemplated are administration of a compound provided herein and a second agent by the same or different routes of administration, e.g., oral and parenteral. In certain embodiments, when the compound provided herein is administered concurrently with a second agent that potentially produces adverse side effects including, but not limited to, toxicity, the second active agent can advantageously be administered at a dose that falls below the threshold that the adverse side effect is elicited.
  • Kits
  • Also provided are kits for use in methods of treatment of a liver disorder such as cancer or metabolic diseases, such as diabetes, hyperlipidemia, atherosclerosis, and obesity. The kits can include a compound or composition provided herein, a second agent or composition, and instructions providing information to a health care provider regarding usage for treating the disorder. Instructions may be provided in printed form or in the form of an electronic medium such as a floppy disc, CD, or DVD, or in the form of a website address where such instructions may be obtained. A unit dose of a compound or composition provided herein, or a second agent or composition, can include a dosage such that when administered to a subject, a therapeutically or prophylactically effective plasma level of the compound or composition can be maintained in the subject for at least 1 days. In some embodiments, a compound or composition can be included as a sterile aqueous pharmaceutical composition or dry powder (e.g., lyophilized) composition.
  • In some embodiments, suitable packaging is provided. As used herein, “packaging” includes a solid matrix or material customarily used in a system and capable of holding within fixed limits a compound provided herein and/or a second agent suitable for administration to a subject. Such materials include glass and plastic (e.g., polyethylene, polypropylene, and polycarbonate) bottles, vials, paper, plastic, and plastic-foil laminated envelopes and the like. If e-beam sterilization techniques are employed, the packaging should have sufficiently low density to permit sterilization of the contents.
  • The following Examples illustrate the synthesis of representative compounds provided herein. These examples are not intended, nor are they to be construed, as limiting the scope of the claimed subject matter. It will be clear that the scope of claimed subject matter may be practiced otherwise than as particularly described herein. Numerous modifications and variations of the subject matter are possible in view of the teachings herein and, therefore, are within the scope the claimed subject matter.
  • EXAMPLES Example 1 Preparation of Hydroxy-tBuSATE N-benzylphosphoroamidate derivative A550 of L-2′,3′-dideoxyadenosine L-ddA
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00070
  • Synthetic Scheme:
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00071
  • Synthesis of Carboxylic Acid 2:
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00072
  • 2,2-Dimethyl-3-hydroxypropanoic acid methyl ester (965 μL, 7.57 mmol) was added dropwise to a stirring solution of 4,4′-dimethoxytrityl chloride (2.82 g, 8.33 mmol) in anhydrous pyridine (7.6 mL) at room temperature. The reaction mixture turned to a red solution quickly, then to an orange suspension (ca. 30 min), and this was left stirring overnight. The mixture was poured carefully over saturated aqueous NaHCO3 solution (30 mL) and the product was extracted with Et2O (3×20 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine (20 mL), dried (Na2SO4) and the volatiles were removed under reduced pressure. The resulting oil was co-evaporated with toluene and the residue was quickly purified by flash column chromatography (SiO2, Ø=4 cm, H=20 cm) eluting with 5→10→20→30% Et2O in petroleum ether (40-60). Evaporation of the fractions (Rf=0.25, 30% Et2O in petroleum ether (40-60)) afforded ether 1 as a yellow oil (3.11 g, 95%). This compound (3.00 g, 6.91 mmol) was dissolved in THF (35 mL) and an aqueous solution of NaOH (10%, 3.5 g in 35 mL H2O) was then added at room temperature. The solution turned instantly dark orange and this was stirred for 2 days. The medium was then carefully neutralized by dropwise addition of HCl (1M). The product was extracted with Et2O (4×50 mL) and the combined organic extracts were washed with brine (50 mL), dried (Na2SO4) and the volatiles were removed under reduced pressure. The crude yellow oil was quickly purified by flash column chromatography (SiO2, Ø=2 cm, H=10 cm) eluting with 50% Et2O in petroleum ether (40-60). Evaporation of the fractions afforded carboxylic acid 2 as a white foam (2.23 g, 77%). Rf=0.50 (50% Et2O in petroleum ether (40-60)); 1H-NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) 1.10 (s, 6H, 2×CH3), 3.06 (s, 2H, CH2O), 3.65 (s, 6H, 2×OCH3), 6.62-6.79 (m, 4H, PhCH), 7.02-7.46 (stack, 8H, PhCH); 13C-NMR (75 MHz, CDCl3) 22.6 (2×CH3), 43.5 (C(CH3)2), 55.1 (2×OCH3), 85.9 (CPh3), [125.3, 126.7, 127.7, 128.2, 129.1, 130.0, 136.0, 144.9, 158.4 (Ph), some overlap], 182.2 (C═O).
  • Synthesis of Thioester 3:
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00073
  • 1,1′-carbonyldiimidazole (830 mg, 5.12 mmol) was added to a stirring solution of carboxylic acid 2 in anhydrous PhMe/DMF (2/1, v/v, 2.7 mL) at room temperature and the reaction mixture turned turbid instantly. After 30 min, the medium was diluted by adding anhydrous PhMe/DMF (93/7, v/v, 17 mL) and cooled to −10° C. 2-Mercaptoethanol (359 μL, 5.12 mmol) was then added dropwise and the solution was stirred for 1 h at this temperature. The reaction mixture was diluted with H2O (60 mL) and the product was extracted with Et2O (3×15 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine (15 mL), dried (Na2SO4) and the volatiles were removed under reduced pressure (bath temperature not exceeding 20° C.). The residue was purified by flash column chromatography (SiO2, Ø=4 cm, H=15 cm, 1% Et3N) eluting with 60-70% Et2O in petroleum ether (40-60). Evaporation of the fractions afforded thioester 3 as a white syrup (1.74 g, 92%) that solidified upon storage at 4° C. Rf=0.35 (70% Et2O in petroleum ether (40-60)); 1H-NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) 1.16 (s, 6H, 2×CH3), 3.02 (t, J 6.0, 2H, CH2S), 3.09 (s, 2H, CH2O), 3.66 (t, J 6.0, 2H, CH2OH), 3.72 (s, 6H, 2×OCH3), 6.74-6.78 (m, 4H, PhCH), 7.09-7.36 (stack, 8H, PhCH); 13C-NMR (75 MHz, CDCl3) 22.9 (CH3, 2×CH3), 31.7 (CH2, CH2S), 51.0 (quat. C, C(CH3)2), 55.2 (CH3, 2×OCH3), 61.9 (CH2, CH2OH), 70.0 (CH2, CH2O), 85.8 (quat. C., CPh3), [113.0 (CH, Ph), 126.7 (CH, Ph), 127.7 (CH, Ph), 128.2 (CH, Ph), 130.1 (CH, Ph), some overlap], [135.9 (quat. C, Ph), 144.8 (quat. C, Ph), 158.4 (quat. C, Ph), some overlap], 205.0 (quat. C, C═O).
  • Synthesis of H-Phosphonate Monoester 4:
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00074
  • β-L-ddA (1.00 g, 4.25 mmol) was co-evaporated with anhydrous pyridine (3×10 mL) and then dissolved in anhydrous pyridine/DMF (1/1, v/v, 21 mL). Diphenyl phosphite (5.76 mL, 29.8 mmol) was then added dropwise to this solution at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred for 20 min upon which a mixture of Et3N/H2O (1/1, v/v, 8.5 mL) was added dropwise, and stirring was pursued for an additional 20 min. The reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure to approximately 15-20 mL and this residue was directly purified by flash column chromatography (SiO2, Ø=4 cm, H=15 cm, 1% Et3N) eluting slowly with CH2Cl2 (150 mL) then 5% (200 mL) δ 10% (200 mL) δ 15% (300 mL) MeOH in CH2Cl2. Evaporation of the fractions afforded H-phosphonate monoester 4 as a white foam (1.36 g, 80%) that could be kept for several weeks at 4° C. Rf=0.10 (Et3N/MeOH/CH2Cl2, Jan. 10, 1989); 1H-NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) 1.21 (t, J 7.4, 9H, 3×NCH2CH3), 1.92-2.50 (stack, 4H, 2×2′-H, 2×3′-H), 3.02 (q, J 7.4, 6H, 3×NCH2CH3), [3.96-4.03 and 4.18-4.30 (stacks, 3H, 4′-H, 2×5′-H), 6.28 (m, 1′-H), 6.91 (d, J 623, 1H, P—H), 7.05 (br s, 2H, NH2), 8.21 (s, 1H), 8.54 (br s, 1H, OH), 8.57 (s, 1H).
  • Synthesis of Phosphoroamidate Diester 5:
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00075
  • H-Phosphonate monoester 4 (1.03 g, 2.57 mmol) and alcohol 3 (1.66 g, 3.45 mmol) were co-evaporated with anhydrous pyridine (3×5 mL) and then dissolved in anhydrous pyridine (5 mL). PyBOP (1H-benzotriazol-1-yloxytripyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate, 1.60 g, 3.08 mmol) was then added in one portion and the reaction mixture was stirred for 15 min at room temperature. The solution was poured over saturated aqueous NaHCO3 solution (30 mL) and the product was extracted with CH2Cl2 (4×15 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine (10 mL), dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure to leave the corresponding H-phosphonate diester as a slightly yellow oil (1.84 g, assuming 2.41 mmol). This was co-evaporated with anhydrous pyridine (3×5 mL; note: do not evaporate to dryness in order to help further solubilization), and the residue was dissolved in anhydrous CCl4 (24 mL). Benzylamine (791 μL, 7.23 mmol) was added dropwise and the reaction mixture turned cloudy instantly (slight heat development was observed). The milky solution was stirred for 1 h at room temperature and poured over saturated aqueous NaHCO3 solution (30 mL) and the product was extracted with CH2Cl2 (4×15 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine (15 mL), dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford phosphoroamidate diester 5 as a yellow oil (2.00 g, assuming 2.31 mmol). This was used in the next step without any further purification. Rf=0.29 (4% MeOH in CH2Cl2); 1H-NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) 1.11 (s, 6H, 2×CH3), 1.91-2.05 (m, 2H), 2.31-2.59 (m, 2H), 3.06 (m, 2H, CH2S), 3.08 (s, 2H, CH2ODMTr), 3.69 (s, 6H, 2×OCH3), 3.83-4.28 (stacks, 7H, CH2O, NCH2Ph, 4′-H, 2×5′-H), 5.71 (br s, 1H, NH), 6.18 (m, 1H, 1′-H), 6.69-6.80 (m, 4H, PhCH), 7.02-7.31 (stack, 13H, PhCH), 7.90 (s, 1H), 8.01 (s, 1H), 8.23 (s, 2H, NH2); 13P-NMR (61 MHz, CDCl3) 8.82, 8.99.
  • Synthesis of Hydroxy-tBuSATE N-benzylphosphoroamidate Derivative of L-ddA:
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00076
  • Crude phosphoroamidate diester 5 (2.00 g, assuming 2.31 mmol) was dissolved in dioxane/AcOH/H2O (25/17/25, v/v/v, 462 mL) and the solution was stirred for 3 d at room temperature. Evaporation of the volatiles under reduced pressure left a residue that was purified by flash column chromatography (SiO2, Ø=3 cm, H=15 cm) eluting with CH2Cl2 (100 mL) then 2% (100 mL)→4% (100 mL)→6% (100 mL)→8% (150 mL) MeOH in CH2Cl2. Evaporation of the fractions left NM 204 as a white foam that was dissolved in MeCN (5 mL). Upon addition of H2O (5 mL), the solution turned turbid and required sonication before lyophilization. The resulting white powder was dried at room temperature (using P2O5 as a desiccant) under vacuum for 1 d. The title compound was obtained as a highly hygroscopic white powder (1:1 mixture of diastereoisomers as judged by 31P-NMR; 499 mg, 35% over 3 steps). [α]20 D=+4.2° (c 1.0, CHCl3); Rf=0.29 (4% MeOH in CH2Cl2); 1H-NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6) 1.10 (s, 6H, 2×CH3), 2.02-2.14 (m, 2H, 2×3′-H), 2.41-2.55 (m, 2H, 2×2′-H), 3.01 (t, J 6.4, 2H, CH2S), 3.43 (d, J 5.0, 2H, CH2OH), 3.75-4.07 and 4.18-4.29 (stacks, 7H, CH2O, NCH2Ph, 4′-H, 2×5′-H), 5.02 (t, J 5.0, 1H, OH), 5.62 (m, 1H, NH), 6.25 (t, J 5.1, 1H, 1′-H), 7.16-7.36 (stack, 7H, PhH, NH2), 8.14 (s, 1H), 8.26 (s, 1H); 13C-NMR (75 MHz, DMSO-d6) 21.8 (2×CH3), 25.9 and 26.0 (CH2, 3′-C), 28.2 and 28.3 (CH2, CH2S), 30.9 and 31.0 (CH2, 2′-C), 44.2 (CH2, NCH2Ph), 51.7 (quat. C, C(CH3)2), 63.7 and 63.8 (CH2, CH2O), 66.8 (CH2, m, 5′-C), 68.3 (CH2, CH2OH), 78.9 (CH, m, 4′-C), 84.2 (CH, 1′-C), 118.9 (quat. C), [126.5 (CH, Ph), 127.2 (CH, Ph), 128.1 (CH, Ph), some overlap], 138.8 and 138.9 (CH), 140.5 and 140.6 (quat. C), 148.9 (quat. C), 152.3 (CH), 155.0 (quat. C), 204.0 (quat. C, C═O); 13P-NMR (61 MHz, DMSO-d6) 9.86, 9.95; m/z (FAB) 563 (2), 306 (76), 153 (100); HRMS 565.2034 ([M+H]+. C24H34O6N6PS requires 565.1998); HPLC tR=3.52 min (20% TEAC 20 mM in MeCN); UV (EtOH 95%) λmax=259 (εmax 15900), λmin=224 (εmin 7200).
  • Example 2 Preparation of Hydroxy-tBuSATE N-Benzylphosphoroamidate Derivative of 2′-C-methylcytidine
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00077
  • Synthesis of H-Phosphonate Monoester 5
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00078
  • Synthesis of Carboxylic Acid 3:
  • To a stirred solution of 2,2-dimethyl-3-hydroxypropanoic acid methyl ester (1, 15 ml, 117.6 mmol) in a mixture of anhydrous methylene chloride (590 ml) and triethylamine (23 ml), were added triphenylmethylene chloride (1.2 eq, 39.3 g) and 4-dimethylaminopyridine (0.1 eq, 1.44 g). The reaction mixture was left refluxing overnight. The mixture was poured carefully over a saturated aqueous NaHCO3 solution and the product was extracted with methylene chloride and washed with water. The combined organic extracts were evaporated under reduced pressure to give crude compound 2 which will be used for the next step without further purification. The resulting oil was dissolved in a mixture of dioxan (350 ml) and an aqueous solution of NaOH (30%, 350 ml). The heterogene mixture was refluxed for 16 hours. The reaction mixture was allowed to cool down to room temperature, the two phases were separated, and the organic phase carefully neutralized by dropwise addition of HCl (1M). The product was extracted with methylene chloride and the organic phases were evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude orange oil was recrystallized from methylene chloride to afford carboxylic acid 3 as white crystals (92%). Rf=0.50 (70% diethyl ether in petroleum ether); 1H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) 1.24 (s, 6H, 2×CH3), 3.19 (s, 2H, CH2O), 7.2-7.5 (m, 15H, C6H5).
  • Synthesis of H-Phosphonate Monoester 5:
  • 1,1′-carbonyldiimidazole (1.3 eq, 1.17 g) was added to a stirring solution of carboxylic acid 3 (2 g, 5.56 mmol) in an anhydrous mixture of toluene and dimethylformamide (2/1, v/v, 4.5 ml) at room temperature, and the reaction mixture turned turbid instantly. After 30 min, the reaction mixture was diluted with a mixture of toluene and dimethylformamide (93/7, v/v, 28 ml), cooled to −10° C., and 2-mercaptoethanol (1.3 eq, 500 μL) was added. The solution was stirred for 3 h at this temperature. The volatiles were removed under reduced pressure (bath temperature not exceeding 25° C.). The residue was dissolved in methylene chloride and washed with water. The organic phases were combined, dried over sodium sulphate (Na2SO4), filtered and evaporated to dryness to give compound 4 as a yellow oil. This compound will be coevaporated with anhydrous pyridine and used for the next step without further purification. Rf=0.71 (70% Et2O in petroleum ether); 1H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) 1.20 (s, 6H, 2×CH3), 3.05 (t, J=6.4 Hz, 2H, CH2S), 3.15 (s, 2H, CH2OTr), 3.69 (t, J=6.4 Hz, 2H, CH2OH), 7.3-7.9 (m, 15H, C6H5).
  • Phosphorus acid (10 eq, 4.1 g) was coevaporated two times with anhydrous pyridine, dissolved in that solvent (25 ml) and added to crude 4. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature and a white precipitate appeared after few minutes. The reaction mixture was cooled down to 0° C. and pivaloyl chloride (5.5 eq, 3.4 ml) was added. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for 3 h. The reaction was stopped by addition of a solution of triethylammonium bicarbonate (TEAB 1M, 10 ml) and diluted with ethyl acetate (EtOAc). After extraction with EtOAc and TEAB 0.5M, the organic phases were combined, dried over sodium sulphate, filtered and evaporated to dryness (bath temperature not exceeding 30° C.). The residue was purified by flash column chromatography eluting with 10% of methanol in methylene chloride+1% triethylamine. Evaporation of the fractions afforded the H-phosphonate monoester 5 as a white syrup (90%). Rf=0.25 (70% Et2O in petroleum ether); 1H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) 1.17 (m, 2×CH3+excess (CH3CH2)3N), 2.9 (m, excess (CH3CH2)3N), 3.12 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 2H, CH2S), 3.37 (s, 2H, CH2OTr), 3.90 (m, 2H, CH2OP), 7.2-7.6 (m, 15H, C6H5), 9.9 (m, excess (CH3CH2)3NH); 31P-NMR (161 MHz, CDCl3) 3.85 (s).
  • Synthesis of Hydroxy-tBuSATE N-benzylphosphoroamidate derivative of 2′-C-methylcytidine: The following two strategies were used for the synthesis:
  • Strategy A Synthesis of the Protected Nucleoside 7
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00079
  • A mixture of 2′C-methylcytidine (NM107) (10 g, 39.0 mmol), triethyl orthoformate (8.3 eq, 54 ml) and p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (1 eq, 7.4 g) in anhydrous acetone (650 ml), was refluxed overnight under nitrogen atmosphere. The reaction mixture was neutralized with an aqueous ammonia solution (26%) and the precipitate filtered. The filtrate was evaporated under reduced pressure and coevaporated with ethanol. Purification of the crude mixture on silica gel column chromatography (eluant: stepwise gradient [0-10%] of methanol in methylene chloride) led to compound 6 as a pale-yellow solid (86%). Rf=0.30 (20% MeOH in methylene chloride), 1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) 1.06 (s, 3H, CH3), 1.33 (s, 3H, CH3), 1.47 (s, 3H, CH3), 3.6 (m, 2H, H-5′, H-5″), 4.1 (m, 1H, H-4′), 4.41 (d, 1H, H-3′, J=3.2 Hz), 5.16 (t, 1H, OH-5′, J=4.0 Hz, D2O exchangeable), 5.69 (d, 1H, H-5, J=8.0 Hz), 6.04 (s, 1H, H-1′), 7.14-7.19 (bd, 2H, NH2, D2O exchangeable), 7.74 (d, 1H, H-6, J=8.0 Hz); LC/MS Scan ES− 296 (M−H), Scan ES+ 298 (M+H)+, λmax=280.7 nm.
  • Compound 6 (4.4 g, 14.8 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous pyridine (74 ml) and chlorotrimethylsilane (3 eq, 5.4 ml) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature under nitrogen atmosphere for 2 h, then 4,4′-dimethoxytrityl chloride (1.5 eq, 7.5 g) and 4-dimethylaminopyridine (0.5 eq, 900 mg) were successively added. The reaction mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature, then quenched with a saturated aqueous NaHCO3 solution. The crude product was extracted with methylene chloride, washed with saturated aq NaHCO3 solution, and water. The combined organic phases were concentrated under reduced pressure, then dissolved in a mixture of dioxan (160 ml) and aqueous ammonia (28%, 29 ml). The solution was heated at 70° C. for 3 h and evaporated to dryness. The crude mixture was purified on silica gel column chromatography (eluant: stepwise gradient of methanol [1-5%] in methylene chloride) to give protected nucleoside 7 as a yellow solid (81%). Rf=0.16 (30% EtOAc in CH2Cl2) 1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) 1.03 (s, 3H, CH3), 1.30 (s, 3H, CH3), 1.42 (s, 3H, CH3), 3.5 (m, 2H, H-5′, H-5″), 3.71 (s, 6H, 2×OCH3), 4.0 (d, 1H, H-4′, J=3.2 Hz), 4.36 (d, 1H, H-3′, J=2.8 Hz), 5.1 (m, 1H, OH-5′, D2O exchangeable), 5.90 (s, 1H, H-1′), 6.2 (m, 1H, H-5), 6.8-7.2 (m, 13H, DMTr), 7.6 (m, 1H, H-6), 8.32 (s, 1H, NH, D2O exchangeable); LC/MS Scan ES− 598 (M−H), λmax1=231.7 nm, λmax2=283.7 mm.
  • Synthesis of the Pronucleotide 10
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00080
  • Compounds 7 (2.0 g, 3.34 mmol) and 5 (2.2 eq, 4.3 g) were coevaporated together with anhydrous pyridine and dissolved in this solvent (50 ml). Pivaloyl chloride (2.5 eq, 1 ml) was added dropwise and the solution stirred at room temperature for 2h30. The reaction mixture was diluted with methylene chloride and neutralized with an aqueous solution of ammonium chloride (NH4Cl 0.5M). After extraction with methylene chloride/aq NH4Cl 0.5M, the organic phases were combined, evaporated under reduced pressure (bath temperature not exceeding 30° C.) and coevaporated with toluene. The crude mixture was purified on silica gel column chromatography (eluant: stepwise gradient [0-5%] of methanol in methylene chloride+2‰ acetic acid) to afford the desired product 8 which was coevaporated with toluene to give a beige foam (94%). Rf=0.63 (5% MeOH in CH2Cl2); 1H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) 1.21 (m, 9H, 3 CH3), 1.42 (s, 3H, CH3), 1.60 (s, 3H, CH3), 3.13 (m, 2H, CH2S), 3.17 (m, 2H, CH2OTr), 3.79 (s, 6H, 2×OCH3), 4.1 (m, 2H, CH2OP), 4.2-4.3 (m, 3H, H-5′, H-5″, H-4′), 5.09 (d, 1H, H-3′, J=7.6 Hz), 5.89 (d, 1H, H-5, J=5.6 Hz), 6.0 (m, 1H, H-1′), 6.8-7.7 (m, 29H, Tr, DMTr, H-6); 13P-NMR (161 MHz, CDCl3) 7.92, 8.55; LC/MS Scan ES+ 1066 (M+H)+, Scan ES− 1064 (M−H).
  • To a solution of compound 8 (3.4 g, 3.15 mmol) in anhydrous carbon tetrachloride (30 ml) was added dropwise benzylamine (10 eq, 3.4 ml). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1h30. A white precipitate appeared. The solution was diluted with methylene chloride and neutralized with an aqueous solution of hydrogen chloride (HCl 1M). After successive extractions with CH2Cl2/HCl 1M and CH2Cl2/aq NaHCO3, the organic phases were combined, dried over Na2SO4, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The crude mixture was purified on silica gel column chromatography (eluant: stepwise gradient [0-5%] of methanol in methylene chloride) to give 2 as a yellow foam (87%). Rf=0.35 (5% MeOH in methylene chloride); 1H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) 1.1-1.2 (m, 9H, 3 CH3), 1.40 (s, 3H, CH3), 1.59 (s, 3H, CH3), 2.9-3.2 (m, 4H, CH2OTr, CH2OS), 3.76 (s, 6H, 2×OCH3), 3.9-4.4 (m, 8H, CH2OP, CH2N, H-3′, H-4′, H-5′, H-5″), 5.0 (m, 1H, H-5), 6.0 (2s, 1H, H-1′), 6.7-7.7 (m, 34H, Tr, DMTr, C6H5CH2, H-6); 13P-NMR (161 MHz, CDCl3) 8.40, 8.8.68; LC/MS Scan ES+ 1171 (M+H)+.
  • Finally, compound 9 (2.39 g, 2.04 mmol) was dissolved in a mixture of methylene chloride (10 ml) and an aqueous solution of trifluoroacetic acid (90%, 10 ml). The reaction mixture was stirred at 35-40° C. for 2 h, then diluted with ethanol (140 ml). The volatiles were evaporated under reduced pressure and coevaporated with ethanol. The crude mixture was purified by silica gel column chromatography (eluant: stepwise gradient of methanol [0-30%] in methylene chloride), followed by a purification on reverse phase chromatography (eluant: stepwise gradient of acetonitrile [0-50%] in water), to give the desired product 10 (B102) (1:1 mixture of diastereoisomers as judged by 31P-NMR, 36%) which was lyophilized from a mixture of dioxan/water. Rf=0.34 (15% MeOH in methylene chloride); 1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) 0.92 (s, 3H, CH3), 1.10 (s, 6H, 2×CH3), 3.0 (m, 2H, CH2S), 3.33 (m, 1H, H-3′), 3.56 (s, 2H, CH2OH), 3.8-4.0 and 4.05-4.25 (stacks, 7H, CH2OP, NCH2Ph, H-4′, H-5′ and H-5″), 4.9 (m, 1H, OH-3′, J=5.4 Hz, D2O exchangeable), 5.07 (s, 1H, OH-2′, D2O exchangeable), 5.3 (m, 1H, CH2OH, D2O exchangeable), 5.6-5.7 (m, 2H, H-5 and NH, D2O exchangeable), 5.91 (s, 1H, H-1′), 7.3-7.4 (stack, 7H, PhH, NH2, D2O exchangeable), 7.6 (m, 1H, H-6); 13P-NMR (161 MHz, DMSO-d6) 9.71, 9.91; HPLC tR=4.67 min (0-100% acetonitrile over a period of 8 min), λmax=274.9; LC/MS Scan ES+ 587 (M+H)+.
  • Strategy B
  • Synthesis of Protected Nucleoside 11
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00081
  • NM107 (10 g, 38.87 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous pyridine (194 ml) and chlorotrimethylsilane (4.5 eq, 21.6 ml) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature under nitrogen atmosphere for 2h30, then 4,4′-dimethoxytrityl chloride (1.5 eq, 19.8 g) and 4-dimethylaminopyridine (0.5 eq, 2.37 g) were successively added. The reaction mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature, then quenched with a saturated aqueous NaHCO3 solution. The crude product was extracted with methylene chloride, washed with saturated aq NaHCO3 solution, and water. The combined organic phases were concentrated under reduced pressure, then dissolved in tetrahydrofuran (110 ml). To that solution was added tetrabutylammonium fluoride 1M in THF (1 eq, 38.87 ml) and the reaction mixture was stirred for 30 min at room temperature. After extraction with EtOAc and water, the organic phases were collected and evaporated to dryness. The crude mixture was purified on silica gel column chromatography (eluant: stepwise gradient of methanol [0-10%] in methylene chloride) to give protected nucleoside 11 as a yellow solid (93%). Rf=0.32 (10% MeOH in CH2Cl2) 1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) 0.79 (s, 3H, CH3), 3.56 (m, 2H, H-5′, H-5″), 3.71 (s, 7H, 2×OCH3, H-4′), 5.0 (m, 4H, H-3′, OH-2′, OH-3′, OH-5′, D2O exchangeable), 5.72 (s, 1H, H-1′), 6.16 (m, 1H, H-5), 6.8-7.2 (m, 13H, DMTr), 7.82 (m, 1H, H-6), 8.24 (m, 1H, NH D2O exchangeable); LC/MS Scan ES− 560 (M+H)+, ES− 558 (M−H), λmax=284.7 nm.
  • Synthesis of Protected Phosphoroamidate Pronucleotide 13, Precursor of 10
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00082
  • Compound 11 (7 g, 12.5 mmol) and 5 (1.5 eq, 11.0 g) were coevaporated together with anhydrous pyridine and dissolved in this solvent (187 ml). Pivaloyl chloride (2.0 eq, 3.08 ml) was added dropwise at −15° C. and the solution stirred at this temperature for 1h30. The reaction mixture was diluted with methylene chloride and neutralized with an aqueous solution of ammonium chloride (NH4Cl 0.5M). After extraction with methylene chloride/aq NH4Cl 0.5M, the organic phases were combined, evaporated under reduced pressure (bath temperature not exceeding 30° C.) and coevaporated with toluene. The crude mixture was purified on silica gel column chromatography (eluant: stepwise gradient [0-5%] of methanol in methylene chloride+0.2% acetic acid) to afford the desired product 12 which was coevaporated with toluene to give a white foam (3.5 g, 27%). Rf=0.44 (5% MeOH in CH2Cl2); 1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO) 0.8 (m, 3H, CH3), 1.14 and 1.06 (2s, 6H, 2 CH3), 3.06 (m, 2H, CH2S), 3.16 (m, 2H, CH2OTr), 3.5 (m, 1H, H-3′), 3.70 (m, 6H, 2 OCH3), 3.90 (m, 1H, H-4′), 4.03 (m, 2H, CH2OP), 4.24 (m, 2H, H-5′, H-5″), 5.30 and 5.04 (2 ms, 2H, OH-2′ and OH-3′, D2O exchangeable), 5.78 (m, 1H, H-1′), 5.98 (m, 1H, P—H), 6.22 (m, 1H, H-5), 7.0-7.5 (m, 16H, Tr), 8.32 (m, 1H, H-6); 13P-NMR (161 MHz, DMSO) 9.17, 9.65; LC/MS Scan ES+ 1026 (M+H)+, λmax=282.7 nm.
  • To a solution of compound 12 (500 mg, 0.49 mmol) in anhydrous carbon tetrachloride (4.9 ml) was added dropwise benzylamine (5 eq, 0.266 ml). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 h and the solvent removed under reduced pressure. The crude mixture was purified on silica gel column chromatography (eluant: stepwise gradient [0-5%] of methanol in methylene chloride) to afford compound 13 as a foam (75%). Rf=0.25 (3% MeOH in methylene chloride); 1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO) 0.79 (s, 3H, CH3), 1.13 and 1.06 (2s, 6H, 2 CH3), 3.05 (m, 4H, CH2OTr, CH2OS), 3.51 (m, 1H, H-3′), 3.69 (s, 6H, 2×OCH3), 3.87 (m, 3H, CH2OP, CH2N, H-3′), 4.08 (m, 2H, H-5′, H-5″), 5.19 and 5.0 (2m, 2H, OH-2′ and OH-3′, D2O exchangeable), 5.67 (m, 1H, NH, D2O exchangeable), 5.75 (2s, 1H, H-1′), 6.21 (m, 1H, H-5), 6.7-7.5 (m, 34H, Tr, DMTr, C6H5CH2, H-6); 13P-NMR (161 MHz, DMSO) 9.84, 9.69; LC/MS Scan ES+ 1132 (M+H)+.
  • Compound 13 can be converted into the phosphoroamidate prodrug 10 (B102) following experimental conditions described for the last step of NM108- and NM105-OH-SATE phosphoroamidate synthesis, in Examples 3 and 4, respectively.
  • Example 3 Preparation of Hyrdoxy-t-BuSATE-N-Benzylphosphoramidate Derivative of 2′-C-Methylguanosine
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00083
  • Synthetic Strategy:
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00084
    Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00085
  • 2′-C-methylguanidine (NM108) (3 g, 10.10 mmol) and compound 5 (6.48 g, 11.10 mmol) were coevaporated together with anhydrous pyridine and dissolved in this solvent (152 mL). Pivaloyl chloride (2.48 mL, 20.18 mmol) was added dropwise at −15° C. and the solution was stirred at the same temperature for 2 h. The reaction mixture was diluted with methylene chloride and neutralized with an aqueous solution of ammonium chloride (NH4Cl 0.5M). After extraction with methylene chloride/aq NH4Cl 0.5M, the organic phases were combined, dried over Na2SO4 evaporated under reduce pressure (bath temperature not exceeding 30° C.) and coevaporated twice with toluene. The crude mixture was purified on silica gel flash column chromatography (eluant: stepwise gradient [0-10%] of methanol in methylene chloride+0.2% acetic acid) to afford the desired product 6 (2.5 g, 32%). Rf=0.34 (15% MeOH in CH2Cl2); 1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6 0.80 (s, 3H, CH3), 1.13 (s, 6H, 2×CH3), 3.04 (m, 2H, CH2OTr), 3.14 (m, 2H, CH2S), 3.97-4.08 (m, 4H, H-3′, H-4′, CH2OP), 4.28-4.38 (m, 2H, H-5′, H-5″), 5.10-5.35 (m, 2H, OH-2′, OH-3′, D2O exchangeable), 5.77 (s, 1H, H-1′), 6.52 (bs, 2H, NH2, D2O exchangeable), 7.11-7.42 (m, 15H, Tr), 7.75 (s, 1H, H-8), 10.67 (bs, 1H, NH, D2O exchangeable); 13P-NMR (161 MHz, DMSO-d6) 9.47, 9.20; LC/MS Scan ES+ 764 (M+H)+, Scan ES− 762 (M−H).
  • To a solution of compound 6 (2.5 g, 3.27 mmol) in anhydrous carbon tetrachloride (33 mL) was added dropwise benzylamine (5 eq, 1.79 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h and evaporated under reduced pressure (bath temperature not exceeding 30° C.). The crude mixture was purified on silica gel flash column chromatography (eluant: stepwise gradient [0-10%] of methanol in methylene chloride) to give compound 7 as a white foam (2.9 g, quantitative yield). Rf=0.27 (10% MeOH in methylene chloride); 1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) 0.81 (s, 3H, CH3), 1.10 (s, 6H, 2×CH3), 2.99-3.08 (m, 4H, CH2OTr, CH2S), 3.87-4.30 (m, 8H, H-3′, H-4′, H-5′, H-5″ CH2OP, NCH2Ph), 5.66 (m, 1H, NH, D2O exchangeable), 5.76 (s, 1H, H-1′), 6.60 (bs, 2H, NH2, D2O exchangeable), 7.17-7.39 (m, 20H, Tr, C6H5CH2), 7.77 (s, 1H, H-8); 13P-NMR (161 MHz, DMSO-d6) 9.93, 9.78; LC/MS Scan ES+ 869 (M+H)+, Scan ES− 867 (M−H).
  • Compound 7 (2.84 g, 3.27 mmol) was dissolved in a mixture of trifluoroacetic acid (1.1 mL) and methylene chloride (11.4 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred 0.5 h at room temperature. The solution was diluted with ethanol, evaporated under reduce pressure (bath temperature not exceeding 30° C.) and coevaporated twice with toluene. The crude mixture was purified on silica gel flash column chromatography (eluant: stepwise gradient [0-30%] of methanol in methylene chloride) and then, on reverse phase column chromatography (eluant: stepwise gradient [0-100%] of acetonitrile in water) to give the desired product 8 (B184) (1:1 mixture of diastereoisomers according to 31P-NMR, 800 mg, 39%) which was lyophilized from a mixture of dioxan/water. Rf=0.57 (20% MeOH in methylene chloride); 1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) 0.82 (s, 3H, CH3), 1.09 (s, 6H, 2×CH3), 3.01 (m, 2H, CH2S), 3.42 (d, 2H, CH2OH, J=8.0 Hz), 3.81-4.00 (m, 6H, H-3′, H-4′ CH2OP, NCH2Ph), 4.11-4.27 (m, 2H, H-5′, H-5″), 4.92 (t, 1H, CH2OH, J=8.0 Hz, D2O exchangeable), 5.16 (s, 1H, OH-2′, D2O exchangeable), 5.40 (m, 1H, OH-3′, D2O exchangeable), 5.64 (m, 1H, NH, D2O exchangeable), 5.75 (s, 1H, H-1′), 6.50 (bs, 2H, NH2 D2O exchangeable), 7.19-7.32 (m, 5H, PhH), 7.77 (s, 1H, H-8), 10.61 (bs, 1H, NH, D2O exchangeable); 13P-NMR (161 MHz, DMSO-d6) 9.91, 9.78; HPLC tR=3.67 min (0-100% acetonitrile over a period of 8 min), λmax=251.3; LC/MS Scan ES+ 627 (M+H)+, Scan ES− 625 (M−H).
  • Example 4
  • A anti-cancer drug, R—OH, such as an antiviral nucleoside, having a free OH group, is derivatized to form a phosphoramidate compound according to the following scheme. Reactive groups on the molecule, such as other hydroxyl groups, are protected using methods known in the art.
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00086
  • Example 5
  • A phosphoroamidate of 5-azacytidine is prepared as follows:
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00087
  • Examples 6-10 illustrate by way of example the effect of the phosphoroamidate group on an antiviral compound to promote liver specific delivery of an active agent to liver cells.
  • Example 6 Preparation of Calibration Curve
  • Measurements of the concentration of 2′-3′-dideoxyadenosine-5′-triphosphate (ddATP) (the triphosphate nucleotide of 2′-3′-dideoxyadenosine (ddA) are performed by liquid chromatography tandem mass spectrometry (LC/MS/MS), e.g., of methanolic extracts of hepatocytes.
  • The concentration of ddATP is measured by comparison to a standard curve. Working stock solutions of TP-ddA are prepared from a 100 μmol/μl stock solution in de-ionized water of ddATP (tetrasodium salt of >91% purity) purchased from Sigma Chemical Co as follows:
  • ddATP Working Stock Solutions and Preparation of Standard Curve for ddATP.
  • Stock Vol DIH2O Total
    conc taken vol vol Conc mol per
    pmol/μl μL μL μL pmol/μl 10 μl
    1. Working stock#1
    Test
    compound
    TP-ddA 100 2000 2000 4000 50.0 500
    2. Working stock#2
    Test article
    TP-ddA 100 1000 3000 4000 25.0 250
    3. Working stock#4 (prepared from stock#1)
    TP-ddA 100 500 3500 4000 12.5 125
    4. Working stock#5 (prepared from stock#1)
    TP-ddA 100 200 3800 4000 5.0 50
    5. Working stock#6 (prepared from stock#1)
    TP-ddA 100 100 3900 4000 2.5 25
    6. Working stock#7 (prepared from stock#1)
    TP-ddA 100 40 3960 4000 1.0 10
  • Internal standard (ISTD) working stock are prepared from a 0.50 mg/mL stock solution of 2-deoxyadenosine 5-triphosphate purchased from Sigma Chemical Co.
  • Stock
    conc Vol taken MeOH vol Total vol Conc Conc
    ISTD μg/mL μL μL μL μg/mL pmol/mL
    dATP 500 200 9800 10000 10 500
  • In some embodiments, calibration standards are prepared as follows using liver
  • Preparation of cal stds:
    std conc working working stock con working stock vol ISTD vol MeOH vol total vol
    cal std# pmol/ml liver wt G stock# pmol/μL uL uL uL uL
    Blk
    0 0.1 0 50 940 990
    #1 50 0.1 #5 5.0 10 50 940 1000
    #2 125 0.1 #4 12.5 10 50 940 1000
    #3 250 0.1 #3 25.0 10 50 940 1000
    #4 500 0.1 #2 50.0 10 50 940 1000
    #5 1000 0.1 #1 100.0 10 50 940 1000

    samples:
  • In some embodiments the following HPLC conditions are used for the HPLC MS, e.g. HPLC Tandem MS analysis instrument method:
  • HPLC is conducted on Phenomenex Luna Amino 3 μm 100 A, 30×2 mm column, with a mobile phase: A: 70% 10 mM NH4OAc 30% ACN pH 6.0; and B: 70% 1 mM NH4OAc 30% ACN pH 10.5 as follows:
  • Time Flow
    Step (min) (μl/min) A (%) B (%)
    Gradient elution program: 0  0 400 60  40
    1  1.1 400 60  40
    2  1.11 400 40  60
    3  2.11 400 30  70
    4  2.6 400 20  80
    5  3.1 400  0 100
    6  5.5 400  0 100
    7  5.51 400 60  40
    8 10 400 60  40
    Injection volume: 50 ul
    Flow rate to MS: 0.400 mL/min, no splitting of flow
    Multiple Reaction Monitoring (MRM) conditions: (API3000)
    Ionization Mode: Positive Ion Electrospray (ESI+)
    IonSpray Voltage (IS): 5000 V
    Temperature (TEM): 550° C.
    Turbo IS gas 8 L/min
    Nebulizer (NEB): 14
    CAD Gas Setting (CAD):  6
    Declustering potential (DP) 68 V
    Collision energy (CE) 27 eV
    Entrance/Exit potentials 10 V/11 V
    (EP/CXP)
    Compound Precursor ion => Product Ion
    ddA triphosphate 476.2 => 135.9
    ddA diphosphate 396.2 => 135.9
    dA triphosphate (ISTD) 460.2 => 135.9

    *Luna Amino column is directly connected on the inlet end to a “Security Guard” cartridge holder suitable for 2.1 mm Phenomenex columns, containing a C18 cartridge.
  • Example 7 In Vitro Phosphorylation in Hepatocytes
  • Primary hepatocytes (Rat, Cynomolgus Monkey or human) were seeded at 0.8×106 in a collagen-coated 12-well plate and allowed to attach 4-6 hours after which time the seeding medium was replaced with serum-free culture medium and cells allowed to acclimatize to the new medium overnight. On the next day, cells were exposed for 1, 4, 8 and 24 hours to test article A550 (NM204) at 10 and 50 μM prepared in fresh culture medium from stock solution in DMSO (final DMSO concentration was 0.1%). At each time point, an aliquot (500 μl) was collected and immediately added to 500 μl of acetonitrile and stored at −20° C. until analysis. The remaining exposure medium was removed and the cell monolayer (stuck to dish) washed 2 times with ice-cold PBS. Any remaining PBS was carefully removed by aspiration and cells were harvested by scraping in 1 mL 70% ice-cold methanol. Cell samples were placed overnight at −20° C. and cellular debris removed by centrifugation on the next day. The supernatants were removed and filtered prior to analysis by LC/MS. A standard curve was prepared by using untreated cells processed similarly except that prior to harvesting in 70% methanol, 10 μl of LddATP standard solutions prepared in methanol were added to the washed monolayers. These control samples were then processed and analyzed as described for test samples.
  • The results are shown below:
  • LddA-TP formation in hepatocytes
    LddA TP Levels (pmol/million cells)
    Rat Monkey Human
    A550
    (Ex 1) 10 μM
    Time (hour)
    1 159.5 287.5 161.5
    4 388.0 978.0 312.5
    8 468.5 1230.0 352.5
    24  422.0 344.0 366.0
    A550
    (Ex 1) 50 μM
    Time (hour)
    1 393.0 2085.0 682.5
    4 1212.0 5690.0 1480.0
    8 1590.0 6030.0 1930.0
    24  1505.0 3030.0 2062.5
  • As indicated from the data, significant levels of L-ddATP were detected in the hepatocytes. In monkeys, the levels appear to reach a maximum level at 8 hours followed by a rapid decline. In contrast, levels in both rat and human hepatocyte appear to level off after 8 hours.
  • Example 8 In Vivo Studies in Rat
  • Distribution of A550 (NM-204) (the compound of Example 1 (Hydroxy-tBuSATE N-benzylphosphoroamidate derivative of L-ddA) in the rat liver was evaluated following a single intravenous (I.V.) or oral administration of A550 (NM-204) at a dose of 20 (oral) or 10 (I.V.) mg/Kg body weight. The dose solutions were prepared on the same day prior to dose administration.
  • At the specified time point (1 and 3 hours for IV animals or 1, 3 and 8 hours for oral animals), each animal was euthanized by CO2 gas followed by exsanguination via the abdominal vein. Livers were collected immediately after sacrifice, flash frozen in liquid nitrogen, placed on dry ice, and later stored at −70° C., before being analyzed.
  • Preparation of Calibration Standards from Control Liver Extracts:
  • Control rat liver samples were taken from whole frozen livers (Bioreclamation, Inc. Hicksville, N.Y.) with the aid of a tissue coring utensil (Harris Unicore, 8.0 mm, VWR). Each ˜0.1 g sample was placed in individual 2 mL poly vials with 0.940 mL of 80% MeOH/20% DIH2O and homogenates were prepared using a mechanical tissue disruptor (Tissue Master, Omni-International, Inc, Marietta Ga.). The vials received a 10 μl aliquot of a working stock solution and a 50 μl aliquot of the ISTD before vortexing for ˜30 sec. The mixtures were stored overnight at −20° C. and the next day were removed for 10 min of centrifugation in a benchtop centrifuge. Each supernatant was transferred to individual centrifugation filtration units (0.45 μm) and the resulting filtrates were transferred to HPLC vials for the LC/MS/MS analysis. The final concentrations of ddATP in the calibration standards was 1000, 500, 250, 125, 50, and 0 pmol/ml. Each calibration standard was directly injected in a 50 μL volume onto the ion-exchange column for analysis. Standard curve analysis of calibration standards from control liver extracts was conducted.
  • Analysis of ddATP was done by an ion-exchange chromatography method with on-line positive ionization ESI-MS/MS detection in multiple reaction monitoring (MRM) detection mode. The peak areas obtained for 4 of the 5 calibrants allowed for construction of a standard curve that demonstrated good linearity (R2=0.9996) over a 50-1000 μmol/ml concentration range. This is equivalent to a range of 5-100 μmol per gram liver by the sample preparation employed. The HPLC MS MS conditions described in Example 5 were utilized. The lower limit of quantitation demonstrated by the LC/MS/MS method is e.g., ˜0.2 pmol/mL for hepatocyte cellular extracts which contain much less salt.
  • The results showing intracellular levels of A550 (NM204) (showing the compound entered the liver cells) and LddATP (showing cleaving of the phosphoroamidate moiety and triphosphorylation of the ddA to the active triphosphate in the liver) are shown below:
  • A550 (Ex 1) and LddATP measured in livers of male rats dosed IV or
    O with A550 (Ex 1)
    Concentration Concentration.
    Compound ddA-TP
    (Ex 1) Timepoint (pmol/ (pmol/106
    Animal Number (pmol/g liver) (hrs) g liver) cells)*
    IV dose (10 mg/kg)
    1M1 65.8 1 2025 17.8
    1M2 89.1 1 1930 16.9
    1M3 85.1 1 1355 11.9
    Mean 80.0 1770 15.5
    IV dose (10 mg/kg)
    2M1 28.3 3 1345 11.8
    2M2 26.0 3 1940 17.0
    2M3 29.3 3 2990 26.2
    Mean 27.9 2092 18.3
    Oral dose (20 mg/kg)
    3M1 411 1 210 1.8
    3M2 272 1 575 5.0
    3M3 70.2 1 400 3.5
    Mean 251 395 3.5
    Oral dose (20 mg/kg)
    4M1 360 3 200 1.8
    4M2 92.1 3 330 2.9
    4M3 161 3 405 3.6
    Mean 204 312 2.7
    Oral dose (20 mg/kg)
    5M1 16.4 8 280 2.5
    5M2 28 8 805 5.2
    5M3 16.2 8 275 2.4
    Mean 20.1 382 3.3
    *Hepatocellularity number for rat was 114 × 106 cells per gram liver (Toxicology in Vitro 20 (2005) 1582-1586.
  • Thus, these results show that the compound can be used to enhance concentration of the drug in the liver. These results also show the enhanced concentration of the active triphosphate which is formed in the liver cells.
  • Example 9 Determination of Total Metabolism in Liver Subcellular Fractions Depletion of Parent
  • NADPH Incubations. Microsomal or S9 incubations were conducted in a final volume of 0.5 mL. Pooled liver microsomal or S9 protein (1.0 mg/mL), suspended in incubation buffer (100 mM potassium phosphate, pH 7.4, 5 mM MgCl2, and 0.1 mM EDTA) was preincubated for 5 min at 37° C. with 10-50 μM OHSATE phosphoroamidate compound from a stock solution in DMSO (final DMSO concentration was 0.1%); the reaction was initiated by the addition of NADPH (3 mM final concentration). Incubations with no NADPH served as controls. At specific times (0-120 min), 0.1 mL samples were taken and the reaction terminated by the addition of 1 volume of stop solution (acetonitrile). The samples were vortex for 30 sec and then centrifuged at 1500 g for 10 min. The supernatant was transferred to HPLC glass vials and analyzed without further processing by HPLC. FIGS. 1 and 2 depict depletion of NM108 SATE and NM107 SATE, respectively, after incubation with NADPH in monkey liver S9.
  • HPLC System for Medium Samples-Unchanged Prodrug
  • HPLC: Agilent 1100
    Column: Phenomenex Luna C18(2), 20 × 2 mm,
    Mobile phases (MP): MP(A) 10 mM K2HPO4 pH5, MP(B) ACN
    Gradient elution: 20 to 63% MP(B) run from 0 to 30 min
    Runtime: 20 min
    Flow rate: 1 mL/min
    Injection volume: 10-20 μL
    UV: 252 nm-NM108SATE
    272 nm-NM107SATE
  • Thus, without being limited to any theory, since the metabolism is NADPH dependent, it is possible that the phosphoroamidate compound is preferentially activated by Cytochrome P450 in the liver.
  • Example 10 Determination of Triphosphate Levels in Cells
  • Preparation of Primary Hepatocyte Cultures
  • Freshly isolated cells from animal and human liver were obtained in suspension on ice. Following receipt, cells were pelleted by centrifugation at 500 rpm (rat) or 700 rpm (monkey and human) and resuspended at 0.8 million cells per mL of platting medium (HPM). Multi-well collagen-coated plates (12-well) were then seeded by addition of 1 mL of cell suspention (0.8 million cells/mL). The plates were gently shaken to evenly distribute the cells and placed in an incubator at 37° C. for approximately 4 to 6 hours to allow cells to attach. Once cells have attached, the platting medium was removed and replaced with hepatocyte culture medium (HCM). Cells were left overnight in an incubator at 37° C. to acclimatize to culture and the medium.
  • Incubations with Test Article
  • Hepatocyte incubations were conducted in a final volume of 1.0 mL HCM/well (0.8 million cells/mL). HCM from overnight incubation of cells was removed and replaced with fresh HCM, pre-warmed to 37° C., containing 10 μM test article from a stock solution in DMSO (final DMSO concentration was 0.1%). At specific times (up to 24 hrs), incubation medium was discarded and the cell monolayers were carefully washed two times with ice-cold PBS. Following the last wash, all PBS was carefully removed and 1 mL of extraction buffer (ice-cold 70% methanol) was added. Each well was sealed with parafilm immediately following addition of methanol. Once the entire plate was processed, additional parafilm was placed on entire plate forming a double seal to prevent evaporation during the extraction process. The cover lid was then placed on the plate and sealed with tape. The plates were then stored at −20° C. for a minimum of 24 hrs to allow for extraction of intracellular contents.
  • Preparation of Huh7 or HepG2 Cultures
  • HepG2s or Huh7 cells were plated at 0.4×106 cells/well in collagen-coated 12-well plates. Cells were allowed to attach overnight. Culture medium from overnight incubation of cells was removed and replaced with fresh culture medium, pre-warmed to 37° C., containing 10 μM test article from a stock solution in DMSO (final DMSO concentration was 0.1%). After 24-72 hours, incubation medium was discarded and the cell monolayers were carefully washed two times with ice-cold PBS. Following the last wash, all PBS was carefully removed and 1 mL of extraction buffer (ice-cold 70% methanol) was added. Each well was sealed with parafilm immediately following addition of methanol. Once the entire plate was processed, additional parafilm was placed on entire plate forming a double seal to prevent evaporation during the extraction process. The cover lid was then placed on the plate and sealed with tape. The plates were then stored at −20° C. for a minimum of 24 hrs to allow for extraction of intracellular contents.
  • Sample Preparation for Analysis
  • Cellular extracts were prepared by transferring 0.9 mL of extract into 2 mL microfuge tubes followed by centrifugation for 5 min at 14,000 rpm. Approximately 100 μL of the supernatant was transferred to HPLC vials and triphosphate levels determined by LCMS/MS as described below.
  • HPLC conditions: NM107-triphosphate
  • HPLC:
    Column: Phenomenex Luna Amino 3 μm 100A,
    30 × 2 mm,
    Mobile phases (MP): (A) 70% 10 mM NH4OAc 30% ACN pH 6.0
    (B) 70% 1 mM NH4OAc 30% ACN pH 10.5
    Step Time Flow A B
    Gradient elution: 0 0.00 400 80  20
    1 0.10 400 80  20
    2 0.11 400 40  60
    3 0.21 400 40  60
    4 2.60 400 10  90
    5 2.61 400  0 100
    6 5.60 400  0 100
    7 5.61 400 80  20
    8 9.00 400 80  20
    Flow rate to MS: 0.400 mL/min, no split
    Injection volume: 10 μL
    Compound Precursor ion Product ion
    NM107 triphosphate 498.0 112.0
  • HPLC conditions: NM108-triphosphate
  • HPLC:
    Column: Phenomenex Luna Amino 3 pm 100A,
    30 × 2 mm,
    Mobile phases (MP): (A) 70% 10 mM NH4OAc 30% ACN pH 6.0
    (B) 70% 1 mM NH4OAc 30% ACN pH 10.5
    Step Time Flow A B
    Gradient elution: 0 0.00 400 60  40
    1 0.10 400 60  40
    2 0.11 400 40  60
    3 0.21 400 40  60
    4 2.60 400 10  90
    5 2.61 400  0 100
    6 5.61 400  0 100
    7 5.61 400 60  40
    8 9.00 400 60  40
    Flow rate to MS: 0.400 mL/min, no split
    Injection volume: 10 μL
    Compound Precursor ion Product ion
    NM108 triphosphate 538.0 152.0
  • Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00088
  • NM107 triphosphate levels and B102 in cell extracts were observed as follows:
  • Intracellular Triphosphate
    (pmol/million cells)
    drug in culture Human Monkey HepG2* Huh7*
    B102 (Ex. 2) 991 1838 1.5 9.2
    NM107 19 10 17 37
    24 hr incubation in 10 μM drug
    *72 hr incubation in 10 μM drug
  • As seen from the data levels of intracellular triphosphate for B102 (Ex. 2) were much higher as compared to those for NM107.
  • All publications and patent, applications cited in this specification are herein incorporated by reference as if each individual publication or patent application were specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference. While the claimed subject matter has been described in terms of various embodiments, the skilled artisan will

Claims (34)

1. A compound of formula
Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00089
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, a stereoisomeric, tautomeric or polymorphic form thereof, wherein:
Ry is optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, amino, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl;
Ra and Rb are selected as follows:
i) Ra and Rb are each independently hydrogen or optionally substituted alkyl, carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyarylalkyl, acyloxyalkyl, aminocarbonylalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl or heterocyclyl; or
ii) Ra and Rb together with the nitrogen atom on which they are substituted form a 3-7 membered heterocyclic or heteroaryl ring; and
R1 is a moiety derivable by removal of a hydrogen from a hydroxy group of an anti-cancer drug.
2. The compound of claim 1, having the formula:
Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00090
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, a stereoisomeric, tautomeric or polymorphic form thereof.
3. The compound of claim 1 having the formula:
Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00091
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, a stereoisomeric, tautomeric or polymorphic form thereof.
4. The compound of claim 1 having the formula:
Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00092
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, a stereoisomeric, tautomeric or polymorphic form thereof.
5. The compound of claim 1, wherein Ry is optionally substituted alkyl and Ra and Rb are each independently hydrogen or optionally substituted benzyl.
6. The compound of claim 5, wherein Ry is hydroxyalkyl or aminoalkyl.
7. The compound of claim 1, wherein Ry is —C(Rc)3 or —NHRc where each Rc is independently optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted aryl; and Ra and Rb are independently hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted arylalkyl.
8. The compound of claim 7, wherein Ra and Rb are each independently hydrogen or substituted alkyl.
9. The compound of claim 5, wherein Ry is selected from the group consisting of alkyl and hydroxyalkyl.
10. The compound of claim 9, wherein Ry is —C(CH3)2CH2OH.
11. The compound of claim 9, wherein Ra is hydrogen, Rb is benzyl and Ry is —C(CH3)2CH2OH.
12. The compound of any of claims 1, wherein R1 is Aclarubicin, Decitabine, Daunorubicin, Dihydro-5-azacytidine, Doxorubicin, Epirubicin, Estramustine, Etoposide, Fludarabine, Neplanocin A, Tezacitabine, Troxacitabine, Vinblastin, Vincristin, Vindesin, Teniposide, NK-611, Camptothecin, Irinotecan, 9-Aminocamptothecin, Topotecan, Paclitaxel, Azatoxin, Coformycin, Pirarubicin, or Losoxantrone.
13. A compound of formula:
Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00093
Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00094
wherein
each R, if present, is independently alkyl, halogen or hydroxyl;
X, if present, is CH2, O or S;
Ry is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aryl alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, amino, aminoalkyl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl, all optionally substituted;
Ra and Rb are selected as follows:
i) Ra and Rb are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyarylalkyl, acyloxyalkyl, aminocarbonylalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, aryl, aryl alkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl or heterocyclyl, all optionally substituted; or
ii) Ra and Rb together with the nitrogen atom on which they are substituted form a 3-7 membered heterocyclic or heteroaryl ring.
14. The compound of claim 13, wherein
each R, if present, is independently alkyl, halogen or hydroxyl;
X, if present, is CH2, O or S;
Ry is optionally substituted alkyl, wherein the substituents when present are hydroxy or amino; and
Ra and Rb are each independently hydrogen or alkyl, wherein the alkyl group is optionally substituted with aryl, amino, amido, hydroxyl, alkoxy or heteroaryl, each optionally substituted.
15. The compound of claim 13, wherein Ra and Rb are each independently H or benzyl, wherein the benzyl group is optionally substituted with hydroxy or amino.
16. The compound of claim 13, wherein Ry is substituted alkyl and Ra and Rb are each independently hydrogen or optionally substituted benzyl.
17. The compound of claim 16, wherein Ry is hydroxyalkyl or aminoalkyl.
18. The compound of claim 13, wherein Ry is —C(Rc)3 or —NHRc where each Rc is independently optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted aryl; and Ra and Rb are independently hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted arylalkyl.
19. The compound of claim 17, wherein Ry is —C(CH3)2CH2OH.
20. The compound of claim 19, wherein Ra and Rb are each independently hydrogen or substituted alkyl.
21. The compound of claim 13, wherein Ra is hydrogen, Rb is benzyl and Ry is —C(CH3)2CH2OH.
22. The compound of claim 13 having the structure:
Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00095
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, a stereoisomeric, tautomeric or polymorphic form thereof.
23. A compound selected from formula:
Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00096
wherein
Rx and Rz are each independently hydrogen or optionally substituted alkyl;
Rw is optionally substituted alkyl;
X1 is O or S;
Ry is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, amino, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl, all optionally substituted;
Ra and Rb are selected as follows:
i) Ra and Rb are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyarylalkyl, acyloxyalkyl, aminocarbonylalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl or heterocyclyl, all optionally substituted; or
ii) Ra and Rb together with the nitrogen atom on which they are substituted form a 3-7 membered heterocyclic or heteroaryl ring.
24. The compound of claim 23, wherein Ry is optionally substituted alkyl, wherein the substituents when present are selected from hydroxy and amino.
25. The compound of claim 24, wherein Ry is —C(CH3)2CH2OH.
26. The compound of claim 25, wherein Ra is hydrogen and Rb is benzyl.
27. The compound of claim 26 having formula selected from:
Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00097
Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00098
28. The compound of claim 27 having formula:
Figure US20080261913A1-20081023-C00099
29. A method of treating cancer comprising administering a compound of claim 1.
30. A method of lowering plasma lipid levels or lowering blood glucose levels comprising administering a compound of claim 13.
31. A method of lowering blood glucose levels comprising administering a compound of claim 23.
32. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of any of claims 1, 13 or 23 and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
33. The composition of claim 32 that is suitable for oral administration.
34. The composition of claim 33 wherein the composition is in the form of a pill or tablet.
US12/005,938 2006-12-28 2007-12-27 Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of liver disorders Abandoned US20080261913A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US12/005,938 US20080261913A1 (en) 2006-12-28 2007-12-27 Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of liver disorders

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US87794406P 2006-12-28 2006-12-28
US93629007P 2007-06-18 2007-06-18
US98589107P 2007-11-06 2007-11-06
US12/005,938 US20080261913A1 (en) 2006-12-28 2007-12-27 Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of liver disorders

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20080261913A1 true US20080261913A1 (en) 2008-10-23

Family

ID=39589128

Family Applications (5)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/005,938 Abandoned US20080261913A1 (en) 2006-12-28 2007-12-27 Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of liver disorders
US12/005,937 Active 2028-02-15 US7951789B2 (en) 2006-12-28 2007-12-27 Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
US12/150,327 Active 2028-12-27 US7902202B2 (en) 2006-12-28 2008-04-25 Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
US13/116,890 Active US8691788B2 (en) 2006-12-28 2011-05-26 Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
US14/197,078 Active US9249173B2 (en) 2006-12-28 2014-03-04 Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections

Family Applications After (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/005,937 Active 2028-02-15 US7951789B2 (en) 2006-12-28 2007-12-27 Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
US12/150,327 Active 2028-12-27 US7902202B2 (en) 2006-12-28 2008-04-25 Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
US13/116,890 Active US8691788B2 (en) 2006-12-28 2011-05-26 Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
US14/197,078 Active US9249173B2 (en) 2006-12-28 2014-03-04 Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections

Country Status (18)

Country Link
US (5) US20080261913A1 (en)
EP (2) EP2107909A4 (en)
JP (3) JP2010514769A (en)
KR (1) KR101508018B1 (en)
AU (1) AU2007339226B2 (en)
BR (1) BRPI0720637A2 (en)
CA (2) CA2673776A1 (en)
IL (1) IL200116A0 (en)
ME (1) ME00816B (en)
MX (1) MX2009006851A (en)
MY (1) MY169568A (en)
NO (1) NO20092585L (en)
NZ (1) NZ577999A (en)
RU (1) RU2525392C2 (en)
SG (1) SG177923A1 (en)
TW (2) TW200844108A (en)
UA (1) UA96975C2 (en)
WO (2) WO2008082602A2 (en)

Cited By (43)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20080286230A1 (en) * 2006-12-28 2008-11-20 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
US20100003217A1 (en) * 2008-07-02 2010-01-07 Erika Cretton-Scott Compounds and Pharmaceutical Compositions for the Treatment of Viral Infections
US8222257B2 (en) 2005-04-01 2012-07-17 The Regents Of The University Of California Phosphono-pent-2-en-1-yl nucleosides and analogs
WO2012051567A3 (en) * 2010-10-15 2012-12-06 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Obesity-related genes and their proteins and uses thereof
CN103012520A (en) * 2012-12-28 2013-04-03 中国科学院上海有机化学研究所 Anti-HBV (Hepatitis B Virus) active compound philippine indican derivative
US8507460B2 (en) 2011-10-14 2013-08-13 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Substituted 3′,5′-cyclic phosphates of purine nucleotide compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
WO2013123407A1 (en) * 2012-02-17 2013-08-22 Celsion Corporation Thermosensitive nanoparticle formulations and method of making the same
US8551973B2 (en) 2008-12-23 2013-10-08 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside analogs
US8680071B2 (en) 2010-04-01 2014-03-25 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
US8716262B2 (en) 2008-12-23 2014-05-06 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside phosphoramidates
US8716263B2 (en) 2008-12-23 2014-05-06 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Synthesis of purine nucleosides
US8759510B2 (en) 2008-06-11 2014-06-24 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside cyclicphosphates
US20140212355A1 (en) * 2013-01-28 2014-07-31 Abbott Cardiovascular Systems Inc. Trans-arterial drug delivery
US8859756B2 (en) 2010-03-31 2014-10-14 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Stereoselective synthesis of phosphorus containing actives
US8871737B2 (en) 2010-09-22 2014-10-28 Alios Biopharma, Inc. Substituted nucleotide analogs
US8916538B2 (en) 2012-03-21 2014-12-23 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Solid forms of a thiophosphoramidate nucleotide prodrug
US8980865B2 (en) 2011-12-22 2015-03-17 Alios Biopharma, Inc. Substituted nucleotide analogs
US9012427B2 (en) 2012-03-22 2015-04-21 Alios Biopharma, Inc. Pharmaceutical combinations comprising a thionucleotide analog
US20150139978A1 (en) * 2010-12-23 2015-05-21 Food Industry Research And Development Institute Novel monascuspurpurones, preparation process thereof, and uses of the monascuspurpurones
US9109001B2 (en) 2012-05-22 2015-08-18 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 3′,5′-cyclic phosphoramidate prodrugs for HCV infection
US9187515B2 (en) 2013-04-01 2015-11-17 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc 2′,4′-fluoro nucleosides for the treatment of HCV
US9192621B2 (en) 2012-09-27 2015-11-24 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc Esters and malonates of SATE prodrugs
US9211300B2 (en) 2012-12-19 2015-12-15 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc 4′-fluoro nucleosides for the treatment of HCV
US9243025B2 (en) 2011-03-31 2016-01-26 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Llc Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
US9296778B2 (en) 2012-05-22 2016-03-29 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 3′,5′-cyclic phosphate prodrugs for HCV infection
WO2015181624A3 (en) * 2014-05-28 2016-03-31 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc Nucleoside derivatives for the treatment of cancer
US9309275B2 (en) 2013-03-04 2016-04-12 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc 3′-deoxy nucleosides for the treatment of HCV
US9339541B2 (en) 2013-03-04 2016-05-17 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Thiophosphate nucleosides for the treatment of HCV
US9403863B2 (en) 2011-09-12 2016-08-02 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc Substituted carbonyloxymethylphosphoramidate compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
US9422323B2 (en) 2012-05-25 2016-08-23 Janssen Sciences Ireland Uc Uracyl spirooxetane nucleosides
US9968628B2 (en) 2000-05-26 2018-05-15 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc Methods and compositions for treating flaviviruses and pestiviruses
US10005779B2 (en) 2013-06-05 2018-06-26 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc 1′,4′-thio nucleosides for the treatment of HCV
US10202411B2 (en) 2014-04-16 2019-02-12 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc 3′-substituted methyl or alkynyl nucleosides nucleotides for the treatment of HCV
US10231986B2 (en) 2013-03-13 2019-03-19 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc Amino acid phosphoramidate pronucleotides of 2′-cyano, azido and amino nucleosides for the treatment of HCV
US10238680B2 (en) 2013-08-01 2019-03-26 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc D-amino acid phosphoramidate pronucleotides of halogeno pyrimidine compounds for liver disease
US10363265B2 (en) 2000-05-23 2019-07-30 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc Methods and compositions for treating hepatitis C virus
US10513534B2 (en) 2012-10-08 2019-12-24 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc 2′-chloro nucleoside analogs for HCV infection
US10525072B2 (en) 2002-11-15 2020-01-07 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc 2′-branched nucleosides and flaviviridae mutation
KR20200011485A (en) * 2017-06-05 2020-02-03 바이킹 테라퓨틱스 인코포레이티드 Compositions for the Treatment of Fibrosis
US10717758B2 (en) 2012-05-22 2020-07-21 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc D-amino acid compounds for liver disease
US10723754B2 (en) 2012-10-22 2020-07-28 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc 2′,4′-bridged nucleosides for HCV infection
US11154591B2 (en) 2016-10-14 2021-10-26 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Methods of treating alcohol abuse disorder
US11787828B2 (en) 2018-03-22 2023-10-17 Viking Therapeutics, Inc. Crystalline forms and methods of producing crystalline forms of a compound

Families Citing this family (126)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR20090024834A (en) 2006-07-05 2009-03-09 인터뮨, 인크. Novel inhibitors of hepatitis c virus replication
BRPI0718358A2 (en) 2006-12-11 2014-10-07 Japan Science & Tech Agency PLANT GROWTH REGULATOR FOR INCREASING HARVEST RATE, METHOD FOR GROWING A PLANT, METHOD FOR INCREASING THE NUMBER OF SEEDS AND / OR FLOWERS, METHOD FOR INCREASING THE NUMBER OF BUTTONS AND A PLANT / HUT PLANTS .
US7964580B2 (en) 2007-03-30 2011-06-21 Pharmasset, Inc. Nucleoside phosphoramidate prodrugs
BRPI0811447A2 (en) 2007-05-10 2014-10-29 Intermune Inc COMPOUNDS, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION, AND METHODS OF INHIBITING NS3 / NS4 PROTEASE ACTIVITY, HEPATIC FIBROSIS TREATMENT AND HEPATIC FUNCTION INTENSIFICATION IN AN INDIVIDUAL HAVING HEPATITIS C VIRUS INFECTION.
GB0709791D0 (en) * 2007-05-22 2007-06-27 Angeletti P Ist Richerche Bio Antiviral agents
WO2009113684A1 (en) 2008-03-14 2009-09-17 トヨタ自動車株式会社 Gene increasing plant biomass amount and/or seed amount and method of using the same
MX2010011306A (en) 2008-04-15 2010-11-09 Intermune Inc Novel macrocyclic inhibitors of hepatitis c virus replication.
CA2722177C (en) 2008-04-23 2016-08-16 Gilead Sciences, Inc. 1'-substituted carba-nucleoside analogs for antiviral treatment
PE20120013A1 (en) * 2009-01-09 2012-02-02 Univ Cardiff GUANOSINE-DERIVED PHOSPHORAMIDATE NUCLEOSIDE COMPOUNDS FOR TREATMENT OF VIRAL INFECTIONS
PE20160858A1 (en) 2009-02-10 2016-09-03 Gilead Sciences Inc CARBA-NUCLEOSIDIC ANALOGS FOR ANTIVIRAL TREATMENT
AR075584A1 (en) 2009-02-27 2011-04-20 Intermune Inc THERAPEUTIC COMPOSITIONS THAT INCLUDE beta-D-2'-DESOXI-2'-FLUORO-2'-C-METHYLYCTIDINE AND A CARDIEX ISOINDOL ACID DERIVATIVE AND ITS USES. COMPOUND.
JP5604657B2 (en) 2009-03-12 2014-10-08 トヨタ自動車株式会社 Gene for increasing production of biomass and / or seed of plant and method for using the same
US8618076B2 (en) 2009-05-20 2013-12-31 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside phosphoramidates
TWI576352B (en) 2009-05-20 2017-04-01 基利法瑪席特有限責任公司 Nucleoside phosphoramidates
JP5250807B2 (en) 2009-09-11 2013-07-31 トヨタ自動車株式会社 Method for increasing the biomass amount and / or seed amount of a plant, and method for producing a plant capable of increasing the biomass amount and / or seed amount
PE20210668A1 (en) 2009-09-21 2021-04-05 Gilead Sciences Inc CARBA-NUCLEOSID ANALOGS REPLACED WITH 2'-FLUORINE ANTIVIRALS
MX2012003126A (en) 2009-09-21 2012-06-19 Gilead Sciences Inc Processes and intermediates for the preparation of 1'-substituted carba-nucleoside analogs.
US7973013B2 (en) 2009-09-21 2011-07-05 Gilead Sciences, Inc. 2'-fluoro substituted carba-nucleoside analogs for antiviral treatment
WO2011063076A1 (en) 2009-11-19 2011-05-26 Itherx Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods of treating hepatitis c virus with oxoacetamide compounds
AU2010333656B2 (en) 2009-12-18 2015-08-27 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh HCV combination therapy
CN102917706A (en) * 2010-05-18 2013-02-06 富光药品株式会社 Composition for treating chronic hepatitis B, containing clevudine and adefovir dipivoxil
JP5937073B2 (en) 2010-07-19 2016-06-22 ギリード・サイエンシズ・インコーポレーテッド Process for the preparation of diastereomeric pure phosphoramidate prodrugs
SI2595980T1 (en) 2010-07-22 2014-11-28 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods and compounds for treating paramyxoviridae virus infections
US9394313B2 (en) 2010-09-14 2016-07-19 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Transfer hydrogenation of cyclopamine analogs
KR101879887B1 (en) 2010-09-20 2018-07-18 길리애드 사이언시즈, 인코포레이티드 2'-fluoro substituted carba-nucleoside analogs for antiviral treatment
WO2012048013A2 (en) * 2010-10-06 2012-04-12 Inhibitex, Inc. Phosphorodiamidate derivatives of guanosine nucleoside compounds for treatment of viral injections
AU2011336632B2 (en) 2010-11-30 2015-09-03 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Compounds
EP2658857B1 (en) * 2010-12-29 2016-11-02 Inhibitex, Inc. Substituted purine nucleosides, phosphoroamidate and phosphorodiamidate derivatives for treatment of viral infections
US9095599B2 (en) 2011-01-03 2015-08-04 Nanjing Molecular Research, Inc. O-(substituted benzyl) phosphoramidate compounds and therapeutic use
US9156874B2 (en) 2011-01-03 2015-10-13 Nanjing Molecular Research, Inc. Double-liver-targeting phosphoramidate and phosphonoamidate prodrugs
JP6253991B2 (en) * 2011-03-02 2017-12-27 ジェローム シェンターク, Composition, therapy and diagnostic method for the treatment of hepatic steatosis alone or with hepatitis C virus infection
US20120252721A1 (en) 2011-03-31 2012-10-04 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods for treating drug-resistant hepatitis c virus infection with a 5,5-fused arylene or heteroarylene hepatitis c virus inhibitor
EP2697242B1 (en) 2011-04-13 2018-10-03 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. 2'-azido substituted nucleoside derivatives and methods of use thereof for the treatment of viral diseases
KR20140019832A (en) * 2011-04-13 2014-02-17 길리애드 사이언시즈, 인코포레이티드 1'-substituted pyrimidine n-nucleoside analogs for antiviral treatment
BR112013026345A2 (en) 2011-04-13 2019-04-24 Merck Sharp & Dohe Corp. compound, pharmaceutical composition, use of a compound, and method for treating an hcv infected patient
EP2755985B1 (en) * 2011-09-12 2017-11-01 Idenix Pharmaceuticals LLC Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
HUE036588T2 (en) 2011-09-16 2018-07-30 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Methods for treating hcv
DE112012003457T5 (en) 2011-10-21 2015-03-12 Abbvie Inc. Combination treatment (e.g., with ABT-072 or ABT-333 from DAAs for use in the treatment of HCV)
US8466159B2 (en) 2011-10-21 2013-06-18 Abbvie Inc. Methods for treating HCV
EA201490837A1 (en) 2011-10-21 2014-11-28 Эббви Инк. METHODS OF TREATING HCV, INCLUDING, AT THE LITERATURE, TWO ANTI-VIRAL AGENTS OF DIRECT ACTION, RIBAVIRIN, BUT NOT INTERFERON
US8492386B2 (en) 2011-10-21 2013-07-23 Abbvie Inc. Methods for treating HCV
WO2013066991A1 (en) * 2011-10-31 2013-05-10 Inhibitex, Inc. Crystalline solvates of nucleoside phosphoroamidates, their stereoselective preparation, novel intermediates thereof, and their use in the treatment of viral disease
US8889159B2 (en) 2011-11-29 2014-11-18 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Compositions and methods for treating hepatitis C virus
WO2013084165A1 (en) * 2011-12-05 2013-06-13 Medivir Ab Hcv polymerase inhibitors
WO2013088956A1 (en) 2011-12-12 2013-06-20 岡山県 Compound for increasing amino acid content in plant, and use thereof
WO2013133927A1 (en) 2012-02-13 2013-09-12 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Pharmaceutical compositions of 2'-c-methyl-guanosine, 5'-[2-[(3-hydroxy-2,2-dimethyl-1-oxopropyl)thio]ethyl n-(phenylmethyl)phosphoramidate]
MD20140094A2 (en) 2012-02-14 2015-03-31 University Of Georgia Research Foundation, Inc. Spiro [2.4]heptanes for treatment of Flaviviridae infections
CN104640444B (en) * 2012-06-16 2016-12-14 河南美泰宝生物制药有限公司 Double liver target phosphoramidates and aminophosphonic acid ester prodrugs
CN103665043B (en) 2012-08-30 2017-11-10 江苏豪森药业集团有限公司 A kind of tenofovir prodrug and its application in medicine
WO2014058729A1 (en) * 2012-10-09 2014-04-17 California Institute Of Technology In vivo and in vitro carbene insertion and nitrene transfer reactions catalyzed by heme enzymes
EP2906518A4 (en) 2012-10-09 2016-07-27 California Inst Of Techn In vivo and in vitro olefin cyclopropanation catalyzed by heme enzymes
US9242988B2 (en) 2012-10-17 2016-01-26 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. 2′-cyano substituted nucleoside derivatives and methods of use thereof for the treatment of viral diseases
AR092959A1 (en) 2012-10-17 2015-05-06 Merck Sharp & Dohme DERIVATIVES OF NUCLEOSIDS 2-METHYL SUBSTITUTED AND METHODS OF USE OF THE SAME FOR THE TREATMENT OF VIRAL DISEASES
US9457039B2 (en) 2012-10-17 2016-10-04 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. 2′-disubstituted nucleoside derivatives and methods of use thereof for the treatment of viral diseases
CA2891125A1 (en) * 2012-11-19 2014-05-22 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. 2 -alkynyl substituted nucleoside derivatives for treating viral diseases
MY172166A (en) 2013-01-31 2019-11-15 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Combination formulation of two antiviral compounds
US9447132B2 (en) 2013-04-12 2016-09-20 Achillion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Highly active nucleoside derivative for the treatment of HCV
US9765107B2 (en) 2013-06-18 2017-09-19 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Cyclic phosphonate substituted nucleoside derivatives and methods of use thereof for the treatment of viral diseases
ES2685591T3 (en) 2013-06-26 2018-10-10 Alios Biopharma, Inc. Nucleosides, substituted nucleotides and analogues thereof
WO2014209979A1 (en) 2013-06-26 2014-12-31 Alios Biopharma, Inc. Substituted nucleosides, nucleotides and analogs thereof
EP4005560A1 (en) 2013-08-27 2022-06-01 Gilead Pharmasset LLC Combination formulation of two antiviral compounds
UA117375C2 (en) 2013-09-04 2018-07-25 Медівір Аб Hcv polymerase inhibitors
LT3043803T (en) 2013-09-11 2022-08-10 Emory University Nucleotide and nucleoside compositions and their uses
WO2015042375A1 (en) 2013-09-20 2015-03-26 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Hepatitis c virus inhibitors
SG11201602595TA (en) 2013-10-11 2016-04-28 Alios Biopharma Inc Substituted nucleosides, nucleotides and analogs thereof
US20160271160A1 (en) 2013-10-17 2016-09-22 Medivir Ab Hcv polymerase inhibitors
WO2015103989A1 (en) 2014-01-10 2015-07-16 Shanghai Birdie Biotech, Inc. Compounds and compositions for immunotherapy
US9399762B2 (en) 2014-02-18 2016-07-26 California Institute Of Technology Methods and systems for sulfimidation or sulfoximidation of organic molecules
US20170066779A1 (en) 2014-03-05 2017-03-09 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc Solid forms of a flaviviridae virus inhibitor compound and salts thereof
WO2015143712A1 (en) 2014-03-28 2015-10-01 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. 4'-substituted nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitors
US9669151B2 (en) 2014-04-17 2017-06-06 ImMutriX Therapeutics, Inc. Therapeutic compositions for viral-associated disease states and methods of making and using same
US11918728B2 (en) 2014-04-17 2024-03-05 ImMutriX Therapeutics, Inc. Therapeutic compositions for viral-associated disease states and methods of making and using same
HUE051986T2 (en) 2014-06-24 2021-04-28 Janssen Biopharma Inc Substituted nucleosides, nucleotides and analogs thereof for use in the treatment of viral infection
DK3166976T3 (en) 2014-07-09 2022-04-11 Birdie Biopharmaceuticals Inc ANTI-PD-L1 COMBINATIONS FOR TREATMENT OF TUMORS
EP3170829B1 (en) * 2014-07-18 2018-09-19 JW Pharmaceutical Corporation Novel salt of tenofovir disoproxil
CN112587672A (en) 2014-09-01 2021-04-02 博笛生物科技有限公司 anti-PD-L1 conjugates for the treatment of tumors
TWI740546B (en) 2014-10-29 2021-09-21 美商基利科學股份有限公司 Methods for the preparation of ribosides
EP3265102A4 (en) 2015-03-06 2018-12-05 ATEA Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Beta-d-2'-deoxy-2'alpha-fluoro-2'-beta-c-substituted-2-modified-n6-substituted purine nucleotides for hcv treatment
US10525073B2 (en) * 2015-04-26 2020-01-07 Mackay Memorial Hospital Method for improving kidney and/or heart function in patients with kidney disease
WO2017049060A1 (en) 2015-09-16 2017-03-23 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods for treating arenaviridae and coronaviridae virus infections
US10953029B2 (en) 2015-09-23 2021-03-23 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. 4′-Substituted nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitors and preparations thereof
RU2657833C2 (en) 2015-12-01 2018-06-15 Общество С Ограниченной Ответственностью "Остерос Биомедика" Stabilized dosage form of etidronate-cytarabine conjugate and its application
CN115252792A (en) 2016-01-07 2022-11-01 博笛生物科技有限公司 anti-EGFR combinations for the treatment of tumors
CN106943596A (en) 2016-01-07 2017-07-14 博笛生物科技(北京)有限公司 Anti-CD 20 for treating tumour is combined
EA201892448A1 (en) 2016-04-28 2019-06-28 Эмори Юниверсити ALKYN-CONTAINING NUCLEOTIDE AND NUCLEOSIDE THERAPEUTIC COMPOSITIONS AND RELATED APPLICATION METHODS
AU2017259960A1 (en) * 2016-05-02 2018-12-06 Paratek Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 9-aminomethyl minocycline compounds and methods of use thereof in urinary tract infection (UTI) treatment
CN109641874A (en) 2016-05-10 2019-04-16 C4医药公司 C for target protein degradation3The glutarimide degron body of carbon connection
WO2017197055A1 (en) 2016-05-10 2017-11-16 C4 Therapeutics, Inc. Heterocyclic degronimers for target protein degradation
WO2017197036A1 (en) 2016-05-10 2017-11-16 C4 Therapeutics, Inc. Spirocyclic degronimers for target protein degradation
US10899788B2 (en) 2016-06-20 2021-01-26 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Cyclic phosphate substituted nucleoside compounds and methods of use thereof for the treatment of viral diseases
JP7045669B2 (en) * 2016-06-21 2022-04-01 株式会社ジーンデザイン Method for synthesizing ribonucleic acid H-phosphonate monomer and oligonucleotide synthesis using this monomer
RU2632431C2 (en) * 2016-06-29 2017-10-04 Федеральное государственное бюджетное учреждение "Национальный медицинский исследовательский радиологический центр" Министерства здравоохранения Российской Федерации (ФГБУ "НМИРЦ" Минздрава России) Hydrogel for production of composite materials with antibacterial activity for osteochondral defects substitution by 3d-printing method
US10202412B2 (en) 2016-07-08 2019-02-12 Atea Pharmaceuticals, Inc. β-D-2′-deoxy-2′-substituted-4′-substituted-2-substituted-N6-substituted-6-aminopurinenucleotides for the treatment of paramyxovirus and orthomyxovirus infections
WO2018013937A1 (en) 2016-07-14 2018-01-18 Atea Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Beta-d-2'-deoxy-2'-alpha-fluoro-2'-beta-c-substituted-4'-fluoro-n6-substituted-6-amino-2-substituted purine nucleotides for the treatment of hepatitis c virus infection
EA030671B1 (en) 2016-07-20 2018-09-28 Общество С Ограниченной Ответственностью "Остерос Биомедика" Preparation for treating bone lesions caused by malignant neoplasms
KR20190043602A (en) 2016-09-07 2019-04-26 아테아 파마슈티컬즈, 인크. 2'-substituted-N6-substituted purine nucleotides for the treatment of RNA viruses
CA3042514A1 (en) 2016-11-01 2018-05-11 Paratek Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 9-aminomethyl minocycline compounds and use thereof in treating community-acquired bacterial pneumonia (cabp)
CA3040919A1 (en) 2016-11-07 2018-05-11 Arbutus Biopharma Corporation Substituted pyridinone-containing tricyclic compounds, and methods using same
US20190365788A1 (en) 2016-11-21 2019-12-05 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc Cyclic phosphate substituted nucleoside derivatives for the treatment of liver diseases
CN108276463A (en) * 2017-01-06 2018-07-13 米文君 A new class of compound and application thereof
SG11201906163TA (en) 2017-02-01 2019-08-27 Atea Pharmaceuticals Inc Nucleotide hemi-sulfate salt for the treatment of hepatitis c virus
EP4331677A2 (en) 2017-03-14 2024-03-06 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods of treating feline coronavirus infections
US11098010B2 (en) 2017-03-21 2021-08-24 Arbutus Biopharma Corporation Substituted dihydroindene-4-carboxamides and analogs thereof, and methods using same
CN108794467A (en) 2017-04-27 2018-11-13 博笛生物科技有限公司 2- amino-quinoline derivatives
EP3618929B1 (en) 2017-05-01 2022-12-07 Gilead Sciences, Inc. A crystalline form of (s) 2 ethylbutyl 2 (((s) (((2r,3s,4r,5r) 5 (4 aminopyrrolo[2,1-f][1,2,4]triazin-7-yl)-5-cyano-3,4-dihydroxytetrahydrofuran-2 yl)methoxy)(phenoxy) phosphoryl)amino)propanoate
GB201709471D0 (en) * 2017-06-14 2017-07-26 Nucana Biomed Ltd Diastereoselective synthesis of hosphate derivatives
CA3067268A1 (en) 2017-06-23 2018-12-27 Birdie Biopharmaceuticals, Inc. Crystalline resiquimod monosulfate anhydrate and its preparation and uses
US10675296B2 (en) 2017-07-11 2020-06-09 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Compositions comprising an RNA polymerase inhibitor and cyclodextrin for treating viral infections
US10688112B2 (en) 2017-07-13 2020-06-23 Emory University Lipid disulfide prodrugs and uses related thereto
US11040975B2 (en) 2017-12-08 2021-06-22 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Carbocyclic nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitors
EP3730503A4 (en) * 2017-12-21 2021-05-05 Shenzhen TargetRx, Inc. Antiviral nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitor
CN112351799A (en) 2018-04-10 2021-02-09 阿堤亚制药公司 Treatment of HCV infected patients with cirrhosis
TWI827760B (en) 2018-12-12 2024-01-01 加拿大商愛彼特生物製藥公司 Substituted arylmethylureas and heteroarylmethylureas, analogues thereof, and methods using same
CN111330557B (en) * 2020-01-17 2022-11-18 中山职业技术学院 Chiral stationary phase, preparation thereof and application thereof in chiral drug resolution
TW202313067A (en) 2020-01-27 2023-04-01 美商基利科學股份有限公司 Methods for treating sars cov-2 infections
TWI794742B (en) 2020-02-18 2023-03-01 美商基利科學股份有限公司 Antiviral compounds
US10874687B1 (en) 2020-02-27 2020-12-29 Atea Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Highly active compounds against COVID-19
CA3169340A1 (en) 2020-03-12 2021-09-16 Pavel R. Badalov Methods of preparing 1'-cyano nucleosides
KR20220164784A (en) 2020-04-06 2022-12-13 길리애드 사이언시즈, 인코포레이티드 Inhalation Formulations of 1′-Cyano Substituted Carbanucleoside Analogues
US20210393653A1 (en) 2020-05-29 2021-12-23 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Remdesivir treatment methods
BR112022026321A2 (en) 2020-06-24 2023-01-17 Gilead Sciences Inc 1'-CYAN NUCLEOSIDE ANALOGS AND USES THEREOF
EP4182299A2 (en) 2020-07-16 2023-05-24 Merck Sharp & Dohme LLC Cyclic cyanoenone derivatives as modulators of keap1
JP2023540225A (en) 2020-08-27 2023-09-22 ギリアード サイエンシーズ, インコーポレイテッド Compounds and methods for the treatment of viral infections
WO2022221514A1 (en) 2021-04-16 2022-10-20 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods of preparing carbanucleosides using amides
WO2023167944A1 (en) 2022-03-02 2023-09-07 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Compounds and methods for treatment of viral infections
WO2023250015A1 (en) * 2022-06-21 2023-12-28 The Children's Medical Center Corporation Pyrimidine nucleoside treatments

Citations (18)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3480613A (en) * 1967-07-03 1969-11-25 Merck & Co Inc 2-c or 3-c-alkylribofuranosyl - 1-substituted compounds and the nucleosides thereof
US5401726A (en) * 1988-08-25 1995-03-28 Yoshitomi Pharaceutical Industries, Ltd. 2'methylidenepyrimidine nucleoside compounds, their use and method for production thereof
US6555676B2 (en) * 1992-05-25 2003-04-29 Centre National De La Recherche Scientifique Biologically active phosphotriester-type compounds
US6653296B1 (en) * 1992-08-05 2003-11-25 Institute Of Organic Chemistry And Biochemistry Of The Academy Of Sciences Of The Czech Republic Antiretroviral enantiomeric nucleotide analogs
US20030219727A1 (en) * 2000-07-21 2003-11-27 Becker Mark W. Prodrugs of phosphonate nucleotide analogues
US20040023901A1 (en) * 2002-02-28 2004-02-05 Cook Phillip D. Nucleoside 5'-monophosphate mimics and their prodrugs
US20040063658A1 (en) * 2002-05-06 2004-04-01 Roberts Christopher Don Nucleoside derivatives for treating hepatitis C virus infection
US6752981B1 (en) * 1999-09-08 2004-06-22 Metabasis Therapeutics, Inc. Prodrugs for liver specific drug delivery
US20040229839A1 (en) * 2003-05-14 2004-11-18 Biocryst Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Substituted nucleosides, preparation thereof and use as inhibitors of RNA viral polymerases
US20050190302A1 (en) * 2004-02-26 2005-09-01 Goedde Kirby R. Automation of field service color temperature alignment
US6984634B2 (en) * 2000-10-06 2006-01-10 Xenoport, Inc. Bile-acid conjugates for providing sustained systemic concentrations of drugs
US7081449B2 (en) * 2000-07-06 2006-07-25 Valeant Research & Development Pyrido[2,3-d]pyrimidine and pyrimido[4,5-d]pyrimidine nucleosides
US7144877B2 (en) * 2000-10-06 2006-12-05 Xenoport, Inc. Bile-acid derived compounds for enhancing oral absorption and systemic bioavailability of drugs
US20060286615A1 (en) * 2003-03-13 2006-12-21 Lederkremer Gerardo Z Novel non-invasive marker for liver function and disease
US7157441B2 (en) * 2000-05-23 2007-01-02 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods and compositions for treating hepatitis C virus
US20070037221A1 (en) * 2005-05-05 2007-02-15 Block Timothy M Diagnosis of liver pathology through assessment of protein glycosylation
US20070042939A1 (en) * 2002-06-28 2007-02-22 Lacolla Paola Modified 2' and 3'-nucleoside prodrugs for treating flaviviridae infections
US20080286230A1 (en) * 2006-12-28 2008-11-20 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections

Family Cites Families (132)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4849513A (en) 1983-12-20 1989-07-18 California Institute Of Technology Deoxyribonucleoside phosphoramidites in which an aliphatic amino group is attached to the sugar ring and their use for the preparation of oligonucleotides containing aliphatic amino groups
DE4207363A1 (en) 1992-03-04 1993-09-09 Max Delbrueck Centrum ANTIVIRAL NUCLEOSIDE ANALOGS, THEIR PRODUCTION AND THEIR PHARMACEUTICAL USE
US6469158B1 (en) 1992-05-14 2002-10-22 Ribozyme Pharmaceuticals, Incorporated Synthesis, deprotection, analysis and purification of RNA and ribozymes
GB9217998D0 (en) * 1992-08-24 1992-10-07 Wellcome Found Methods of treating cancer
US6423489B1 (en) 1992-09-10 2002-07-23 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for treatment of Hepatitis C virus-associated diseases
US6174868B1 (en) 1992-09-10 2001-01-16 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for treatment of hepatitis C virus-associated diseases
US6433159B1 (en) 1992-09-10 2002-08-13 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for treatment of Hepatitis C virus associated diseases
US6995146B2 (en) 1992-09-10 2006-02-07 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for treatment of hepatitis C virus-associated diseases
US6391542B1 (en) 1992-09-10 2002-05-21 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for treatment of Hepatitis C virus-associated diseases
EP0662157B1 (en) 1992-09-10 2001-06-20 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for treatment of hepatitis c virus-associated diseases
US5955591A (en) * 1993-05-12 1999-09-21 Imbach; Jean-Louis Phosphotriester oligonucleotides, amidites and method of preparation
EP0748382B1 (en) 1993-09-02 2002-11-06 Ribozyme Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Non-nucleotide containing enzymatic nucleic acid
US6146886A (en) 1994-08-19 2000-11-14 Ribozyme Pharmaceuticals, Inc. RNA polymerase III-based expression of therapeutic RNAs
US5627185A (en) 1994-11-23 1997-05-06 Gosselin; Gilles Acyclovir derivatives as antiviral agents
GB9505025D0 (en) 1995-03-13 1995-05-03 Medical Res Council Chemical compounds
EP1655033A1 (en) 1995-06-07 2006-05-10 Emory University Nucleosides with anti-hepatitis B virus activity
US7034009B2 (en) 1995-10-26 2006-04-25 Sirna Therapeutics, Inc. Enzymatic nucleic acid-mediated treatment of ocular diseases or conditions related to levels of vascular endothelial growth factor receptor (VEGF-R)
GB9708611D0 (en) 1997-04-28 1997-06-18 Univ Cardiff Chemical compounds
AU7700098A (en) 1997-05-29 1998-12-30 Incara Pharmaceutical Corp. Carbohydrate scaffold compounds and libraries
ES2276515T3 (en) 1998-02-25 2007-06-16 Emory University 2'-FLUORONUCLEOSIDS.
US6833361B2 (en) 1998-05-26 2004-12-21 Ribapharm, Inc. Nucleosides having bicyclic sugar moiety
US6274725B1 (en) * 1998-06-02 2001-08-14 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Activators for oligonucleotide synthesis
GB9821058D0 (en) 1998-09-28 1998-11-18 Univ Cardiff Chemical compound
CA2389745C (en) 1999-11-04 2010-03-23 Shire Biochem Inc. Method for the treatment or prevention of flaviviridae viral infection using nucleoside analogues
US20070026394A1 (en) 2000-02-11 2007-02-01 Lawrence Blatt Modulation of gene expression associated with inflammation proliferation and neurite outgrowth using nucleic acid based technologies
AU2001235278A1 (en) 2000-02-18 2001-08-27 Shire Biochem Inc Method for the treatment or prevention of flavivirus infections using nucleoside analogues
EP1284741B1 (en) 2000-04-13 2008-11-19 Pharmasset, Inc. 3'-or 2'-hydroxymethyl substituted nucleoside derivatives for treatment of viral infections
GB0011203D0 (en) 2000-05-09 2000-06-28 Univ Cardiff Chemical compounds
US6787526B1 (en) 2000-05-26 2004-09-07 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods of treating hepatitis delta virus infection with β-L-2′-deoxy-nucleosides
CN101099745A (en) 2000-05-26 2008-01-09 艾登尼科斯(开曼)有限公司 Methods and compositions for treating flaviviruses and pestiviruses
US7045309B2 (en) * 2000-07-07 2006-05-16 The Research Foundation Of State University Of New York 9-substituted adenine derivatives as prodrug regulators of cell and tissue function
US20030008841A1 (en) 2000-08-30 2003-01-09 Rene Devos Anti-HCV nucleoside derivatives
KR20090089922A (en) 2000-10-18 2009-08-24 파마셋 인코포레이티드 Modified nucleosides for treatment of viral infections and abnormal cellular proliferation
BR0116221A (en) 2000-12-15 2005-09-13 Pharmasset Ltd Antiviral agents for treatment of flaviviridae infections
US7105499B2 (en) 2001-01-22 2006-09-12 Merck & Co., Inc. Nucleoside derivatives as inhibitors of RNA-dependent RNA viral polymerase
JP3914156B2 (en) 2001-01-22 2007-05-16 メルク エンド カムパニー インコーポレーテッド Nucleoside derivatives as RNA-dependent RNA viral polymerase inhibitors
WO2002070533A2 (en) 2001-03-01 2002-09-12 Pharmasset Ltd. Method for the synthesis of 2',3'-dideoxy-2',3'-didehydronucleosides
US20050148530A1 (en) 2002-02-20 2005-07-07 Sirna Therapeutics, Inc. RNA interference mediated inhibition of vascular endothelial growth factor and vascular endothelial growth factor receptor gene expression using short interfering nucleic acid (siNA)
US20040209831A1 (en) 2002-02-20 2004-10-21 Mcswiggen James RNA interference mediated inhibition of hepatitis C virus (HCV) gene expression using short interfering nucleic acid (siNA)
US7109165B2 (en) 2001-05-18 2006-09-19 Sirna Therapeutics, Inc. Conjugates and compositions for cellular delivery
GB0112617D0 (en) 2001-05-23 2001-07-18 Hoffmann La Roche Antiviral nucleoside derivatives
GB0114286D0 (en) 2001-06-12 2001-08-01 Hoffmann La Roche Nucleoside Derivatives
JP2004534830A (en) 2001-06-21 2004-11-18 グラクソ グループ リミテッド Nucleoside compounds in HCV
AU2002330154A1 (en) 2001-09-28 2003-04-07 Centre National De La Recherche Scientifique Methods and compositions for treating hepatitis c virus using 4'-modified nucleosides
WO2003026675A1 (en) 2001-09-28 2003-04-03 Idenix (Cayman) Limited Methods and compositions for treating flaviviruses and pestiviruses using 4'-modified nucleoside
WO2003062256A1 (en) 2002-01-17 2003-07-31 Ribapharm Inc. 2'-beta-modified-6-substituted adenosine analogs and their use as antiviral agents
EP1476169B1 (en) 2002-02-13 2013-03-20 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Inhibiting orthopoxvirus replication with nucleoside compounds
ATE519774T1 (en) 2002-02-20 2011-08-15 Sirna Therapeutics Inc RNA DISRUPTION-MEDIATED INHIBITION OF HEPATITIS C VIRUS (HCV) GENE EXPRESSION WITH SHORT INTERFERING NUCLEIC ACID (SINA)
CA2477741A1 (en) * 2002-02-28 2003-09-04 Biota, Inc. Nucleotide mimics and their prodrugs
WO2003100017A2 (en) 2002-05-24 2003-12-04 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Oligonucleotides having modified nucleoside units
JP2005533777A (en) * 2002-06-17 2005-11-10 メルク エンド カムパニー インコーポレーテッド Carbocyclic nucleoside analogs as RNA antiviral agents
WO2004000858A2 (en) 2002-06-21 2003-12-31 Merck & Co., Inc. Nucleoside derivatives as inhibitors of rna-dependent rna viral polymerase
AU2003269892A1 (en) * 2002-06-27 2004-01-19 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Nucleoside derivatives as inhibitors of rna-dependent rna viral polymerase
JP5087211B2 (en) 2002-06-28 2012-12-05 イデニクス(ケイマン)リミテツド 2 'and 3'-nucleoside prodrugs for the treatment of flavivirus infection
PL374831A1 (en) 2002-06-28 2005-10-31 Idenix (Cayman) Limited Modified 2' and 3' -nucleoside prodrugs for treating flaviridae infections
RS113904A (en) 2002-06-28 2007-02-05 Idenix (Cayman) Limited 2'-c-methyl-3'-o-l-valine ester ribofuranosyl cytidine for treatment of flaviviridae infections
CN101172993A (en) 2002-06-28 2008-05-07 埃迪尼克斯(开曼)有限公司 2'-c-methyl-3'-o-l-valine ester ribofuranosyl cytidine for treatment of flaviviridae infections
AU2003269902A1 (en) 2002-07-16 2004-02-02 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Nucleoside derivatives as inhibitors of rna-dependent rna viral polymerase
AU2003256619A1 (en) 2002-07-24 2004-02-09 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Pyrrolopyrimidine thionucleoside analogs as antivirals
CN1675480A (en) 2002-08-15 2005-09-28 道康宁有限公司 Composition and device for dampening mechanical motion
CA2496547A1 (en) 2002-08-29 2004-03-11 University Of Southampton Use of apoptosis inducing agents in the preparation of a medicament for the treatment of liver diseases
EP1546164A4 (en) 2002-09-26 2006-06-07 Lg Life Sciences Ltd (+)-trans-isomers of (1-phosphonomethoxy-2-alkylcyclopropyl) methyl nucleoside derivatives, process for the preparation of stereoisomers thereof, and use of antiviral agents thereof
US20040229840A1 (en) * 2002-10-29 2004-11-18 Balkrishen Bhat Nucleoside derivatives as inhibitors of RNA-dependent RNA viral polymerase
HUE033832T2 (en) 2002-11-15 2018-01-29 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc 2'-methyl nucleosides in combination with interferon and flaviviridae mutation
TWI332507B (en) 2002-11-19 2010-11-01 Hoffmann La Roche Antiviral nucleoside derivatives
US7598373B2 (en) 2002-12-12 2009-10-06 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Process for the production of 2-C-methyl-D-ribonolactone
AR043006A1 (en) 2003-02-12 2005-07-13 Merck & Co Inc PROCESS TO PREPARE RAMIFIED RIBONUCLEOSIDS
WO2004100960A2 (en) 2003-04-25 2004-11-25 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Anti-inflammatory phosphonate compounds
JP5069463B2 (en) 2003-04-25 2012-11-07 ギリアード サイエンシーズ, インコーポレイテッド Antiviral phosphonate analogues
WO2004096233A2 (en) 2003-04-25 2004-11-11 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Nucleoside phosphonate conjugates
WO2004096285A2 (en) 2003-04-25 2004-11-11 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Anti-infective phosphonate conjugates
WO2004096237A2 (en) 2003-04-25 2004-11-11 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Phosphonate analogs for treating metabolic diseases
CA2522845A1 (en) 2003-04-25 2004-11-11 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Kinase inhibitor phosphonate conjugates
US7427636B2 (en) 2003-04-25 2008-09-23 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Inosine monophosphate dehydrogenase inhibitory phosphonate compounds
EP1656093A2 (en) 2003-05-14 2006-05-17 Idenix (Cayman) Limited Nucleosides for treatment of infection by corona viruses, toga viruses and picorna viruses
WO2005020885A2 (en) 2003-05-21 2005-03-10 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for the treatment of severe acute respiratory syndrome (sars)
KR100883703B1 (en) 2003-05-30 2009-02-12 파마셋 인코포레이티드 Modified fluorinated nucleoside analogues
EP1644395B1 (en) 2003-06-19 2006-11-22 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Processes for preparing 4'azido nucleoside derivatives
US20050043266A1 (en) 2003-07-25 2005-02-24 Sumedha Jayasena Short interfering RNA as an antiviral agent for hepatitis C
EP1660511B1 (en) 2003-08-27 2010-11-03 Biota Scientific Management Pty. Ltd. Novel tricyclic nucleosides or nucleotides as therapeutic agents
WO2005044308A1 (en) 2003-10-24 2005-05-19 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Phosphonate analogs of antimetabolites
WO2005044279A1 (en) 2003-10-24 2005-05-19 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Purine nucleoside phosphonate conjugates
CA2543116A1 (en) 2003-10-27 2005-05-19 Genelabs Technologies, Inc. Methods for preparing 7-(2'-substituted-.szlig.-d-ribofuranosyl)-4-(nr2r3)-5-(substituted ethyn-1-yl)-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine derivatives
AU2004293013B2 (en) 2003-11-19 2011-04-28 Metabasis Therapeutics, Inc. Novel phosphorus-containing thyromimetics
US20050182252A1 (en) 2004-02-13 2005-08-18 Reddy K. R. Novel 2'-C-methyl nucleoside derivatives
WO2005087788A2 (en) 2004-03-04 2005-09-22 The Regents Of The University Of California Methods for preparation of nucleoside phosphonate esters
EP1912643A2 (en) 2004-06-23 2008-04-23 Idenix (Cayman) Limited 5-aza-7-deazapurine derivatives for treating infections with flaviviridae
WO2006012078A2 (en) 2004-06-24 2006-02-02 Merck & Co., Inc. Nucleoside aryl phosphoramidates for the treatment of rna-dependent rna viral infection
EP2348029A1 (en) 2004-07-21 2011-07-27 Pharmasset, Inc. Preparation of alkyl-substituted 2-deoxy-2-fluoro-d-ribofuranosyl pyrimidines and purines and their derivatives
CA2577526A1 (en) 2004-08-23 2006-03-02 Joseph Armstrong Martin Antiviral 4'-azido-nucleosides
AU2005317081A1 (en) 2004-10-21 2006-06-22 Merck & Co., Inc. Fluorinated pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine nucleosides for the treatment of RNA-dependent RNA viral infection
JP2008523082A (en) 2004-12-09 2008-07-03 リージェンツ オブ ザ ユニバーシティ オブ ミネソタ Nucleotides having antibacterial and anticancer activities
CN101128474A (en) 2005-02-28 2008-02-20 健亚生物科技公司 Tricyclic-nucleoside prodrugs for treating viral infections
AU2006222563A1 (en) 2005-03-08 2006-09-14 Biota Scientific Management Pty Ltd. Bicyclic nucleosides and nucleotides as therapeutic agents
CA2600359A1 (en) 2005-03-09 2006-09-09 Idenix (Cayman) Limited Nucleosides with non-natural bases as anti-viral agents
AR056327A1 (en) * 2005-04-25 2007-10-03 Genelabs Tech Inc NUCLEOSID COMPOUNDS FOR THE TREATMENT OF VIRAL INFECTIONS
WO2006116512A1 (en) 2005-04-26 2006-11-02 The Board Of Trustees Of The University Of Illinois, Urbana, Il Nucleoside compounds and methods of use thereof
WO2006122207A1 (en) * 2005-05-10 2006-11-16 Valeant Research & Development 6-hydrazinopurine 2'-methyl ribonucleosides and nucleotides for treatment of hcv
WO2007027248A2 (en) 2005-05-16 2007-03-08 Valeant Research & Development 3', 5' - cyclic nucleoside analogues for treatment of hcv
EP1928475B1 (en) 2005-08-15 2018-05-23 Riboscience LLC Antiviral phosphoramidates of 4'-c-azido-substituted pronucleotides
CA2634749C (en) 2005-12-23 2014-08-19 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Process for preparing a synthetic intermediate for preparation of branched nucleosides
WO2007095269A2 (en) 2006-02-14 2007-08-23 Merck & Co., Inc. Nucleoside aryl phosphoramidates for the treatment of rna-dependent rna viral infection
GB0623493D0 (en) 2006-11-24 2007-01-03 Univ Cardiff Chemical compounds
CN101333235A (en) 2007-06-29 2008-12-31 天津大学 Nucleoside derivates with ethynyl and fluor substituted glycosyl
GB0718575D0 (en) 2007-09-24 2007-10-31 Angeletti P Ist Richerche Bio Nucleoside derivatives as inhibitors of viral polymerases
JP2013523765A (en) 2010-04-01 2013-06-17 イデニク プハルマセウティカルス,インコーポレイテッド Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
CN103842369A (en) 2011-03-31 2014-06-04 埃迪尼克斯医药公司 Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
BR112013026345A2 (en) 2011-04-13 2019-04-24 Merck Sharp & Dohe Corp. compound, pharmaceutical composition, use of a compound, and method for treating an hcv infected patient
EP2697242B1 (en) 2011-04-13 2018-10-03 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. 2'-azido substituted nucleoside derivatives and methods of use thereof for the treatment of viral diseases
US9150603B2 (en) 2011-04-13 2015-10-06 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. 2′-cyano substituted nucleoside derivatives and methods of use thereof useful for the treatment of viral diseases
AR088441A1 (en) 2011-09-12 2014-06-11 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Inc SUBSTITUTED CARBONYLOXYMETHYLPHOSPHORAMIDATE COMPOUNDS AND PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS FOR THE TREATMENT OF VIRAL INFECTIONS
US8507460B2 (en) 2011-10-14 2013-08-13 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Substituted 3′,5′-cyclic phosphates of purine nucleotide compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
US9296778B2 (en) 2012-05-22 2016-03-29 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 3′,5′-cyclic phosphate prodrugs for HCV infection
EP2852604B1 (en) 2012-05-22 2017-04-12 Idenix Pharmaceuticals LLC 3',5'-cyclic phosphoramidate prodrugs for hcv infection
PE20150132A1 (en) 2012-05-22 2015-02-14 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Inc D-AMINO ACID COMPOUNDS FOR HEPATIC DISEASE
EP2900682A1 (en) 2012-09-27 2015-08-05 IDENIX Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Esters and malonates of sate prodrugs
CA2887578A1 (en) 2012-10-08 2014-04-17 Idenix Pharamaceuticals, Inc. 2'-chloro nucleoside analogs for hcv infection
AR092959A1 (en) 2012-10-17 2015-05-06 Merck Sharp & Dohme DERIVATIVES OF NUCLEOSIDS 2-METHYL SUBSTITUTED AND METHODS OF USE OF THE SAME FOR THE TREATMENT OF VIRAL DISEASES
US9242988B2 (en) 2012-10-17 2016-01-26 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. 2′-cyano substituted nucleoside derivatives and methods of use thereof for the treatment of viral diseases
US9457039B2 (en) 2012-10-17 2016-10-04 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. 2′-disubstituted nucleoside derivatives and methods of use thereof for the treatment of viral diseases
US20140112886A1 (en) 2012-10-19 2014-04-24 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Dinucleotide compounds for hcv infection
WO2014066239A1 (en) 2012-10-22 2014-05-01 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 2',4'-bridged nucleosides for hcv infection
EP2938624A1 (en) 2012-11-14 2015-11-04 IDENIX Pharmaceuticals, Inc. D-alanine ester of sp-nucleoside analog
WO2014078427A1 (en) 2012-11-14 2014-05-22 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. D-alanine ester of rp-nucleoside analog
US9211300B2 (en) 2012-12-19 2015-12-15 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc 4′-fluoro nucleosides for the treatment of HCV
EP2970358B1 (en) 2013-03-04 2021-06-30 Idenix Pharmaceuticals LLC 3'-deoxy nucleosides for the treatment of hcv
US9339541B2 (en) 2013-03-04 2016-05-17 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Thiophosphate nucleosides for the treatment of HCV
WO2014160484A1 (en) 2013-03-13 2014-10-02 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Amino acid phosphoramidate pronucleotides of 2'-cyano, azido and amino nucleosides for the treatment of hcv
WO2014165542A1 (en) 2013-04-01 2014-10-09 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 2',4'-fluoro nucleosides for the treatment of hcv
WO2014197578A1 (en) 2013-06-05 2014-12-11 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 1',4'-thio nucleosides for the treatment of hcv
US9765107B2 (en) 2013-06-18 2017-09-19 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Cyclic phosphonate substituted nucleoside derivatives and methods of use thereof for the treatment of viral diseases
WO2015017713A1 (en) 2013-08-01 2015-02-05 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. D-amino acid phosphoramidate pronucleotides of halogeno pyrimidine compounds for liver disease

Patent Citations (18)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3480613A (en) * 1967-07-03 1969-11-25 Merck & Co Inc 2-c or 3-c-alkylribofuranosyl - 1-substituted compounds and the nucleosides thereof
US5401726A (en) * 1988-08-25 1995-03-28 Yoshitomi Pharaceutical Industries, Ltd. 2'methylidenepyrimidine nucleoside compounds, their use and method for production thereof
US6555676B2 (en) * 1992-05-25 2003-04-29 Centre National De La Recherche Scientifique Biologically active phosphotriester-type compounds
US6653296B1 (en) * 1992-08-05 2003-11-25 Institute Of Organic Chemistry And Biochemistry Of The Academy Of Sciences Of The Czech Republic Antiretroviral enantiomeric nucleotide analogs
US6752981B1 (en) * 1999-09-08 2004-06-22 Metabasis Therapeutics, Inc. Prodrugs for liver specific drug delivery
US7157441B2 (en) * 2000-05-23 2007-01-02 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods and compositions for treating hepatitis C virus
US7081449B2 (en) * 2000-07-06 2006-07-25 Valeant Research & Development Pyrido[2,3-d]pyrimidine and pyrimido[4,5-d]pyrimidine nucleosides
US20030219727A1 (en) * 2000-07-21 2003-11-27 Becker Mark W. Prodrugs of phosphonate nucleotide analogues
US7144877B2 (en) * 2000-10-06 2006-12-05 Xenoport, Inc. Bile-acid derived compounds for enhancing oral absorption and systemic bioavailability of drugs
US6984634B2 (en) * 2000-10-06 2006-01-10 Xenoport, Inc. Bile-acid conjugates for providing sustained systemic concentrations of drugs
US20040023901A1 (en) * 2002-02-28 2004-02-05 Cook Phillip D. Nucleoside 5'-monophosphate mimics and their prodrugs
US20040063658A1 (en) * 2002-05-06 2004-04-01 Roberts Christopher Don Nucleoside derivatives for treating hepatitis C virus infection
US20070042939A1 (en) * 2002-06-28 2007-02-22 Lacolla Paola Modified 2' and 3'-nucleoside prodrugs for treating flaviviridae infections
US20060286615A1 (en) * 2003-03-13 2006-12-21 Lederkremer Gerardo Z Novel non-invasive marker for liver function and disease
US20040229839A1 (en) * 2003-05-14 2004-11-18 Biocryst Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Substituted nucleosides, preparation thereof and use as inhibitors of RNA viral polymerases
US20050190302A1 (en) * 2004-02-26 2005-09-01 Goedde Kirby R. Automation of field service color temperature alignment
US20070037221A1 (en) * 2005-05-05 2007-02-15 Block Timothy M Diagnosis of liver pathology through assessment of protein glycosylation
US20080286230A1 (en) * 2006-12-28 2008-11-20 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections

Cited By (69)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10758557B2 (en) 2000-05-23 2020-09-01 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc Methods and compositions for treating hepatitis C virus
US10363265B2 (en) 2000-05-23 2019-07-30 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc Methods and compositions for treating hepatitis C virus
US9968628B2 (en) 2000-05-26 2018-05-15 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc Methods and compositions for treating flaviviruses and pestiviruses
US10525072B2 (en) 2002-11-15 2020-01-07 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc 2′-branched nucleosides and flaviviridae mutation
US8222257B2 (en) 2005-04-01 2012-07-17 The Regents Of The University Of California Phosphono-pent-2-en-1-yl nucleosides and analogs
US7951789B2 (en) 2006-12-28 2011-05-31 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
US7902202B2 (en) 2006-12-28 2011-03-08 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
US20080286230A1 (en) * 2006-12-28 2008-11-20 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
US9249173B2 (en) 2006-12-28 2016-02-02 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Llc Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
US20090238790A2 (en) * 2006-12-28 2009-09-24 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and Pharmaceutical Compositions for the Treatment of Viral Infections
US20090169504A1 (en) * 2006-12-28 2009-07-02 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc Compounds and Pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of Viral infections
US8691788B2 (en) 2006-12-28 2014-04-08 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
US8759510B2 (en) 2008-06-11 2014-06-24 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside cyclicphosphates
US20100003217A1 (en) * 2008-07-02 2010-01-07 Erika Cretton-Scott Compounds and Pharmaceutical Compositions for the Treatment of Viral Infections
US8716262B2 (en) 2008-12-23 2014-05-06 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside phosphoramidates
US8716263B2 (en) 2008-12-23 2014-05-06 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Synthesis of purine nucleosides
US8551973B2 (en) 2008-12-23 2013-10-08 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside analogs
US8957045B2 (en) 2008-12-23 2015-02-17 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside phosphoramidates
US9045520B2 (en) 2008-12-23 2015-06-02 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Synthesis of purine nucleosides
US8859756B2 (en) 2010-03-31 2014-10-14 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Stereoselective synthesis of phosphorus containing actives
US8680071B2 (en) 2010-04-01 2014-03-25 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
US8871737B2 (en) 2010-09-22 2014-10-28 Alios Biopharma, Inc. Substituted nucleotide analogs
US9278990B2 (en) 2010-09-22 2016-03-08 Alios Biopharma, Inc. Substituted nucleotide analogs
US10912816B2 (en) 2010-10-15 2021-02-09 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Obesity-related genes and their proteins and uses thereof
WO2012051567A3 (en) * 2010-10-15 2012-12-06 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Obesity-related genes and their proteins and uses thereof
US20150139978A1 (en) * 2010-12-23 2015-05-21 Food Industry Research And Development Institute Novel monascuspurpurones, preparation process thereof, and uses of the monascuspurpurones
US10118909B2 (en) * 2010-12-23 2018-11-06 Food Industry Research And Development Institute Monascuspurpurones, preparation and uses thereof
US9243025B2 (en) 2011-03-31 2016-01-26 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Llc Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
US9403863B2 (en) 2011-09-12 2016-08-02 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc Substituted carbonyloxymethylphosphoramidate compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
US8507460B2 (en) 2011-10-14 2013-08-13 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Substituted 3′,5′-cyclic phosphates of purine nucleotide compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
US8980865B2 (en) 2011-12-22 2015-03-17 Alios Biopharma, Inc. Substituted nucleotide analogs
US9605018B2 (en) 2011-12-22 2017-03-28 Alios Biopharma, Inc. Substituted nucleotide analogs
WO2013123407A1 (en) * 2012-02-17 2013-08-22 Celsion Corporation Thermosensitive nanoparticle formulations and method of making the same
US10251901B2 (en) 2012-02-17 2019-04-09 Celsion Corporation Thermosensitive nanoparticle formulations and method of making the same
TWI684463B (en) * 2012-02-17 2020-02-11 美商賽爾森公司 Thermosensitive nanoparticle formulations and method of making the same
TWI637754B (en) * 2012-02-17 2018-10-11 賽爾森公司 Thermosensitive nanoparticle formulations and method of making the same
US9856284B2 (en) 2012-03-21 2018-01-02 Alios Biopharma, Inc. Solid forms of a thiophosphoramidate nucleotide prodrug
US9394330B2 (en) 2012-03-21 2016-07-19 Alios Biopharma, Inc. Solid forms of a thiophosphoramidate nucleotide prodrug
US8916538B2 (en) 2012-03-21 2014-12-23 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Solid forms of a thiophosphoramidate nucleotide prodrug
US9012427B2 (en) 2012-03-22 2015-04-21 Alios Biopharma, Inc. Pharmaceutical combinations comprising a thionucleotide analog
US9296778B2 (en) 2012-05-22 2016-03-29 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 3′,5′-cyclic phosphate prodrugs for HCV infection
US10717758B2 (en) 2012-05-22 2020-07-21 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc D-amino acid compounds for liver disease
US9109001B2 (en) 2012-05-22 2015-08-18 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 3′,5′-cyclic phosphoramidate prodrugs for HCV infection
US10301347B2 (en) 2012-05-25 2019-05-28 Janssen Sciences Ireland Unlimited Company Uracyl spirooxetane nucleosides
US9845336B2 (en) 2012-05-25 2017-12-19 Janssen Sciences Ireland Uc Uracyl spirooxetane nucleosides
US10774106B2 (en) 2012-05-25 2020-09-15 Janssen Sciences Ireland Unlimited Company Uracyl spirooxetane nucleosides
US10040814B2 (en) 2012-05-25 2018-08-07 Janssen Sciences Ireland Uc Uracyl spirooxetane nucleosides
US9422323B2 (en) 2012-05-25 2016-08-23 Janssen Sciences Ireland Uc Uracyl spirooxetane nucleosides
US10544184B2 (en) 2012-05-25 2020-01-28 Janssen Sciences Ireland Unlimited Company Uracyl spirooxetane nucleosides
US9192621B2 (en) 2012-09-27 2015-11-24 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc Esters and malonates of SATE prodrugs
US10513534B2 (en) 2012-10-08 2019-12-24 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc 2′-chloro nucleoside analogs for HCV infection
US10723754B2 (en) 2012-10-22 2020-07-28 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc 2′,4′-bridged nucleosides for HCV infection
US9211300B2 (en) 2012-12-19 2015-12-15 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc 4′-fluoro nucleosides for the treatment of HCV
CN103012520B (en) * 2012-12-28 2015-12-02 中国科学院上海有机化学研究所 The luxuriant and rich with fragrance glycosides derivative of anti-hepatitis B virus activities compound
CN103012520A (en) * 2012-12-28 2013-04-03 中国科学院上海有机化学研究所 Anti-HBV (Hepatitis B Virus) active compound philippine indican derivative
US20140212355A1 (en) * 2013-01-28 2014-07-31 Abbott Cardiovascular Systems Inc. Trans-arterial drug delivery
US9339541B2 (en) 2013-03-04 2016-05-17 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Thiophosphate nucleosides for the treatment of HCV
US9309275B2 (en) 2013-03-04 2016-04-12 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc 3′-deoxy nucleosides for the treatment of HCV
US10231986B2 (en) 2013-03-13 2019-03-19 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc Amino acid phosphoramidate pronucleotides of 2′-cyano, azido and amino nucleosides for the treatment of HCV
US9187515B2 (en) 2013-04-01 2015-11-17 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc 2′,4′-fluoro nucleosides for the treatment of HCV
US10005779B2 (en) 2013-06-05 2018-06-26 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc 1′,4′-thio nucleosides for the treatment of HCV
US10238680B2 (en) 2013-08-01 2019-03-26 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc D-amino acid phosphoramidate pronucleotides of halogeno pyrimidine compounds for liver disease
US10202411B2 (en) 2014-04-16 2019-02-12 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc 3′-substituted methyl or alkynyl nucleosides nucleotides for the treatment of HCV
WO2015181624A3 (en) * 2014-05-28 2016-03-31 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc Nucleoside derivatives for the treatment of cancer
US11154591B2 (en) 2016-10-14 2021-10-26 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Methods of treating alcohol abuse disorder
KR20200011485A (en) * 2017-06-05 2020-02-03 바이킹 테라퓨틱스 인코포레이티드 Compositions for the Treatment of Fibrosis
US11707472B2 (en) * 2017-06-05 2023-07-25 Viking Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions for the treatment of fibrosis
KR102600115B1 (en) 2017-06-05 2023-11-09 바이킹 테라퓨틱스 인코포레이티드 Composition for treating fibrosis
US11787828B2 (en) 2018-03-22 2023-10-17 Viking Therapeutics, Inc. Crystalline forms and methods of producing crystalline forms of a compound

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2008082602A2 (en) 2008-07-10
US7902202B2 (en) 2011-03-08
WO2008082601A3 (en) 2008-10-16
MX2009006851A (en) 2009-11-02
NZ577999A (en) 2012-02-24
EP2120566A2 (en) 2009-11-25
TW200843783A (en) 2008-11-16
KR20090098995A (en) 2009-09-18
EP2107909A4 (en) 2010-06-02
CA2673776A1 (en) 2008-07-10
BRPI0720637A2 (en) 2014-04-15
US20140255339A1 (en) 2014-09-11
WO2008082602A3 (en) 2008-08-28
US20110286962A1 (en) 2011-11-24
KR101508018B1 (en) 2015-04-08
IL200116A0 (en) 2011-07-31
JP2010514769A (en) 2010-05-06
EP2120566A4 (en) 2010-07-14
JP2010514768A (en) 2010-05-06
EP2107909A2 (en) 2009-10-14
AU2007339226B2 (en) 2013-03-07
US20090169504A1 (en) 2009-07-02
UA96975C2 (en) 2011-12-26
US8691788B2 (en) 2014-04-08
US9249173B2 (en) 2016-02-02
WO2008082601A2 (en) 2008-07-10
ME00816B (en) 2012-03-20
US20090238790A2 (en) 2009-09-24
US20080286230A1 (en) 2008-11-20
CA2673722A1 (en) 2008-07-10
JP2014139218A (en) 2014-07-31
EP2120566B1 (en) 2019-05-08
RU2525392C2 (en) 2014-08-10
JP5578853B2 (en) 2014-08-27
SG177923A1 (en) 2012-02-28
RU2012132218A (en) 2014-02-10
TW200844108A (en) 2008-11-16
US7951789B2 (en) 2011-05-31
NO20092585L (en) 2009-09-16
MY169568A (en) 2019-04-22
TWI412368B (en) 2013-10-21
AU2007339226A1 (en) 2008-07-10

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20080261913A1 (en) Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of liver disorders
US10717758B2 (en) D-amino acid compounds for liver disease
US10513534B2 (en) 2′-chloro nucleoside analogs for HCV infection
US9211300B2 (en) 4′-fluoro nucleosides for the treatment of HCV
US9109001B2 (en) 3′,5′-cyclic phosphoramidate prodrugs for HCV infection
US9339541B2 (en) Thiophosphate nucleosides for the treatment of HCV
US10202411B2 (en) 3′-substituted methyl or alkynyl nucleosides nucleotides for the treatment of HCV
US20170198005A1 (en) 2'-dichloro and 2'-fluoro-2'-chloro nucleoside analogues for hcv infection
US20130315867A1 (en) 3',5'-cyclic phosphate prodrugs for hcv infection
US20140271547A1 (en) Amino acid phosphoramidate pronucleotides of 2'-cyano, azido and amino nucleosides for the treatment of hcv
US10683321B2 (en) 4′-or nucleosides for the treatment of HCV
US20160280729A1 (en) Cyclopentane and cyclopentene nucleoside analogs for the treatment of hcv

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: L'UNIVERSITE MONTPELLIER II, FRANCE

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:PERIGAUD, CHRISTIAN;REEL/FRAME:021160/0199

Effective date: 20080325

Owner name: IDENIX PHARMACEUTICALS, INC., MASSACHUSETTS

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:SOMMADOSSI, JEAN-PIERRE;REEL/FRAME:021163/0395

Effective date: 20080512

Owner name: CENTRE NATIONAL DE LA RECHERCHE SCIENTIFIQUE, FRAN

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:GOSSELIN, GILLES;PEYROTTES, SUZANNE;REEL/FRAME:021160/0192;SIGNING DATES FROM 20080318 TO 20080325

AS Assignment

Owner name: IDENIX PHARMACEUTICALS, INC., MASSACHUSETTS

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:PIERRA, CLAIRE;REEL/FRAME:021170/0381

Effective date: 20080326

AS Assignment

Owner name: IDENIX PHARMACEUTICALS, INC., MASSACHUSETTS

Free format text: CORRECTIVE ASSIGNMENT TO CORRECT THE DOCKET NUMBER PREVIOUSLY RECORDED ON REEL 021170 FRAME 0381;ASSIGNOR:PIERRA, CLAIRE;REEL/FRAME:021283/0534

Effective date: 20080326

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION